summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/00readme.txt215
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/01install.txt50
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/FAQ-display.tex708
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/FAQ-printout.tex732
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPcfg.tex44
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPindexing.tex52
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPpreamble.tex183
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/bckwrdexample.tex149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/bgndexample.tex433
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/00readme.txt56
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/config.landscapeplus13
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/tpmultiinc.tarbin0 -> 20480 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/divexample.tex130
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/fancystep.tex29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/foilsdemo.tex227
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/fulldemo.tex2908
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/hilitexample.tex206
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/ifmslidemo.tex236
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/manual.pdfbin0 -> 316046 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/manual.tex2264
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/mathexample.tex246
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/panelexample.tex313
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/parexample.tex136
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pdfscrdemo.tex236
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pdfslidemo.tex232
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picexample.tex99
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picltxexample.tex145
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picpsexample.tex141
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pp4sldemo.tex227
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/prosperdemo.tex67
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/seminardemo.tex250
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/simpledemo.tex223
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/slidesdemo.tex243
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/spanelexample.tex124
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tabexample.tex117
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/00readme.txt90
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/01install.txt79
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/Makefile38
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/slifontsexample.tex1600
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.dtx1621
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.ins64
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.pdfbin0 -> 75698 bytes
42 files changed, 14926 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/00readme.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/00readme.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8c8b03bc1bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/00readme.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+======================================================================
+
+ TeXPower bundle
+ Creating dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+
+ alpha version (v0.1)
+ This readme file last changed on July 26, 2004
+
+Developers: Stephan Lehmke <mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+ Lehrstuhl Informatik I
+ Universität Dortmund
+ Dortmund, Germany
+
+ Hans Fr. Nordhaug <mailto:hans@nordhaug.priv.no>
+ Molde, Norway
+
+======================================================================
+
+ TeXPower is a bundle of packages intended to provide
+ an `all-inclusive' environment for designing pdf
+ `screen presentations' to be viewed with Adobe Acrobat[tm]
+ reader in full-screen mode, especially for projecting
+ `online' with a video beamer.
+
+ The features provided include:
+
+ * `dynamic' features like incremental building of pages,
+ animated diagrams and such.
+
+ * support for `navigation panels'
+
+ * support for page backgrounds
+
+ * advanced color management (`logical markup' for colors supplying
+ `color sets' for different background colors, `dimming' and inverting
+ of colors etc.) and color highlighting.
+
+ * advanced font configuration.
+
+======================================================================
+
+The TeXPower project homepage is located at SourceForge:
+
+ <http://texpower.sourceforge.net/>
+
+The mailing list is also located at SourceForge:
+
+ <http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/texpower-users>
+
+======================================================================
+
+Contents:
+=========
+
+So far, the bundle contains the following files and directories:
+
+
+00readme.txt
+ This file.
+
+01install.txt
+ Installation instructions.
+
+Makefile
+ Builds documentation and unpacks dtx-files.
+ (Only useful on Unix-like systems.)
+
+texpower.dtx
+ Documented TeX source for the texpower package.
+
+powersem.dtx
+ Documented TeX source for the powersem class.
+
+texpower-cfg.dtx
+ Configuration files for the texpower package.
+
+texpower-addons.dtx
+ Documented TeX source for auxilliary packages and classes which use or
+ augment the TeXPower bundle.
+
+texpower-doc.dtx
+ TeX source for documentation, examples and demos for the TeXPower
+ bundle. Compiled examples can be downloaded from
+ <http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/>
+
+tpbundle.ins
+ Docstrip batchfile that generates all the files described below from the
+ texpower dtx-files (described above).
+
+tpslifonts (directory)
+ Contains the tpslifonts package and an example.
+
+contrib (directory)
+ Contains some additions to the TeXPower bundle contributed by other people.
+
+Generated files:
+================
+
+texpower.sty (from texpower.dtx)
+
+ Implements commands for presentation effects. This includes
+ * color management and highlighting;
+ * incremental displaying of pages;
+ * navigation helpers;
+ * setting page backgrounds and `panels'.
+
+ The code should work with all ways of PDF creation.
+
+tpcolors.cfg (from texpower-cfg.dtx)
+tpoptions.cfg (from texpower-cfg.dtx)
+tpsettings.cfg (from texpower-cfg.dtx)
+
+ Configuration files for texpower.sty.
+
+powersem.cls (from powersem.dtx)
+
+ A wrapper for seminar which sets up everything for dynamic
+ presentations. For this alpha version, it doesn't do much
+ more than load seminar.cls and do some bug fixes.
+
+ \documentclass{powersem} should be used as a replacement for
+ \documentclass{seminar}. powersem loads seminar and passes all
+ options to seminar.
+
+automata.sty (from texpower-addons.sty)
+
+ Experimental package for drawing automata in the sense of
+ theoretical computer science (using PSTricks) and animating
+ them with TeXPower.
+ Only DFA and Mealy automata are supported so far.
+
+
+fixseminar.sty (from texpower-addons.sty)
+
+ A small fix to seminar in conjunction with pdf generation
+ (respect magnification in page dimensions setting).
+
+
+tplists.sty (from texpower-addons.sty)
+
+ This package provides dynamic lists. Read the start of the file
+ for documentation and an example.
+
+
+tppstcol.sty (from texpower-addons.sty)
+
+ A replacement for ``pstcol.sty'' with some quirks corrected.
+
+
+tpsem-a4.sty (from texpower-addons.sty)
+
+ An LaTeX2e-fied sem-a4.sty (part of seminar).
+
+FAQ-display.tex / FAQ-printout.tex (from texpower-doc.dtx)
+
+ Frequently asked questions (FAQ) for the TeXPower bundle.
+
+manual.tex (from texpower-doc.dtx)
+
+ Manual for the TeXPower bundle.
+
+fulldemo.tex (from texpower-doc.dtx)
+
+ Most examples in one file together with the manual.
+
+*example.tex (from texpower-doc.dtx)
+
+ Misc. examples for the TeXPower bundle.
+
+*demo.tex (from texpower-doc.dtx)
+
+ Misc. demos using the TeXPower bundle.
+
+__TPpreamble.tex (from texpower-doc.dtx)
+
+ Generic preamble used by most of the examples.
+
+__TPcfg.tex (from texpower-doc.dtx)
+
+ Configuration used in __TPpreamble.tex and the FAQ/manual.
+
+__TPindexing.tex (from texpower-doc.dtx)
+
+ Indexing support for the manual/fulldemo.
+
+fig-#.mps (from texpower-doc.dtx)
+
+ Figures (in Metapost postscript format) used in the examples/demos
+
+
+
+
+======================================================================
+
+Disclaimer:
+===========
+
+Beware. This is work in progress. Use only if you know what you're
+doing. During the subsequent error correction and extension of the
+functionality, the syntax and implementation of the macros are liable
+to change.
+
+So far, the files themselves contain only scarce inline documentation,
+as the code is too much of a moving target to make rigorous
+documentation a sensible endeavour. As soon as this bundle is ready
+for beta release, I will make fully documented dtx files.
+
+======================================================================
+
+License:
+========
+
+The TeXPower bundle is distributed under the GNU General Public license
+<http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html>.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/01install.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/01install.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c42691cdbc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/01install.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+======================================================================
+
+ TeXPower bundle
+ Installation instructions.
+
+ This file last changed on July 26, 2004
+
+======================================================================
+
+This instruction assumes that your TeX distribution follows TDS [1].
+Popular distributions known to follow TDS are:
+ - teTeX: Unix, Linux and releated OS.
+ - fpTeX: Windows
+ - MiKTeX: Windows
+The TeXLive CD also follows TDS of course.
+
+Installing the TeXPower bundle is very easy:
+
+1) Run "latex tpbundle.ins" to generate all the files.
+
+2) Move all files anding with .cls, .sty and .cfg to
+
+ <path to a texmf tree>/tex/latex/texpower/
+
+3) Produce documentation by compiling "manual.tex". Produce the implementation
+ documentation by running
+ latex <package>.dtx
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o <package>.gls <package>.glo
+ makeindex -s gind.ist -o <package>.ind <package>.idx
+ latex <package>.dtx
+ where <package> is "texpower" and "powersem".
+
+4) The rest of the files - documentation, examples and demos - can be
+ moved to
+
+ <path to a texmf tree>/tex/doc/latex/texpower/
+
+5) Refresh the filename database - run "mktexlsr" for teTeX/fpTeX
+ and "initexmf -u" for MiKTeX [2].
+
+6) If you also intend to use the tpslifonts package, please go into the
+ tpslifonts subdirectory and read 01install.txt
+
+On a Unix-like system 1) and 3) can be done easily using "make".
+
+Read 00readme.txt for a short the description of the bundle.
+
+--
+[1] TDS - TeX Directory Structure - http://www.tug.org/tds/
+[2] You can also update the filename database from MiKTeX Options.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/FAQ-display.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/FAQ-display.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e5b983fd433
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/FAQ-display.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,708 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `FAQ-display.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `faq-disp,faq,end')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{FAQ-display.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower FAQ]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: FAQ-display.tex
+%
+% Frequently Asked Questions list for the TeXPower bundle (screen version).
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be processed with
+%
+% dvips -Ppdf -j0 FAQ-display
+%
+% afterwards processing the resulting ps file with
+%
+% distill FAQ-display.ps
+%
+% (The syntax is for a unix system with tetex 1.0 and distiller 3. Modify appropriately for other configurations.)
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 May 31, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Jun 14, 2000: Changed slidesmag to 4 so slides look less `squeezed'. The `display' version is for demonstrating
+% effects, not a template for `real' presentations.
+%
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Enable all color emphasis and highlighting options; use a light background and slifonts.
+
+\PassOptionsToPackage{coloremph,colormath,colorhighlight,lightbackground}{texpower}
+\RequirePackage{tpslifonts}
+
+% Input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={TeXPower Frequently Asked Questions list}}
+
+\slidesmag{4}
+
+% The package soul is needed for \highlighttext to work.
+
+\usepackage{soul}
+
+
+% The following package makes code look a little nicer, but it may not be present on all systems.
+
+\IfFileExists{cmtt.sty}{\usepackage[override]{cmtt}}{}
+
+\usepackage{fancyvrb}
+
+\usepackage{array}
+
+\usepackage{longtable}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 May 31, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Jun 9, 2000: Some additions in the `problems' and `how to' section.
+%
+% v0.0.3 Jun 15, 2000: Additions in the `usage', `how to', and `problems' sections.
+%
+% v0.0.4 Jun 22, 2000: Additions in the `usage' and `problems' section.
+%
+% v0.0.5 May 15, 2003: Update related to move to SourceForge.net.
+%
+\def\docversion{v0.0.5 of May 15, 2003}
+\def\tpversion{v0.0.9d of May 15, 2003}
+
+\providecommand{\vanishcolor}{}
+
+\DefineVerbatimEnvironment{LaTeXCode}{Verbatim}
+{gobble=2,formatcom=\codeswitch,frame=single,numbers=left,xleftmargin=1em,numbersep=.5em}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle
+{%
+ Frequently asked questions list%
+ \thanks{FAQ \docversion\ for \TeX Power \tpversion\ (alpha).}%
+ }%
+
+\setcounter{firststep}{0}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{General}
+\subsection{Where can I get the newest version of the \TeX Power FAQ\,?}
+You can download the latest version of the \TeX Power FAQ from the following URLs:
+
+\begin{center}
+Screen version:\\
+\url{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/FAQ-display.pdf}
+
+Printout version:\\
+\url{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/FAQ-printout.pdf}
+\end{center}
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{What is \TeX Power\,?}
+The \TeX Power bundle contains style and class files for creating dynamic online presentations with \LaTeX.
+
+The heart of the bundle is the package \code{texpower.sty} which implements some commands for presentation effects. This
+includes setting page transitions, color highlighting and displaying pages incrementally.
+
+The document class \code{powersem.cls} is a wrapper for seminar which sets up everything for dynamic presentations.
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Where can I obtain \TeX Power\,?}
+The complete bundle, together with its documentation, can be found under the URL
+\begin{center}
+ \url{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/}
+\end{center}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Where can I discuss \TeX Power or ask for help\,?}
+Bug and problem reports should go to
+\href{http://sourceforge.net/tracker/?group_id=60743&atid=495145}{the bug tracker}.
+
+Discussions about \TeX Power should take place on
+\href{http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/texpower-users/}{the mailing list}
+or in
+\href{http://sourceforge.net/forum/forum.php?forum_id=204738}{the discussion forum}.
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{What alternatives are there to using \TeX Power\,?}
+The most prominent alternative to \TeX Power is the \concept{Pdf Presentation Post Processor} PPower4, the homepage of
+which is
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/}
+\end{quote}
+
+Another alternative is the \concept{Utopia PDF Presentations Bundle}, which provides a complete presentation design
+environment. Its home page is
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www.utopiatype.com.au/products/ubundle.html}
+\end{quote}
+
+Comparisons of different presentation packages can be found on the home page of \name{Prof.\,D.\,P.\,Story}:
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/pdf_demos.html}
+\end{quote}
+and in the talk held by \name{Ross Moore} at the \name{California Institute of Technology} on 8th May 2000:
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www.cds.caltech.edu/caltex/2000/}
+\end{quote}
+
+
+
+
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{Usage}
+
+\subsection{How do I design a presentation with \TeX Power\,?}
+It should be stressed that \TeX Power is \underl{not} (currently) a complete presentation package. It just adds dynamic
+presentation effects (and some other gimmicks specifically interesting for dynamic presentations) and should always be
+combined with a document class dedicated to designing presentations (or a package like
+\href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfslide.html}{\code{pdfslide}}).
+
+There are demos in the \href{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/}{\code{doc}} directory for most
+popular presentation-making document classes and packages.
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{I find \TeX Power very complicated. How can I learn how to realize dynamic effects\,?}
+
+As always with \TeX, you should first make up your mind what kind of effect you desire, and what \LaTeX{} structures
+will be involved.
+
+Then you should check the examples in the \href{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/}{\code{doc}}
+directory for anything similar to what you want. If you find anything suitable, read the corresponding code. There are
+some inline comments to explain what's going on. Print out the
+\href{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/manual.pdf}{\code{manual}} for documentation of the \TeX
+Power commands.
+
+Further `recepies' can be found in section \ref{Sec:HowTo}.
+
+If you don't find anything suitable you can modify to your needs, and can't figure out from the documentation how to
+achieve your aims, please ask on
+\href{http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/texpower-users/}{the mailing list}. If
+you've found an application for \TeX Power not covered by the examples, a new example should be created.
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Can I combine \TeX Power with PPower4\,?}
+There is no problem postprocessing documents in which \TeX Power is used. This can be useful, for instance, for
+realising structured backgrounds with the \code{background} package from the
+\href{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/}{PPower4 bundle}.
+
+If there are presentation effects for which you'd like to use PPower4's implementation of the \macroname{pause} command,
+then just load PPower4's \code{pause} package. PPower4's definition of \macroname{pause} will override
+\code{texpower}'s. Then you can combine PPower4's \macroname{pause} functionality with \TeX Power's \macroname{stepwise}
+functionality, for maximum expressive power.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{I'm missing some of the classes and packages used in the demo and example files.}
+
+First of all, it has to be said that \TeX Power makes use of some `modern' features which have been introduced into the
+\TeX{} System quite recently and are evolving swiftly. The core of the \code{texpower} package, namely the commands
+\macroname{pause} and \macroname{stepwise} is implemented in `pure' \LaTeX{} and should be largely independent of any
+fancy extensions, but to get most out of \TeX Power's presentation features and process the more advanced examples, it
+is recommended to have a moderately new \TeX{} distribution installed (rule of thumb: not older than one year).
+
+But even if your distribution is quite new, it might not contain some of the classes and packages used by the demos and
+examples. Here's a list of (hopefully all of) the packages and classes used (which are not part of core \LaTeX) and
+their availability:
+
+
+\newlength{\twidth}%
+{%
+ \makeatletter
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}{\def\@outputpage{\setbox\@cclv\box\@outputbox\slide@output}}{}%
+ \makeatother
+ \setlength{\twidth}{\linewidth-\widthof{\code{pdfscreen}}-2cm-6\tabcolsep}%
+\begin{longtable}{lp{2cm}>{\raggedright\footnotesize}p{\twidth}}
+ Package&used in&\normalsize available from\tabularnewline\hline\endhead
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/hyperref.html}{\code{hyperref}}&most
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/hyperref}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/url.html}{\code{url}}&most
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/other/misc}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}}&many
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/soul}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pstricks.html}{\code{pstricks}}
+ &\small\code{fulldemo}, \code{picexample}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/graphics/pstricks}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/xr.html}{\code{xr-hyper}}
+ &\small\code{manual}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/hyperref}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/fancyvrb.html}{\code{fancyvrb}}
+ &\small\code{FAQ}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/fancyvrb}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfscreen.html}{\code{pdfscreen}}
+ &\small\code{pdfscrdemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/pdfscreen}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfslide.html}{\code{pdfslide}}
+ &\small\code{pdfslidemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/pdfslide}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/ppower4.html}{\code{pp4slide}}
+ &\small\code{pp4sldemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/support/ppower4/pp4sty.zip}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/ifmslide.html}{\code{ifmslide}}
+ &\small\code{ifmslidemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/ifmslide}
+ \tabularnewline
+\end{longtable}
+}
+
+{%
+ \makeatletter
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}{\def\@outputpage{\setbox\@cclv\box\@outputbox\slide@output}}{}%
+ \makeatother
+ \setlength{\twidth}{\linewidth-\widthof{\code{scrartcl}}-2cm-6\tabcolsep}%
+\begin{longtable}{lp{2cm}>{\raggedright\footnotesize}p{\twidth}}
+ Class&used in&\normalsize available from\tabularnewline\hline\endhead
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/seminar.html}{\code{seminar}}&most
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/other/seminar}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/koma-script.html}{\code{scrartcl}}&most
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/koma-script}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/slides.html}{\code{slides}}
+ &\small\code{slidesdemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/foiltex.html}{\code{foils}}
+ &\small\code{foilsdemo}, \code{pp4sldemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/nonfree/macros/latex/contrib/supported/foiltex}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/prosper.html}{\code{prosper}}
+ &\small\code{prosperdemo}
+ &\url{http://prosper.sourceforge.net/}
+ \tabularnewline
+\end{longtable}
+}
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{How do I\dots}\label{Sec:HowTo}
+
+\subsection{How can I incrementally display a paragraph of text\,?}\label{Q:Par}
+
+The easiest solution is to use \macroname{parstepwise}, but if the arguments of \macroname{step} are long, you'll get
+problems with line breaks, as \macroname{parstepwise} forces \macroname{step} to put its argument in a box.
+
+You can use \macroname{hidetext} like this:
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \stepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidetext]
+ {\step{Line breaks} \step{work in here.}}
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+
+\stepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidetext]
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \begin{minipage}{7em}
+ \step{Line breaks} \step{work in here.}
+ \end{minipage}%
+ }
+ }
+ {}
+
+ But note that \macroname{hidetext}, being implemented using the \code{soul} package, is quite fragile (compare
+ \ref{Sec:hidetext}).
+
+ }
+
+\newslide
+
+If you're not using structured backgrounds, \macroname{hidevanish} is another alternative which can be used exactly like
+\macroname{hidetext}, but is much more robust (note that this will fail whenever your text should appear in front of
+different background colors, for any reason).
+
+In the argument of \macroname{hidevanish}, which uses \macroname{textcolor}, paragraph breaks are not allowed. Using
+\macroname{vstep} is a little less restrictive:
+
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ {\vstep Line and paragraph breaks
+ \vstep work in here.\par Yeah!}%
+ }
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+\stepwise[\renewcommand{\vanishcolor}{presentcolor}]
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \begin{minipage}{13em}
+ \vstep Line and paragraph breaks \vstep work in here.\par Yeah!
+ \end{minipage}%
+ }
+ }
+ {}
+}
+
+\newslide
+
+To facilitate the decision, here's a side-by-side comparison of the pros and cons:
+
+\macroname{parstepwise}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[\origmath{+}] robust
+\item[\origmath{+}] works with structured backgrounds
+\item[\origmath{-}] no automatic line breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\item[\origmath{-}] no paragraph breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\end{itemize}
+
+\macroname{hidetext}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[\origmath{-}] very fragile
+\item[\origmath{+}] works with structured backgrounds
+\item[\origmath{+}] allows automatic line breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\item[\origmath{-}] no paragraph breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newslide
+
+\macroname{hidevanish}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[\origmath{+}] robust
+\item[\origmath{-}] fails with structured backgrounds
+\item[\origmath{+}] allows automatic line breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\item[\origmath{-}] no paragraph breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\end{itemize}
+
+\macroname{vstep}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[\origmath{+}] very robust
+\item[\origmath{-}] fails with structured backgrounds
+\item[\origmath{+}] allows automatic line breaks
+\item[\origmath{+}] allows paragraph breaks
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newslide
+
+
+\subsection{Instead of making text appear `out of nowhere', I'd rather just change colors from `dimmed' to normal.}
+
+There are some analogies between this item and \ref{Q:Par}.
+
+If you're using \code{texpower}'s standard colors, probably \macroname{hidedimmed} does what you want:
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \stepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidedimmed]
+ {%
+ \step{This works with} \step{\emph{all}}
+ \step{\highlighttext{highlighting} commands.}%
+ }
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+\stepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidedimmed]
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \begin{minipage}{10em}
+ \step{This works with} \step{\emph{all}} \step{\highlighttext{highlighting} commands.}
+ \end{minipage}%
+ }
+ }
+ {}
+ }
+
+\newslide
+
+In the argument of \macroname{hidedimmed}, which uses \macroname{textcolor}, paragraph breaks are not allowed. Using
+\macroname{dstep} is a little less restrictive. The following achieves the same result as above:
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \dstep This works with \dstep \emph{all}
+ \dstep \highlighttext{highlighting} commands.%
+ }
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+\newslide
+
+If the dimmed colors look too fancy to you, you can also use \macroname{vstep} for this purpose, setting
+\macroname{vanishcolor} to some `dimmed' color:
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \stepwise[\renewcommand{\vanishcolor}{inactivecolor}]
+ {%
+ \vstep This works with \vstep \emph{all}
+ \vstep \highlighttext{highlighting} commands.%
+ }
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+\stepwise[\renewcommand{\vanishcolor}{inactivecolor}]
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \begin{minipage}{10em}
+ \vstep This works with \vstep \emph{all} \vstep \highlighttext{highlighting} commands.
+ \end{minipage}%
+ }
+ }
+ {}
+ }
+
+Achieving the same with \macroname{hidevanish} is left as an exercise to the reader.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{\macroname{dstep} and \macroname{hidedimmed} work only with \code{texpower}'s standard colors. How can I dim
+ my own colors\,?}
+
+\code{texpower} maintains a list of colors which will be affected by \macroname{dimcolors} (which is behind
+\macroname{dstep} and \macroname{hidedimmed}).
+
+You can add your own colors to this list by issuing \commandapp{addTPcolor}{mycolor}. Then you only have to define
+another color \code{dmycolor} which will be replaced for \code{mycolor} automatically when \macroname{dimcolors} is
+executed.
+
+\newslide
+
+For instance:
+{\small
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \definecolor{mycolor}{rgb}{1,0.5,0}%
+ \definecolor{dmycolor}{rgb}{0.9,0.8,0.6}%
+ \addTPcolor{mycolor}
+ \stepwise
+ {\dstep My \emph{own} \dstep \textcolor{mycolor}{color}.}
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+}%
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+{%
+ \definecolor{mycolor}{rgb}{1,0.5,0}%
+ \definecolor{dmycolor}{rgb}{0.9,0.8,0.6}%
+ \addTPcolor{mycolor}%
+ \liststepwise
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \dstep My \emph{own} \dstep \textcolor{mycolor}{color}.
+ }
+ }
+ }
+{}
+
+Note that if you ever wish to use \macroname{enhancecolors} or \macroname{highlightenhanced}, you'll also need an
+\emph{enhanced} version of your new color named \code{emycolor}.
+
+If you wish to use one of the commands \macroname{whitebackground}, \macroname{lightbackground},
+\macroname{darkbackground}, or \macroname{blackbackground}, you'll need even more variants of your new color. In this
+case, you'll better define it in the file \code{tpsettings.cfg} (which contains an example).
+
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{Problems}
+
+\subsection{I'm loading the \code{texpower} package, but dynamic features don't seem to work.}
+
+Remember that you have to turn on dynamic features explicitly by giving the \code{display} option either to
+\code{texpower} or as a global option. Otherwise, a printout version of your document is produced.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{When I use the \code{colormath} option, my displayed formulae are not colored.}
+
+Don't use the \TeX{} environment \code{\$\$}\dots\code{\$\$} for displayed formulae if you want to profit from math
+coloring.
+
+\code{texpower} supports \LaTeX's environments \macroname{[}\dots\macroname{]}, \code{displaymath}, \code{equation},
+\code{eqnarray}, and \code{eqnarray*}. It also works with the diverse displayed math environments from the
+\href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/amsmath.html}{\code{amsmath}} package.
+
+Replacing \code{\$\$}\dots\code{\$\$} everywhere by \macroname{[}\dots\macroname{]} should solve this problem.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{It seems I can't use \macroname{vfill} in combination with \macroname{pause}.}
+
+This is a problem indeed, as \LaTeX{} never gets to see anything after \macroname{pause} when the first part of the
+sequence is produced. You can use \macroname{vfill} with \macroname{stepwise} if you
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item use a configuration where \macroname{step} leaves blank space (to ensure proper vertical spacing);
+\item put \emph{all} \macroname{vfill}s into the argument of \macroname{stepwise}, \emph{outside} the argument of any
+ \macroname{step}.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+For instance:
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \parstepwise
+ {\step{One.}\vfill\step{Two.}\vfill\step{Three.}}
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \begin{minipage}[c][10ex][s]{10em}
+ \step{One.}\vfill\step{Two.}\vfill\step{Three.}
+ \end{minipage}
+ }
+ }
+ {}
+ }
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{When I use \LaTeX+\code{dvips}+\code{distiller}, the result looks strange and `hyper' features don't work.}
+
+Check the \code{log} file of your document. If it contains the line
+{\codeswitch%
+\begin{verbatim}
+*hyperref using default driver hypertex*
+\end{verbatim}%
+}%
+then the default hyperref driver for your system is not suited for processing by \code{dvips}+\code{distiller}.
+
+Either you set another default driver (for instance, in the file \code{hyperref.cfg}), or you use the option
+\code{dvips} in your document as a global option or an option to \commandapp{usepackage}{hyperref}. See the
+documentation of the \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/hyperref.html}{\code{hyperref}} package
+for details.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{When using \macroname{highlighttext} or \macroname{hidetext}, I'm getting strange error messages.}
+\label{Sec:hidetext}
+
+Note that both these commands are implemented using the
+\href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} package. \code{soul} has some rather
+severe restrictions concerning what is allowed to appear in the argument of commands using it. Consult the documentation
+of \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} for a detailed description of
+these restrictions.
+
+The most prominent one is that almost no \LaTeX{} command is allowed in the argument of a command implemented using
+\code{soul}. For instance, to use an emphasis or highlighting command like \macroname{emph}, you have to use a sequence
+of \macroname{highlighttext} commands, putting \macroname{emph} `outside'. Expect glitches in display quality though.
+
+\code{\small\commandapp{highlighttext}{This~}\discretionary{\%}{}{}\commandapp{emph}{\commandapp{highlighttext}{annoying~}}\discretionary{\%}{}{}\commandapp{highlighttext}{behaviour}}
+yields \highlighttext{This }\emph{\highlighttext{annoying }}\highlighttext{behaviour}.
+
+\newslide
+
+Another restriction is that accents are separated from the characters they belong to and break. You have to enclose the
+complete accented character with braces or use an appropriate input encoding, typing accented characters `as one'.
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{ yields }l}
+ \commandapp{highlighttext}{S\{\macroname{"}u\}\macroname{ss} es}&\highlighttext{S{\"u}\ss es}\\
+ \commandapp{highlighttext}{Süßes}&\highlighttext{Süßes}\\
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Inside the argument of \macroname{stepwise}, all counters seem to be freezed on all pages of the sequence
+ generated. How can I use a self-defined counter which does not freeze\,?}
+
+Freezing counters is a desirable behaviour in general, for instance to stop equation numbers from going astray.
+
+But \code{texpower} maintains a list of counters which are \emph{not} freezed, containing for instance the counter
+\code{step}.
+
+If you need a counter for special effects while the incremental sequence is generated (for instance: generating a
+sequence of MetaPost figures with the \code{emp} and \code{feynmp} packages), use
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \releasecounter{mycounter}
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+to release the counter \code{mycounter}.
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `FAQ-display.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/FAQ-printout.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/FAQ-printout.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..87134a5f0a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/FAQ-printout.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,732 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `FAQ-printout.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `faq-print,faq,enddoc')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{FAQ-printout.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower FAQ]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: FAQ-printout.tex
+%
+% Frequently Asked Questions list for the TeXPower bundle (printout version).
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 May 31, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+
+\documentclass[12pt]{scrartcl}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% We need some more packages...
+%
+
+\usepackage{url}
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+
+% The following package makes code look a little nicer, but it may not be present on all systems.
+
+\IfFileExists{cmtt.sty}{\usepackage[override]{cmtt}}{}
+
+% Loading the soul package enables the \highlighttext command.
+
+\usepackage{soul}
+
+% One more Text emphasis command...
+
+\let\name=\textsc
+
+
+\usepackage{fancyvrb}
+
+\usepackage{array}
+
+\usepackage{longtable}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Load hyperref.
+%
+\usepackage[bookmarksopen,colorlinks]{hyperref}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, the texpower package is loaded.
+%
+\usepackage{texpower}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The configuration file allows user-specific settings.
+
+\input{__TPcfg}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The code in the file __TPFAQ is meant for the document class seminar. Thus, it contains some seminar-specific commands
+% which are replaced by dummies here.
+
+\let\newslide=\relax
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The following command produces the title for this document.
+
+\newcommand{\makeslidetitle}[1]
+{%
+ \hypersetup{pdftitle={#1}}
+ \title{The \TeX Power bundle\\{\normalfont #1}}
+ \author{Stephan Lehmke\\\url{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+ \maketitle
+}
+
+ \tolerance 1414
+ \hbadness 1414
+ \emergencystretch 1.5em
+ \hfuzz 0.3pt
+ \vfuzz \hfuzz
+ \relax
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+
+\begin{document}
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 May 31, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Jun 9, 2000: Some additions in the `problems' and `how to' section.
+%
+% v0.0.3 Jun 15, 2000: Additions in the `usage', `how to', and `problems' sections.
+%
+% v0.0.4 Jun 22, 2000: Additions in the `usage' and `problems' section.
+%
+% v0.0.5 May 15, 2003: Update related to move to SourceForge.net.
+%
+\def\docversion{v0.0.5 of May 15, 2003}
+\def\tpversion{v0.0.9d of May 15, 2003}
+
+\providecommand{\vanishcolor}{}
+
+\DefineVerbatimEnvironment{LaTeXCode}{Verbatim}
+{gobble=2,formatcom=\codeswitch,frame=single,numbers=left,xleftmargin=1em,numbersep=.5em}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle
+{%
+ Frequently asked questions list%
+ \thanks{FAQ \docversion\ for \TeX Power \tpversion\ (alpha).}%
+ }%
+
+\setcounter{firststep}{0}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{General}
+\subsection{Where can I get the newest version of the \TeX Power FAQ\,?}
+You can download the latest version of the \TeX Power FAQ from the following URLs:
+
+\begin{center}
+Screen version:\\
+\url{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/FAQ-display.pdf}
+
+Printout version:\\
+\url{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/FAQ-printout.pdf}
+\end{center}
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{What is \TeX Power\,?}
+The \TeX Power bundle contains style and class files for creating dynamic online presentations with \LaTeX.
+
+The heart of the bundle is the package \code{texpower.sty} which implements some commands for presentation effects. This
+includes setting page transitions, color highlighting and displaying pages incrementally.
+
+The document class \code{powersem.cls} is a wrapper for seminar which sets up everything for dynamic presentations.
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Where can I obtain \TeX Power\,?}
+The complete bundle, together with its documentation, can be found under the URL
+\begin{center}
+ \url{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/}
+\end{center}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Where can I discuss \TeX Power or ask for help\,?}
+Bug and problem reports should go to
+\href{http://sourceforge.net/tracker/?group_id=60743&atid=495145}{the bug tracker}.
+
+Discussions about \TeX Power should take place on
+\href{http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/texpower-users/}{the mailing list}
+or in
+\href{http://sourceforge.net/forum/forum.php?forum_id=204738}{the discussion forum}.
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{What alternatives are there to using \TeX Power\,?}
+The most prominent alternative to \TeX Power is the \concept{Pdf Presentation Post Processor} PPower4, the homepage of
+which is
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/}
+\end{quote}
+
+Another alternative is the \concept{Utopia PDF Presentations Bundle}, which provides a complete presentation design
+environment. Its home page is
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www.utopiatype.com.au/products/ubundle.html}
+\end{quote}
+
+Comparisons of different presentation packages can be found on the home page of \name{Prof.\,D.\,P.\,Story}:
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www.math.uakron.edu/~dpstory/pdf_demos.html}
+\end{quote}
+and in the talk held by \name{Ross Moore} at the \name{California Institute of Technology} on 8th May 2000:
+\begin{quote}
+ \url{http://www.cds.caltech.edu/caltex/2000/}
+\end{quote}
+
+
+
+
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{Usage}
+
+\subsection{How do I design a presentation with \TeX Power\,?}
+It should be stressed that \TeX Power is \underl{not} (currently) a complete presentation package. It just adds dynamic
+presentation effects (and some other gimmicks specifically interesting for dynamic presentations) and should always be
+combined with a document class dedicated to designing presentations (or a package like
+\href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfslide.html}{\code{pdfslide}}).
+
+There are demos in the \href{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/}{\code{doc}} directory for most
+popular presentation-making document classes and packages.
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{I find \TeX Power very complicated. How can I learn how to realize dynamic effects\,?}
+
+As always with \TeX, you should first make up your mind what kind of effect you desire, and what \LaTeX{} structures
+will be involved.
+
+Then you should check the examples in the \href{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/}{\code{doc}}
+directory for anything similar to what you want. If you find anything suitable, read the corresponding code. There are
+some inline comments to explain what's going on. Print out the
+\href{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/manual.pdf}{\code{manual}} for documentation of the \TeX
+Power commands.
+
+Further `recepies' can be found in section \ref{Sec:HowTo}.
+
+If you don't find anything suitable you can modify to your needs, and can't figure out from the documentation how to
+achieve your aims, please ask on
+\href{http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/texpower-users/}{the mailing list}. If
+you've found an application for \TeX Power not covered by the examples, a new example should be created.
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Can I combine \TeX Power with PPower4\,?}
+There is no problem postprocessing documents in which \TeX Power is used. This can be useful, for instance, for
+realising structured backgrounds with the \code{background} package from the
+\href{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/}{PPower4 bundle}.
+
+If there are presentation effects for which you'd like to use PPower4's implementation of the \macroname{pause} command,
+then just load PPower4's \code{pause} package. PPower4's definition of \macroname{pause} will override
+\code{texpower}'s. Then you can combine PPower4's \macroname{pause} functionality with \TeX Power's \macroname{stepwise}
+functionality, for maximum expressive power.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{I'm missing some of the classes and packages used in the demo and example files.}
+
+First of all, it has to be said that \TeX Power makes use of some `modern' features which have been introduced into the
+\TeX{} System quite recently and are evolving swiftly. The core of the \code{texpower} package, namely the commands
+\macroname{pause} and \macroname{stepwise} is implemented in `pure' \LaTeX{} and should be largely independent of any
+fancy extensions, but to get most out of \TeX Power's presentation features and process the more advanced examples, it
+is recommended to have a moderately new \TeX{} distribution installed (rule of thumb: not older than one year).
+
+But even if your distribution is quite new, it might not contain some of the classes and packages used by the demos and
+examples. Here's a list of (hopefully all of) the packages and classes used (which are not part of core \LaTeX) and
+their availability:
+
+
+\newlength{\twidth}%
+{%
+ \makeatletter
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}{\def\@outputpage{\setbox\@cclv\box\@outputbox\slide@output}}{}%
+ \makeatother
+ \setlength{\twidth}{\linewidth-\widthof{\code{pdfscreen}}-2cm-6\tabcolsep}%
+\begin{longtable}{lp{2cm}>{\raggedright\footnotesize}p{\twidth}}
+ Package&used in&\normalsize available from\tabularnewline\hline\endhead
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/hyperref.html}{\code{hyperref}}&most
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/hyperref}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/url.html}{\code{url}}&most
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/other/misc}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}}&many
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/soul}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pstricks.html}{\code{pstricks}}
+ &\small\code{fulldemo}, \code{picexample}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/graphics/pstricks}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/xr.html}{\code{xr-hyper}}
+ &\small\code{manual}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/hyperref}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/fancyvrb.html}{\code{fancyvrb}}
+ &\small\code{FAQ}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/fancyvrb}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfscreen.html}{\code{pdfscreen}}
+ &\small\code{pdfscrdemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/pdfscreen}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfslide.html}{\code{pdfslide}}
+ &\small\code{pdfslidemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/pdfslide}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/ppower4.html}{\code{pp4slide}}
+ &\small\code{pp4sldemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/support/ppower4/pp4sty.zip}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/ifmslide.html}{\code{ifmslide}}
+ &\small\code{ifmslidemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/ifmslide}
+ \tabularnewline
+\end{longtable}
+}
+
+{%
+ \makeatletter
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}{\def\@outputpage{\setbox\@cclv\box\@outputbox\slide@output}}{}%
+ \makeatother
+ \setlength{\twidth}{\linewidth-\widthof{\code{scrartcl}}-2cm-6\tabcolsep}%
+\begin{longtable}{lp{2cm}>{\raggedright\footnotesize}p{\twidth}}
+ Class&used in&\normalsize available from\tabularnewline\hline\endhead
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/seminar.html}{\code{seminar}}&most
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/other/seminar}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/koma-script.html}{\code{scrartcl}}&most
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/koma-script}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/slides.html}{\code{slides}}
+ &\small\code{slidesdemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/foiltex.html}{\code{foils}}
+ &\small\code{foilsdemo}, \code{pp4sldemo}
+ &\href{http://www.ctan.org/}{CTAN}, e.\,g.\
+ \url{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/nonfree/macros/latex/contrib/supported/foiltex}
+ \tabularnewline
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/prosper.html}{\code{prosper}}
+ &\small\code{prosperdemo}
+ &\url{http://prosper.sourceforge.net/}
+ \tabularnewline
+\end{longtable}
+}
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{How do I\dots}\label{Sec:HowTo}
+
+\subsection{How can I incrementally display a paragraph of text\,?}\label{Q:Par}
+
+The easiest solution is to use \macroname{parstepwise}, but if the arguments of \macroname{step} are long, you'll get
+problems with line breaks, as \macroname{parstepwise} forces \macroname{step} to put its argument in a box.
+
+You can use \macroname{hidetext} like this:
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \stepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidetext]
+ {\step{Line breaks} \step{work in here.}}
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+
+\stepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidetext]
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \begin{minipage}{7em}
+ \step{Line breaks} \step{work in here.}
+ \end{minipage}%
+ }
+ }
+ {}
+
+ But note that \macroname{hidetext}, being implemented using the \code{soul} package, is quite fragile (compare
+ \ref{Sec:hidetext}).
+
+ }
+
+\newslide
+
+If you're not using structured backgrounds, \macroname{hidevanish} is another alternative which can be used exactly like
+\macroname{hidetext}, but is much more robust (note that this will fail whenever your text should appear in front of
+different background colors, for any reason).
+
+In the argument of \macroname{hidevanish}, which uses \macroname{textcolor}, paragraph breaks are not allowed. Using
+\macroname{vstep} is a little less restrictive:
+
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ {\vstep Line and paragraph breaks
+ \vstep work in here.\par Yeah!}%
+ }
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+\stepwise[\renewcommand{\vanishcolor}{presentcolor}]
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \begin{minipage}{13em}
+ \vstep Line and paragraph breaks \vstep work in here.\par Yeah!
+ \end{minipage}%
+ }
+ }
+ {}
+}
+
+\newslide
+
+To facilitate the decision, here's a side-by-side comparison of the pros and cons:
+
+\macroname{parstepwise}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[\origmath{+}] robust
+\item[\origmath{+}] works with structured backgrounds
+\item[\origmath{-}] no automatic line breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\item[\origmath{-}] no paragraph breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\end{itemize}
+
+\macroname{hidetext}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[\origmath{-}] very fragile
+\item[\origmath{+}] works with structured backgrounds
+\item[\origmath{+}] allows automatic line breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\item[\origmath{-}] no paragraph breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newslide
+
+\macroname{hidevanish}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[\origmath{+}] robust
+\item[\origmath{-}] fails with structured backgrounds
+\item[\origmath{+}] allows automatic line breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\item[\origmath{-}] no paragraph breaks in \macroname{step}'s argument
+\end{itemize}
+
+\macroname{vstep}:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item[\origmath{+}] very robust
+\item[\origmath{-}] fails with structured backgrounds
+\item[\origmath{+}] allows automatic line breaks
+\item[\origmath{+}] allows paragraph breaks
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newslide
+
+
+\subsection{Instead of making text appear `out of nowhere', I'd rather just change colors from `dimmed' to normal.}
+
+There are some analogies between this item and \ref{Q:Par}.
+
+If you're using \code{texpower}'s standard colors, probably \macroname{hidedimmed} does what you want:
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \stepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidedimmed]
+ {%
+ \step{This works with} \step{\emph{all}}
+ \step{\highlighttext{highlighting} commands.}%
+ }
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+\stepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidedimmed]
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \begin{minipage}{10em}
+ \step{This works with} \step{\emph{all}} \step{\highlighttext{highlighting} commands.}
+ \end{minipage}%
+ }
+ }
+ {}
+ }
+
+\newslide
+
+In the argument of \macroname{hidedimmed}, which uses \macroname{textcolor}, paragraph breaks are not allowed. Using
+\macroname{dstep} is a little less restrictive. The following achieves the same result as above:
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \dstep This works with \dstep \emph{all}
+ \dstep \highlighttext{highlighting} commands.%
+ }
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+\newslide
+
+If the dimmed colors look too fancy to you, you can also use \macroname{vstep} for this purpose, setting
+\macroname{vanishcolor} to some `dimmed' color:
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \stepwise[\renewcommand{\vanishcolor}{inactivecolor}]
+ {%
+ \vstep This works with \vstep \emph{all}
+ \vstep \highlighttext{highlighting} commands.%
+ }
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+\stepwise[\renewcommand{\vanishcolor}{inactivecolor}]
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \begin{minipage}{10em}
+ \vstep This works with \vstep \emph{all} \vstep \highlighttext{highlighting} commands.
+ \end{minipage}%
+ }
+ }
+ {}
+ }
+
+Achieving the same with \macroname{hidevanish} is left as an exercise to the reader.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{\macroname{dstep} and \macroname{hidedimmed} work only with \code{texpower}'s standard colors. How can I dim
+ my own colors\,?}
+
+\code{texpower} maintains a list of colors which will be affected by \macroname{dimcolors} (which is behind
+\macroname{dstep} and \macroname{hidedimmed}).
+
+You can add your own colors to this list by issuing \commandapp{addTPcolor}{mycolor}. Then you only have to define
+another color \code{dmycolor} which will be replaced for \code{mycolor} automatically when \macroname{dimcolors} is
+executed.
+
+\newslide
+
+For instance:
+{\small
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \definecolor{mycolor}{rgb}{1,0.5,0}%
+ \definecolor{dmycolor}{rgb}{0.9,0.8,0.6}%
+ \addTPcolor{mycolor}
+ \stepwise
+ {\dstep My \emph{own} \dstep \textcolor{mycolor}{color}.}
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+}%
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+{%
+ \definecolor{mycolor}{rgb}{1,0.5,0}%
+ \definecolor{dmycolor}{rgb}{0.9,0.8,0.6}%
+ \addTPcolor{mycolor}%
+ \liststepwise
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \dstep My \emph{own} \dstep \textcolor{mycolor}{color}.
+ }
+ }
+ }
+{}
+
+Note that if you ever wish to use \macroname{enhancecolors} or \macroname{highlightenhanced}, you'll also need an
+\emph{enhanced} version of your new color named \code{emycolor}.
+
+If you wish to use one of the commands \macroname{whitebackground}, \macroname{lightbackground},
+\macroname{darkbackground}, or \macroname{blackbackground}, you'll need even more variants of your new color. In this
+case, you'll better define it in the file \code{tpsettings.cfg} (which contains an example).
+
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{Problems}
+
+\subsection{I'm loading the \code{texpower} package, but dynamic features don't seem to work.}
+
+Remember that you have to turn on dynamic features explicitly by giving the \code{display} option either to
+\code{texpower} or as a global option. Otherwise, a printout version of your document is produced.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{When I use the \code{colormath} option, my displayed formulae are not colored.}
+
+Don't use the \TeX{} environment \code{\$\$}\dots\code{\$\$} for displayed formulae if you want to profit from math
+coloring.
+
+\code{texpower} supports \LaTeX's environments \macroname{[}\dots\macroname{]}, \code{displaymath}, \code{equation},
+\code{eqnarray}, and \code{eqnarray*}. It also works with the diverse displayed math environments from the
+\href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/amsmath.html}{\code{amsmath}} package.
+
+Replacing \code{\$\$}\dots\code{\$\$} everywhere by \macroname{[}\dots\macroname{]} should solve this problem.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{It seems I can't use \macroname{vfill} in combination with \macroname{pause}.}
+
+This is a problem indeed, as \LaTeX{} never gets to see anything after \macroname{pause} when the first part of the
+sequence is produced. You can use \macroname{vfill} with \macroname{stepwise} if you
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item use a configuration where \macroname{step} leaves blank space (to ensure proper vertical spacing);
+\item put \emph{all} \macroname{vfill}s into the argument of \macroname{stepwise}, \emph{outside} the argument of any
+ \macroname{step}.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+For instance:
+
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \parstepwise
+ {\step{One.}\vfill\step{Two.}\vfill\step{Three.}}
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}
+ {%
+ yields
+ \present
+ {%
+ \begin{minipage}[c][10ex][s]{10em}
+ \step{One.}\vfill\step{Two.}\vfill\step{Three.}
+ \end{minipage}
+ }
+ }
+ {}
+ }
+
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{When I use \LaTeX+\code{dvips}+\code{distiller}, the result looks strange and `hyper' features don't work.}
+
+Check the \code{log} file of your document. If it contains the line
+{\codeswitch%
+\begin{verbatim}
+*hyperref using default driver hypertex*
+\end{verbatim}%
+}%
+then the default hyperref driver for your system is not suited for processing by \code{dvips}+\code{distiller}.
+
+Either you set another default driver (for instance, in the file \code{hyperref.cfg}), or you use the option
+\code{dvips} in your document as a global option or an option to \commandapp{usepackage}{hyperref}. See the
+documentation of the \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/hyperref.html}{\code{hyperref}} package
+for details.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{When using \macroname{highlighttext} or \macroname{hidetext}, I'm getting strange error messages.}
+\label{Sec:hidetext}
+
+Note that both these commands are implemented using the
+\href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} package. \code{soul} has some rather
+severe restrictions concerning what is allowed to appear in the argument of commands using it. Consult the documentation
+of \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} for a detailed description of
+these restrictions.
+
+The most prominent one is that almost no \LaTeX{} command is allowed in the argument of a command implemented using
+\code{soul}. For instance, to use an emphasis or highlighting command like \macroname{emph}, you have to use a sequence
+of \macroname{highlighttext} commands, putting \macroname{emph} `outside'. Expect glitches in display quality though.
+
+\code{\small\commandapp{highlighttext}{This~}\discretionary{\%}{}{}\commandapp{emph}{\commandapp{highlighttext}{annoying~}}\discretionary{\%}{}{}\commandapp{highlighttext}{behaviour}}
+yields \highlighttext{This }\emph{\highlighttext{annoying }}\highlighttext{behaviour}.
+
+\newslide
+
+Another restriction is that accents are separated from the characters they belong to and break. You have to enclose the
+complete accented character with braces or use an appropriate input encoding, typing accented characters `as one'.
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l@{ yields }l}
+ \commandapp{highlighttext}{S\{\macroname{"}u\}\macroname{ss} es}&\highlighttext{S{\"u}\ss es}\\
+ \commandapp{highlighttext}{Süßes}&\highlighttext{Süßes}\\
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Inside the argument of \macroname{stepwise}, all counters seem to be freezed on all pages of the sequence
+ generated. How can I use a self-defined counter which does not freeze\,?}
+
+Freezing counters is a desirable behaviour in general, for instance to stop equation numbers from going astray.
+
+But \code{texpower} maintains a list of counters which are \emph{not} freezed, containing for instance the counter
+\code{step}.
+
+If you need a counter for special effects while the incremental sequence is generated (for instance: generating a
+sequence of MetaPost figures with the \code{emp} and \code{feynmp} packages), use
+\begin{LaTeXCode}
+ \releasecounter{mycounter}
+\end{LaTeXCode}
+to release the counter \code{mycounter}.
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `FAQ-printout.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPcfg.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPcfg.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6f0849b455c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPcfg.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `__TPcfg.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `config')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: __TPcfg.tex
+%
+% Code for user-specific configuration of TeXPower documentation files.
+%
+% This file is input by others. Don't compile it separately.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 22, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+\hypersetup{baseurl={http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/}}
+\hypersetup{pdfsubject={Documentation and Examples for the texpower package}}
+\hypersetup{pdfauthor={Stephan Lehmke}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `__TPcfg.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPindexing.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPindexing.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a4ffed15c34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPindexing.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `__TPindexing.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `indexing')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+%
+% Setting up indexing for the TeXPower fulldemo and manual.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\makeindex
+\newcommand{\indexcode}[1]{\index{#1@\code{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\indexmacro}[1]{\index{#1@\macroname{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\indexmacroopt}[2]{%
+ \index{#1 macro options@\macroname{#1} macro options!#2@\code{#2}}%
+ \index{#2@\code{#2}|see{\macroname{#1} macro options}}}
+\newcommand{\indexfile}[2]{\index{#1@\code{#1} #2}}
+\newcommand{\indexpckopt}[2]{%
+ \index{#1 package options@\code{#1} package options!#2@\code{#2}}%
+ \index{#2@\code{#2}|see{\code{#1} package options}}}
+\newcommand{\indexpckswitch}[2]{%
+ \index{#1 package switches@\code{#1} package switches!#2@\code{#2}}%
+ \index{#2@\code{#2}|see{\code{#1} package switches}}}
+\newcommand{\indexstepwise}[2]{%
+ \index{stepwise@\macroname{stepwise}!#1@\code{#1} (#2)}%
+ \index{#1@\code{#1}|see{\macroname{stepwise}}}}
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `__TPindexing.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPpreamble.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPpreamble.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bc45308322b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/__TPpreamble.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `__TPpreamble.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `preamble')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+%
+\documentclass
+[%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Document class options:
+% -----------------------
+%
+% Landscape slides formatted for letter paper fit most screen resolutions (more or less).
+%
+ letterpaper,%
+ landscape,%
+%
+% The KOMA option makes powersem load scrartcl.cls instead of article.cls.
+%
+ KOMA,%
+% KOMA document class options are accepted.
+ smallheadings,%
+%
+% The calcdimensions option makes powersem calculate the slide dimensions automatically from paper size and margins.
+ calcdimensions,%
+%
+% The display option sets everything up for producing slides to be displayed interactively.
+% This option is also recognized by the texpower package.
+%
+ display%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Document class powersem, based on seminar.cls for simulating ppower via latex+distiller (instead of pdflatex).
+%
+{powersem}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% First part of the preamble of TeXPower demos.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+% v0.0.2 Mar 21, 2000: Remedying an incompatibility between LaTeX releases concerning the implementation of
+% \@iiiparbox (Apr 11: this code is now part of texpower.sty).
+% v0.0.3 Apr 11, 2000: Color emphasis code moved into texpower.
+%
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Set slide margins rather small for maximum use of space. This is a demo, remember.
+%
+\renewcommand{\slidetopmargin}{5mm}
+\renewcommand{\slidebottommargin}{5mm}
+
+\renewcommand{\slideleftmargin}{5mm}
+\renewcommand{\sliderightmargin}{5mm}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Some setup for more reasonable spacing.
+%
+
+\makeatletter
+
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}%
+ {-1.5ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.5ex}%
+ {.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\raggedsection\normalfont\size@section\sectfont}}
+
+\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+ {-1.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\raggedsection\normalfont\size@subsection\sectfont}}
+
+\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
+ {-1.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\raggedsection\normalfont\size@subsubsection\sectfont}}
+
+\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}%
+ {1.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus.2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\raggedsection\normalfont\size@paragraph\sectfont}}
+
+\def\slideitemsep{.5ex plus .3ex minus .2ex}
+
+\makeatother
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% We need some more packages...
+%
+
+\usepackage{url}
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+
+% One more Text emphasis command...
+
+\let\name=\textsc
+
+% Second part of the preamble of TeXPower demos.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+% v0.0.2 Mar 22, 2000: Now loading the config file.
+% v0.0.3 Mar 29, 2000: texpower doesn't load hyperref any more; there's now a package fixseminar.
+% v0.0.4 Apr 19, 2000: Added \slidetitle command.
+% v0.0.5 Sep 11, 2000: Added plainpages=false to the hyperref options to get correct page anchors.
+% v0.0.5 Sep 11, 2002: Slight changes to title page.
+%
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% We load hyperref and fixseminar which fixes some problems with seminar.
+%
+\usepackage[plainpages=false,bookmarksopen,colorlinks,urlcolor=red,pdfpagemode=FullScreen]{hyperref}
+\usepackage{fixseminar}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, the texpower package is loaded.
+%
+\usepackage{texpower}
+
+%% The configuration file allows user-specific settings.
+
+\input{__TPcfg}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Some more parameters...
+%
+\slidesmag{5}
+\slideframe{none}
+\pagestyle{empty}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+\renewcommand{\currentpagevalue}{\value{slide}}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The following command produces a title page for every example and documentation file.
+
+\newcommand{\makeslidetitle}[1]
+{%
+ \title{The \TeX Power bundle\\[2ex]{\normalfont #1}}
+ \author
+ {%
+ Stephan Lehmke\\
+ \mdseries
+ University of Dortmund\\
+ \mdseries
+ Department of Computer Science I\\
+ \url{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@udo.edu}%
+ }
+ {\centerslidestrue
+ \maketitle
+ \newslide}
+ \setcounter{firststep}{1}% This way, the first step of all examples is displayed.
+}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `__TPpreamble.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/bckwrdexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/bckwrdexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..09153a30d7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/bckwrdexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `bckwrdexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `bckwrdexample,bckwrdexample-src,end')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{bckwrdexample.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: bckwrdexample.tex
+%
+% Backwards writing example for the package texpower.sty.
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be processed with
+%
+% dvips -Ppdf -j0 bckwrdexample
+%
+% afterwards processing the resulting ps file with
+%
+% distill bckwrdexample.ps
+%
+% (The syntax is for a unix system with tetex 1.0 and distiller 3. Modify appropriately for other configurations.)
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 26, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+% v0.0.3 May 18, 2000: New file name to avoid confusion with ``background''.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Set background color to black and use slifonts.
+
+\PassOptionsToPackage{blackbackground}{texpower}
+\RequirePackage{tpslifonts}
+
+% Input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower backwards writing example}}
+
+% Define \includegraphics for including an mps (metapost postscript) image.
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+% The mps extension isn't supported out-of-the-box for latex+dvips
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}{%
+\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.mps}}{}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: Writing Backwards}\label{Sec:ExBackwards}
+ %
+ % The following example doesn't really demonstrate a useful application. Its purpose is twofold:
+ % a) Show how the functionality of \stepwise can be extended by the user by referring to the macros provided by the
+ % package.
+ % b) Show that \steps can appear in any order, and can be made to appear simultaneously in several places (and mention
+ % the problems this raises).
+
+ % We define a new macro \backstep which will call \step, but the steps will be executed in _reverse_ order.
+ % This is achieved as follows:
+ % * We refer to the counter totalsteps, which gives the total number of steps occurring in this argument of
+ % \stepwise.
+ % * From this, we subtract the value of the counter stepcommand, which gives the number of this \step command (in the
+ % order of appearance).
+ % * The result is compared with the counter step, which gives the number of the current step.
+ % (the default for `triggering' a \step is the condition \value{step}=\value{stepcommand})
+ %
+ % Note that if the ifthen Package would support this syntax, we could use the bracketed optional argument of \step (as
+ % in the previous example), defining \backstep like this:
+ %
+ % \newcommand{\backstep}{\step[\value{totalsteps}-\value{stepcommand}+1=\value{step}]}
+ %
+ % As \ifthenelse doesn't offer this syntax, we have to calculate \value{totalsteps}-\value{stepcommand}+1 in a separate
+ % counter. This doesn't fit the intended use of \step's optional argument. But hey, there is another syntax ;-)
+ % If the optional argument is specified with braces (...), then it can contain an arbitrary test which takes two
+ % arguments and selects the first if it succeeds and the second if it fails. We use this variant here.
+ %
+ \newcounter{reversestepno}%
+ \newcommand{\backstep}{\step(\setcounter{reversestepno}{\value{totalsteps}-\value{stepcommand}+1}\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{reversestepno}})}%
+ %
+ % We use the custom command \parstepwise which not only wraps the whole argument of \stepwise into a minipage (because
+ % otherwise vertical spacing goes haywire, don't ask me why), but also gives substance to steps.
+ %
+ % If the following \stepwise command would only contain the calls to \backstep, everything would be fine.
+ % But we _had_ to add something else....
+ % In the second part of this application of \stepwise, several steps are executed simultaneously with those executed
+ % backwards in the first part. This means the value of the counter totalsteps is 14, i.e. the calls to \backstep
+ % correspond to steps 8...14. To remedy this, we decree that the first step performed shall be number 7, by setting
+ % the counter firststep accordingly in the optional argument of \stepwise.
+ %
+ \parstepwise[\setcounter{firststep}{\value{totalsteps}/2+\value{firststep}}]
+ {%
+ \begin{quote}
+ \Huge
+ \backstep{Is} \backstep{now} \backstep{it}
+ \backstep{backwards} \backstep{write} \backstep{to}
+ \backstep{possible\,!}
+
+ \bigskip
+
+ % By determining explicitly the times at which the following steps are executed, we make them appear
+ % simultaneously with the preceding flock of \backsteps. As we have set the counter firststep to 7, we start
+ % counting with 8.
+ %
+ \step[\value{step}=8]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=9]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=10]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=11]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=12]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=13]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=14]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}%
+ \end{quote}
+ }%
+ \newslide
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `bckwrdexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/bgndexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/bgndexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f5f6a0e3e1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/bgndexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,433 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `bgndexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `bgndexample,bgndexample-src,end')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{bgndexample.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: bgndexample.tex
+%
+% Background style example for the package texpower.sty.
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be converted to pdf afterwards (using dvips+distill/ps2pdf or dvipdf, for instance).
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Aug 10, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 29, 2003: Adapted to TeXPower v0.0.9c.
+%
+%COMMENT
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Use slifonts and a dark background.
+
+\PassOptionsToPackage{darkbackground,colorhighlight,verbose}{texpower}
+
+\RequirePackage{tpslifonts}
+
+% Input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower background style example}}
+
+\newcommand{\skipTo}[1]{\hyperlink{#1}{\present{\textsf{\textbf{Skip animation}}}}}
+
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\histogram}[1]
+{{%
+ \renewcommand{\vstripe@TP}[4]
+ {\rule{##2-2pt}{(##3)*\real{##1}}\hspace*{2pt}##4}%
+ #1%
+ }}
+\makeatother
+
+\newcommand{\totalbarwidth}{2cm}
+
+\newcommand{\mkbar}[2][100]
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{#1<#2}{\def\percentval{#1}}{\def\percentval{#2}}%
+ \mkfactor{\intensity}{\percentval/100}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{ecolor}{green}{red}%
+ \hgradrule[\percentval]{red}{ecolor}{\totalbarwidth*\real{\intensity}}{1ex}
+ \textbf{\boldmath$\mathsf{\ifthenelse{\percentval<10}{\phantom{0}}{}\percentval\%}$}%
+ }
+
+\renewcommand{\bgndstripes}{100}
+
+\setlength{\fboxrule}{1pt}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Aug 12, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 29, 2003: Adapted to TeXPower v0.0.9c.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+
+
+\centerslidestrue
+\title{The \TeX Power bundle\\[2ex]{\normalfont Structured
+ rules, box and page backgrounds}}
+\author{Stephan Lehmke\\\url{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{small}
+ This example demonstrates \TeX Power's support for structured rules,
+ box and page backgrounds. The usage and parameterization of the
+ corresponding commands is documented in the manual. Here, we only
+ demonstrate the effects achievable with the parameters.
+\end{small}
+
+\pageDuration{0.01}
+
+\parstepwise*%
+{%
+ \multistep
+ {50}
+ {%
+ \mkfactor{\intensity}{(\value{substep}-1)/49}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{stcolor}{pagecolor}{white}%
+ \backgroundstyle[startcolor=stcolor,endcolor=white]{vgradient}%
+ }%
+ \multistep
+ {3}
+ {%
+ \afterstep{\pageDuration{1}}%
+ \backgroundstyle[startcolor=pagecolor,endcolor=white,firstgradprogression=\value{substep}]{vgradient}%
+ }%
+ \multistep
+ {10}
+ {%
+ \afterstep{\pageDuration{0.01}}%
+ \mkfactor{\intensity}{(\value{substep}-1)/40}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{ecolor}{pagecolor}{white}%
+ \backgroundstyle[startcolor=pagecolor,endcolor=ecolor,firstgradprogression=3]{vgradient}%
+ }%
+ \skipTo{eotitle}
+}
+
+\hypertarget{eotitle}{}
+
+\stopAdvancing
+
+\newslide
+
+\renewcommand{\rulestripes}{100}
+
+\newcounter{mstep}
+
+\section{Color Gradients}
+\liststepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidesmartignore]
+{%
+ \concept{Horizontal} \step{or \concept{vertical}; \concept{single}} \step{or \concept{double}.}
+
+ \step
+ {%
+ Parameters:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Gradient \concept{start} {\bstep[\value{step}=13]{(and
+ \concept{middle})}} and \concept{end} color.
+
+ \step[\value{step}=23]{\item Number of \concept{stripes}.}
+
+ \step[\value{step}=33]{\item \concept{Midpoint} of a double
+ gradient.}
+
+ \step[\value{step}=43]{\item Gradient \concept{Progression}}
+ \step[\value{step}=56]{\par(independent for double gradients).}
+ \end{itemize}
+ }
+ \vfill
+ \steponce[\value{step}=0]{\hgradrule{red}{green}{\linewidth}{5ex}}%
+ \steponce[\value{step}=1]{\vgradrule{red}{green}{\linewidth}{5ex}}%
+ \steponce[\value{step}=2]{\dblvgradrule{red}{yellow}{green}{\linewidth}{5ex}}%
+ \steponce[\value{step}>2\and\value{step}<13]
+ {%
+ \skipTo{eostartend}\\
+ \multistep(\setcounter{mstep}{\value{substep}+2}\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{mstep}}){10}
+ {%
+ \mkfactor{\intensity}{(\value{substep}-1)/9}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{scolor}{blue}{red}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{ecolor}{yellow}{green}%
+ \hgradrule{scolor}{ecolor}{\linewidth}{5ex}%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{substep}=10}
+ {\hypertarget{eostartend}{}\afterstep{\stopAdvancing}}
+ {\afterstep{\pageDuration{0.01}}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \steponce[\value{step}>12\and\value{step}<23]
+ {%
+ \skipTo{eomidcolor}\\
+ \multistep(\setcounter{mstep}{\value{substep}+12}\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{mstep}}){10}
+ {%
+ \colorbetween{scolor}{blue}{yellow}%
+ \mkfactor{\intensity}{(\value{substep}-1)/9}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{ecolor}{red}{scolor}%
+ \dblhgradrule{blue}{ecolor}{yellow}{\linewidth}{5ex}%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{substep}=10}
+ {\hypertarget{eomidcolor}{}\afterstep{\stopAdvancing}}
+ {\afterstep{\pageDuration{0.01}}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \steponce[\value{step}>22\and\value{step}<33]
+ {%
+ \skipTo{eostripes}\\
+ \multistep(\setcounter{mstep}{\value{substep}+22}\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{mstep}}){10}
+ {%
+ \histogram{\dblhgradrule[][10*\value{substep}]{red}{yellow}{green}{\linewidth}{2.5ex}}\\%
+ \dblhgradrule[][10*\value{substep}]{red}{yellow}{green}{\linewidth}{2.5ex}%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{substep}=10}
+ {\hypertarget{eostripes}{}\afterstep{\stopAdvancing}}
+ {\afterstep{\pageDuration{0.5}}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \steponce[\value{step}>32\and\value{step}<43]
+ {%
+ \skipTo{eomidpoint}\\
+ \multistep(\setcounter{mstep}{\value{substep}+32}\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{mstep}}){10}
+ {%
+ \mkfactor{\midpoint}{(\value{substep}-1)/9}%
+ \histogram{\dblhgradrule[\midpoint]{blue}{red}{yellow}{\linewidth}{2.5ex}}\\%
+ \dblhgradrule[\midpoint]{red}{yellow}{green}{\linewidth}{2.5ex}%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{substep}=10}
+ {\hypertarget{eomidpoint}{}\afterstep{\stopAdvancing}}
+ {\afterstep{\pageDuration{0.5}}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \steponce[\value{step}>42\and\value{step}<56]
+ {%
+ \skipTo{eofirstprog}\\
+ \multistep(\setcounter{mstep}{\value{substep}+42}\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{mstep}}){13}
+ {%
+ \renewcommand{\rulefirstgradprogression}{\value{substep}-7}%
+ \histogram{\hgradrule{red}{green}{\linewidth}{2.5ex}}\\%
+ \hgradrule{red}{green}{\linewidth}{2.5ex}%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{substep}=13}
+ {\hypertarget{eofirstprog}{}\afterstep{\stopAdvancing}}
+ {\afterstep{\pageDuration{0.5}}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \steponce[\value{step}>55\and\value{step}<69]
+ {%
+ \skipTo{eosecondprog}\\
+ \multistep(\setcounter{mstep}{\value{substep}+55}\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{mstep}}){13}
+ {%
+ \renewcommand{\rulefirstgradprogression}{\value{substep}-7}%
+ \renewcommand{\rulesecondgradprogression}{7-\value{substep}}%
+ \histogram{\dblhgradrule{red}{green}{red}{\linewidth}{2.5ex}}\\%
+ \dblhgradrule{red}{green}{red}{\linewidth}{2.5ex}%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{substep}=13}
+ {\hypertarget{eosecondprog}{}\afterstep{\stopAdvancing}}
+ {\afterstep{\pageDuration{0.5}}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+
+\newslide
+
+Applications of gradients:
+\centerslidesfalse
+\liststepwise*
+{%
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}
+ As rules:\\
+ \skipTo{eoruledemo}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \multistep{72}
+ {%
+ \present
+ {%
+ \small\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{.9}%
+ \begin{tabular}{rp{\totalbarwidth+2em}}
+ \multicolumn{2}{c}{\textbf{Compression rates}}\\[2ex]
+ \code{compress} & \mkbar[\thesubstep]{51}\\
+ \code{gzip -1} & \mkbar[\thesubstep]{62}\\
+ \code{gzip -9} & \mkbar[\thesubstep]{66}\\
+ \code{bzip2 -1} & \mkbar[\thesubstep]{65}\\
+ \code{bzip2 -9} & \mkbar[\thesubstep]{73}
+ \end{tabular}%
+ }%
+ \afterstep{\pageDuration{0.01}}%
+ }%
+ \step
+ {%
+ \present
+ {%
+ \small\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{.9}%
+ \begin{tabular}{rp{\totalbarwidth+2em}}
+ \multicolumn{2}{c}{\textbf{Compression rates}}\\[2ex]
+ \code{compress} & \mkbar{51}\\
+ \code{gzip -1} & \mkbar{62}\\
+ \code{gzip -9} & \mkbar{66}\\
+ \code{bzip2 -1} & \mkbar{65}\\
+ \code{bzip2 -9} & \mkbar{73}
+ \end{tabular}%
+ }%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{firstactivation}}{\AtShipout{\hypertarget{eoruledemo}{}}\afterstep{\stopAdvancing}}{}%
+ }%
+
+ \step
+ {%
+ \item
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}
+ As box backgrounds:\\
+ \skipTo{eoboxdemo}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \afterstep{\pageDuration{0.01}}%
+ \multistep{10}
+ {%
+ \mkfactor{\intensity}{(\value{substep}-1)/9}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{ecolor}{green}{blue}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{scolor}{yellow}{green}%
+ \colorbetween{mcolor}{scolor}{ecolor}%
+ \complementcolor{tcolor}{mcolor}%
+ \raisebox{-.5\height}{\hgradbox{scolor}{ecolor}{\Huge\textsf{\textbf{\mbox{{\textcolor{tcolor}{Groovy!}}}}}}}%
+ }%
+ \multistep{10}
+ {%
+ \mkfactor{\intensity}{(\value{substep}-1)/9}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{ecolor}{yellow}{green}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{scolor}{red}{yellow}%
+ \colorbetween{mcolor}{scolor}{ecolor}%
+ \complementcolor{tcolor}{mcolor}%
+ \raisebox{-.5\height}{\hgradbox{scolor}{ecolor}{\Huge\textsf{\textbf{\textcolor{tcolor}{Groovy!}}}}}%
+ }%
+ \multistep{10}
+ {%
+ \mkfactor{\intensity}{(\value{substep}-1)/9}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{ecolor}{red}{yellow}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{scolor}{blue}{red}%
+ \colorbetween{mcolor}{scolor}{ecolor}%
+ \complementcolor{tcolor}{mcolor}%
+ \raisebox{-.5\height}{\hgradbox{scolor}{ecolor}{\Huge\textsf{\textbf{\textcolor{tcolor}{Groovy!}}}}}%
+ }%
+ \multistep{10}
+ {%
+ \mkfactor{\intensity}{(\value{substep}-1)/9}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{ecolor}{blue}{red}%
+ \colorbetween[\intensity]{scolor}{green}{blue}%
+ \colorbetween{mcolor}{scolor}{ecolor}%
+ \complementcolor{tcolor}{mcolor}%
+ \raisebox{-.5\height}{\hgradbox{scolor}{ecolor}{\Huge\textsf{\textbf{\textcolor{tcolor}{Groovy!}}}}}%
+ }%
+ \step
+ {%
+ \colorbetween{mcolor}{green}{blue}%
+ \complementcolor{tcolor}{mcolor}%
+ \raisebox{-.5\height}{\hgradbox{green}{blue}{\Huge\textsf{\textbf{\textcolor{tcolor}{Groovy!}}}}}%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{firstactivation}}{\AtShipout{\hypertarget{eoboxdemo}{}}\afterstep{\stopAdvancing}}{}%
+ }%
+ }
+
+ \step
+ {%
+ \item As page backgrounds. \skipTo{eobgnddemo}
+ \colorbetween[.22]{ecolor}{pagecolor}{white}%
+ \afterstep{\pageDuration{0.01}}%
+ \multistep{20}
+ {%
+ \backgroundstyle
+ [%
+ startcolor=pagecolor,endcolor=ecolor,firstgradprogression=3,
+ rightpanelwidth=\TPpagewidth*\real{.025}*\value{substep},rightpanelcolor=pagecolor,
+ leftpanelwidth=\TPpagewidth*\real{.025}*\value{substep},leftpanelcolor=pagecolor,
+ toppanelheight=\TPpageheight*\real{.025}*\value{substep},toppanelcolor=pagecolor,
+ bottompanelheight=\TPpageheight*\real{.025}*\value{substep},bottompanelcolor=pagecolor%
+ ]{vgradient}%
+ }%
+ \multistep{20}
+ {%
+ \backgroundstyle
+ [%
+ startcolordef={rgb}{0.4,0,0},endcolordef={rgb}{0,0.4,0},firstgradprogression=3,
+ rightpanelwidth=\TPpagewidth*\real{.025}*(20-\value{substep}),rightpanelcolor=pagecolor,
+ leftpanelwidth=\TPpagewidth*\real{.025}*(20-\value{substep}),leftpanelcolor=pagecolor,
+ toppanelheight=\TPpageheight*\real{.025}*(20-\value{substep}),toppanelcolor=pagecolor,
+ bottompanelheight=\TPpageheight*\real{.025}*(20-\value{substep}),bottompanelcolor=pagecolor%
+ ]{vgradient}%
+ }%
+ }
+ \end{itemize}
+ }
+\hypertarget{eobgnddemo}{}
+\end{slide}
+
+
+
+\begin{slide}[\slidewidth-40mm,\slideheight-40mm]
+\renewcommand{\sliderightmargin}{45mm}%
+\renewcommand{\slidetopmargin}{25mm}%
+\renewcommand{\slidebottommargin}{25mm}%
+\colorbetween[.22]{ecolor}{pagecolor}{white}%
+\backgroundstyle[startcolor=pagecolor,endcolor=ecolor,firstgradprogression=3]{vgradient}%
+
+\liststepwise
+{%
+ Special parameters for page backgrounds:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Leave space for panels, headers and footers.\\
+ \skipTo{eopaneldemo}
+ \afterstep{\pageDuration{0.01}}%
+ \multistep{20}
+ {%
+ \backgroundstyle
+ [%
+ startcolor=pagecolor,endcolor=ecolor,firstgradprogression=3,
+ toppanelheight=.1\semcm*\value{substep},toppanelcolor=black,
+ bottompanelheight=.1\semcm*\value{substep}%
+ ]{vgradient}%
+ }%
+ \multistep{20}
+ {%
+ \backgroundstyle
+ [%
+ startcolor=pagecolor,endcolor=ecolor,firstgradprogression=3,
+ rightpanelwidth=.2\semcm*\value{substep},rightpanelcolordef={rgb}{0,0.4,0.6},
+ toppanelheight=2\semcm,toppanelcolor=black,
+ bottompanelheight=2\semcm%
+ ]{vgradient}%
+ }%
+ \end{itemize}
+}
+
+\hypertarget{eopaneldemo}{}
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `bgndexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/00readme.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/00readme.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..869378168e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/00readme.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+======================================================================
+
+ TeXPower bundle
+ Directory: contrib
+
+ This readme file last changed on Mar 15, 2002
+
+ Author: Stephan Lehmke <mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+ Lehrstuhl Informatik I
+ Universität Dortmund
+ Dortmund, Germany
+
+======================================================================
+
+
+This directory contains some additions to the TeXPower bundle
+contributed by other people.
+
+
+======================================================================
+
+Contents:
+=========
+
+This directory contains the following files:
+
+config.landscapeplus
+
+dvips configuration file which provides new paper sizes letterl and
+a4l for landscape documents in the respective sizes. Use by passing
+the option
+
+-Plandscapeplus
+
+to dvips (you can have as many -P options as you like).
+
+Using this will avoid turned and cropped pages with ghostscript's
+ps2pdf.
+
+Contributed by Berthold Crysmann <crysmann@dfki.de>.
+
+
+tpmultiinc.tar
+
+Archive containing a package for including a sequence of graphics
+files which represents an `incremental diagram'. There is a patch to
+xfig available from
+
+http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/xfig/
+
+which allows to generate such a sequence of files in MetaPost format.
+
+There are some inline comments in tpmultiinc.sty which explain
+usage. Furthermore, the archive contains some examples.
+
+Contributed by Holger Wenzel <H.Wenzel@itm.rwth-aachen.de>.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/config.landscapeplus b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/config.landscapeplus
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e86d9a3cc81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/config.landscapeplus
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+@ a4l 297mm 210mm
+@+ %%PaperSize: a4l
+@+ ! %%DocumentPaperSizes: a4l
+@+ %%BeginPaperSize: a4l
+@+ <</PageSize [842 595]>>setpagedevice
+@+ %%EndPaperSize
+
+@ letterl 11in 8.5in
+@+ %%PaperSize: letterl
+@+ ! %%DocumentPaperSizes: letterl
+@+ %%BeginPaperSize: letterl
+@+ <</PageSize [792 612]>>setpagedevice
+@+ %%EndPaperSize
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/tpmultiinc.tar b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/tpmultiinc.tar
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5910f9dc9b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/contrib/tpmultiinc.tar
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/divexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/divexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..42a4f15783d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/divexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `divexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `divexample,divexample-src,end')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{divexample.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: divexample.tex
+%
+% Divisibility example (demonstrating \step's optional arguments) for the package texpower.sty.
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be processed with
+%
+% dvips -Ppdf -j0 divexample
+%
+% afterwards processing the resulting ps file with
+%
+% distill divexample.ps
+%
+% (The syntax is for a unix system with tetex 1.0 and distiller 3. Modify appropriately for other configurations.)
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 26, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+% v0.0.3 May 18, 2000: New file name.
+%
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% We input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower divisibility example}}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+ % As the sectioning in the example files starts with \subsection, we `grade down' the sectioning commands.
+ \let\subsubsection\subsection
+ \let\subsection\section
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: Fooling Around}\label{Sec:ExFooling}
+% The following example is just to show that a lot of fancy things are possible by appropriately defining the diverse
+% `hooks' offererd by \stepwise.
+`Tweaking' the hooks a little allows some truly bizarre applications\dots
+
+% In the following \stepwise command, \activatestep will be set to \textbf. This means the `first' occurrence of a number
+% is wider (because bf is an extended font) than all other occurrences of it. To avoid glitches in line breaks, all
+% other occurrences of numbers (visible and invisible) need to be of the same width. Hence we define new versions of
+% \displaystepcontents and \hidestepcontents.
+\def\mydisplay#1{\makebox[\widthof{\textbf{#1}}]{#1}}
+\def\myhide#1{\phantom{\makebox[\widthof{\textbf{#1}}]{#1}}}
+
+\newcounter{modulo}
+\newcounter{i}
+
+% Finally, we define a custom \step command which sets the optional arguments of \step.
+% We already have introduced the first optional argument, which determines when a \step is activated for the first
+% time. Here, this one is left at its default value (\value{step}=\value{stepcommand}).
+% Here, we also use the second optional argument, which has the same syntax as the first one (i.e. it can be surrounded
+% either by square brackets or braces), but determines when a \step is active _at all_ (i.e. whether
+% \displaystepcontents or \hidestepcontents is used). The default is the internal check \if@first@TP@true, which determines
+% whether step number \value{stepcommand} has already been activated for the first time (this is saved internally for
+% every step). Now, we redefine this condition to be fulfilled whenever the value of the counter step is divisible by
+% the value of the counter stepcommand.
+\def\mystep{\step[](\setcounter{modulo}{\value{step}/\value{stepcommand}*\value{stepcommand}}\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{modulo}})}%
+
+
+% By setting the page duration to 0.5 seconds, we make the following sequence of slides appear automatically one by one,
+% one every half second.
+
+\pageDuration{0.5}
+
+%
+% We use the custom command \parstepwise which not only wraps the whole argument of \stepwise into a minipage (because
+% otherwise vertical spacing goes haywire, don't ask me why), but also gives substance to steps. We use the starred
+% version of this command so that the number 1 appears on the first slide generated by \parstepwise.
+%
+% \activatestep is set to \textbf to emphasize the number the divisors of which are displayed.
+\parstepwise*[\let\activatestep=\textbf\let\displaystepcontents=\mydisplay\let\hidestepcontents=\myhide]
+{%
+ \huge
+ \setcounter{i}{0}%
+ Divisibility demo:
+
+ % We just have to generate the appropriate number of \mystep commands which display `their' numbers.
+ \whiledo{\value{i}<40}{\stepcounter{i}\mystep{\arabic{i}} }%
+
+ }
+
+% Stop automatic advancing of pages.
+
+\stopAdvancing
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `divexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/fancystep.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/fancystep.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0ae938cae30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/fancystep.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `fancystep.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `fancystep')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `fancystep.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/foilsdemo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/foilsdemo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fc2ff715a31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/foilsdemo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,227 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `foilsdemo.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `foilsdemo')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{foilsdemo.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: foilsdemo.tex
+%
+% Simple examples the for combining the foils class with the dynamic features provided by the package texpower.sty.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 May 25, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+
+\documentclass[landscape]{foils}
+
+% foils understands the landscape option, but to get it through to pdflatex, we need to set \pdfpageheight etc. The
+% package fixseminar does this.
+
+\usepackage{fixseminar}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The texpower package is loaded.
+% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled.
+%
+\usepackage[display]{texpower}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\{\normalfont \texttt{foils} Demo}}
+\author{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+\maketitle
+
+
+\foilhead{A list environment}
+
+% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which
+% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages
+% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation
+% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to
+% the next page.
+
+\pause
+
+% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For
+% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step
+% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the
+% \step commands appear ``one by one''.
+
+\stepwise
+{%
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[foo.] \step{bar.}
+ \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.}
+ \end{description}
+ }
+
+
+
+\foilhead{An aligned equation}
+
+\pause
+
+% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb
+% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step.
+% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the
+% proper amount of white space.
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only
+ % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation
+ % numbers `appear'.
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ %
+ % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As
+ % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the
+ % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command.
+ %
+ \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep
+ {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the
+ % order of appearance, independent of nesting.
+ % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on
+ % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'.
+ % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be
+ % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed.
+ \switch
+ {%
+ \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
+ }
+ {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ }
+ \\
+ %
+ % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by
+ % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator.
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\foilhead{An array}
+
+\stepwise
+{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths.
+ %
+ % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that
+ % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step,
+ % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning.
+ %
+ % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the
+ % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the
+ % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by
+ % a) using only p cells,
+ % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If
+ % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into
+ % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth.
+ %
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \begin{array}{rrrrr}
+ \step
+ {%
+ n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\
+ \hline%
+ }%
+ \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}%
+ \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}%
+ \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}%
+ \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}%
+ \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}%
+ \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }%
+ \end{array}
+ \end{displaymath}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\foilhead{A picture}
+
+\pause
+
+\begin{center}%
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.6cm}%
+ \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces
+ \begin{picture}(14,2)
+ \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}}
+ \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}}
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ %
+ % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step.
+ % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of
+ % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for
+ % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces.
+ %
+ \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}}
+ }
+ \end{picture}%
+ }%
+\end{center}%
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `foilsdemo.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/fulldemo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/fulldemo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fac601aa535
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/fulldemo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,2908 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `fulldemo.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `fulldemo')
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `picexample-src')
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `tabexample-src')
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `mathexample-src')
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `parexample-src')
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `bckwrdexample-src')
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `hilitexample-src')
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `divexample-src')
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `fulldemo-middle,docu,end')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{fulldemo.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower full demo and manual]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: fulldemo.tex
+%
+% Demo & Manual for the package texpower.sty (pre-alpha release).
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be processed with
+%
+% dvips -Ppdf fulldemo
+%
+% afterwards processing the resulting ps file with
+%
+% distill fulldemo.ps
+%
+% (The syntax is for a unix system with tetex 1.0 and distiller 3. Modify appropriately for other configurations.)
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Oct 26, 1999: seven examples completed; parts of inline documentation
+%
+% v0.0.2 Feb 18, 2000: inline documentation of examples completed
+%
+% v0.0.3 Mar 1, 2000: added examples for \pause and page transitions; Documentation section started
+%
+% v0.0.4 Mar 10, 2000: Documentation for the first pre-alpha release completed
+%
+% v0.0.5 Mar 20, 2000: Documentation split into several files to reduce compilation problems; tested with pdflatex
+%
+% v0.0.6 May 2, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+% v0.0.7 May 24, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.8.
+%
+% v0.0.8 Aug 29, 2000: Added backgroundstyle command for the update to TeXpower v0.0.9.
+%
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+% Version info
+\def\tpversion{v0.0.9d of May 15, 2003 (alpha)}
+
+% Enable all color emphasis and highlighting options; use a light background and slifonts.
+
+\PassOptionsToPackage{coloremph,colormath,colorhighlight,lightbackground}{texpower}
+\RequirePackage{tpslifonts}
+
+% Input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower full demo and documentation}}
+
+% To get correct links in the index (and remove annoying warnings)
+\pausesafecounter{slide}
+
+% Setting up indexing and custom indexing commands
+\input{__TPindexing}
+
+\backgroundstyle{vgradient}
+
+\setlength{\unitlength}{5mm}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}% Can we use PSTricks?
+{% Yes.
+ % PsTricks is used for creating the picture example.
+
+ \usepackage{pstcol}
+ \usepackage{pst-node}
+
+ \psset{unit=\unitlength}
+ }
+{% No. We'll make do without.
+ }
+
+
+% We also include an mps (metapost postscript) image...
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+% The mps extension isn't supported out-of-the-box for latex+dvips
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}{%
+\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.mps}}{}
+
+% ... and write some aligned equations.
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+% Make nested braces grow.
+\delimitershortfall-1sp
+
+
+% The package soul is needed for \highlighttext to work.
+
+\usepackage{soul}
+
+
+% The following package makes code look a little nicer, but it may not be present on all systems.
+
+\IfFileExists{cmtt.sty}{\usepackage[override]{cmtt}}{}
+
+% Hack to override seminar's definition of twocolumn needed by theindex
+\makeatletter
+\let\slidebox@restore@orig=\slidebox@restore%
+\def\slidebox@restore{%
+ \slidebox@restore@orig%
+ \long\def\twocolumn[##1]{\section{Index}}%
+}
+\makeatother
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+%
+% First, some words of explanation.
+%
+ \title
+ {%
+ The \TeX Power bundle\\
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ Creating dynamic online presentations with \LaTeX\\
+ Full demo and documentation for \TeX Power \tpversion%
+ }%
+ }
+
+ \author{Stephan Lehmke\\\url{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+
+ \maketitle
+
+ \newslide
+
+ This document is a demonstration and manual for the \TeX Power bundle which allows to create dynamic
+ presentations in a very flexible way.
+
+ The heart of the bundle is the package \code{texpower} which implements some commands for presentation effects. This
+ includes setting page transitions, color highlighting and displaying pages incrementally.
+
+ All features of \code{texpower} are implemented entirely using \TeX{} and \LaTeX; they are meant for `online'
+ presentation with \concept{Adobe Acrobat\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Reader} and work with all ways of \code{pdf}
+ creation. The combination of \LaTeX{} + \code{dvips} + Acrobat Distiller /
+ \code{ps2pdf} is possible as well as pdf\LaTeX{} and other \code{pdf} creation
+ methods.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Disclaimer}
+ This is a \emph{alpha} release of the \TeX Power bundle.
+
+ During the subsequent error correction and extension of the functionality, the syntax and implementation of the macros
+ described here are liable to change.
+
+ The transformation to the dtx format is also not completed.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Credits}%
+ I am indepted to \href{mailto:guntermann@iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de}{\name{Klaus Guntermann}}. His package
+ \href{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/pp4sty.zip}{\code{texpause}} from the \concept{Pdf
+ Presentation Post Processor} \href{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/}{PPower4} bundle
+ is the basis for the code of \code{texpower}.
+
+ Further thanks go to \href{mailto:dongen@cs.ucc.ie}{\name{Marc van Dongen}} for allowing me to include his code for
+ page transitions and to \href{mailto:Martin.Schroeder@ACM.org}{\name{Martin Schr\"oder}} for permission to use his
+ \concept{everyshi} code.
+
+ Useful hints for error corrections and improvements of code have been provided by \name{Marc van Dongen},
+ \name{Friedrich Eisenbrand}, \name{Thomas Emmel}, \name{Ross Moore}, \name{Heiko Oberdiek}, \name{Heiner Richter}, and
+ \name{Robert J.\ Vanderbei}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \tableofcontents
+\end{slide}
+\begin{slide}
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \section{Examples}\label{Sec:Ex}
+ First, two simple examples for the \macroname{pause} command.
+
+ All other examples are meant to illustrate the expressive power of the \macroname{stepwise} command.
+
+ Looking at the code for the examples will probably be the best way of understanding how certain effects can be
+ achieved.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \subsection{Some examples for \macroname{pause}}
+ % It doesn't hurt to put \pause inside a paragraph, but a new paragraph is forced at each occurrence of \pause.
+ \begin{center}
+ a\pause b\pause c
+ \end{center}
+
+ \pause
+
+ % We set Page Transitions to Dissolve for the rest of this slide.
+ \pageTransitionDissolve
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item foo\pause
+ \item bar\pause
+ \item baz
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \newslide
+ % Page Transitions are set back to Replace.
+ \pageTransitionReplace
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The `titles' for the examples are simply subsection headings.
+
+\renewcommand{\makeslidetitle}[1]
+{%
+ \subsection{#1}%
+}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: A Picture}\label{Sec:ExPic}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}% Can we use PSTricks?
+{\input{picpsexample}}{\input{picltxexample}}
+\newslide
+\pageTransitionReplace
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: A Tabular}
+
+% In the following, a tabular object is built incrementally.
+% Observe how & and \\ are placed inside the following step to avoid `opening' empty cells.
+% The macro \tabend is redefined to `replace' the final \hline by \cline's when a line is not yet complete.
+%
+ \newcommand{\tabend}{\\\hline}%
+
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \hrule height 0pt\relax% This is neccessary to avoid a glitch in vertical spacing. Don't ask me why. I'll try to get
+ % this right until the first alpha version.
+ \begin{center}
+ \step
+ {%
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
+ \hline
+ They can & be built & line by line%
+ \step{\\\hline or cell\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\cline{1-1}}}%
+ \step{& by\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\cline{1-2}}}%
+ \step{& cell\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\hline}}%
+ \step
+ {%
+ \\\hline
+ %
+ % Again, \step's are nested inside each other...
+ %
+ \step{or}&\step{like}&\step{this.}%
+ }%
+ \step{\\\hline But\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\cline{1-1}}}%
+ \step{& beware\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\cline{1-2}}}%
+ \step{& of cells growing horizontally!\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\hline}}%
+ \tabend
+ \end{tabular}%
+ }%
+ \end{center}%
+ }%
+ \newslide
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: An Aligned Equation}\label{Sec:ExEq}
+% In the following, an aligned system of equations is built incrementally. We use the custom command \liststepwise to
+% avoid glitches in vertical spacing.
+%
+\liststepwise%
+{%
+ %
+ % This is just for compressing the equations so they can be squeezed on one slide.
+ %
+ \fontsize{7.8pt}{9pt}\selectfont
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{0}%
+ \setlength{\arraycolsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\belowdisplayskip}{0pt}%
+ %
+ % \highlightboxed will be used for underlaying some formulas with color. To minimize overlap, the width of the outer
+ % frame is reduced.
+ \setlength{\highlightboxsep}{1pt}%
+ %
+ \begin{align}
+ \lefteqn
+ {%
+ \min
+ \left(
+ % The nested braces are filled `from outer to inner'. This means nesting a lot of steps inside each other...
+ % The outermost brace is displayed from the outset.
+ % The first step (which follows right here) displays the next inner brace (the first argument of \min), filled
+ % with an almost `empty' array (apart from one comma and some dots).
+ % \bstep is used to get appropriate white space when the step is not yet active.
+ \bstep
+ {\max
+ \left(
+ \begin{array}{l}
+ % The next two steps fill in the lines of the array.
+ \bstep{\min\left(F'(x),\min\left(F_1(x),G_1(y)\right)\right)},\\[-2ex]
+ \vdots\\
+ \bstep{\min\left(F'(x),\min\left(F_n(x),G_n(y)\right)\right)}
+ \end{array}
+ \right)
+ },
+ % After the first brace is filled, the next step provides the second argument of \min.
+ \bstep{\min\left(G_i(y),H_i(z)\right)}
+ \right)
+ }
+ &
+ % The next couple of steps will create the remaining lines of the aligned equations. These need to be
+ % insubstantial (as is the default for \liststepwise), because & can't go in a box.
+ % As a consequence, the horizontal alignment cannot kick in until the last step is performed. This would make the
+ % alignment `flicker' sidewise.
+ % So we have to bite the bullet and duplicate the widest entry here (invisibly), so that the horizontal alignment
+ % is constant during all steps. *sigh*
+ \phantom
+ {%
+ {}=
+ \min
+ \left(
+ F'(x),
+ \min
+ \left(
+ \max
+ \left(
+ \begin{array}{l}
+ \min\left(F_1(x),\min\left(G_1(y),G_i(y)\right)\right),\\[-1.5ex]
+ \vdots\\[-.5ex]
+ \min\left(F_n(x),\min\left(G_n(y),G_i(y)\right)\right)
+ \end{array}
+ \right),
+ H_i(z)
+ \right)
+ \right)
+ }
+ % The next step displays two lines at a time, but incompletely, i.e. some parts are missing (which are inside
+ % nested calls of \bstep).
+ % This way, it is demonstrated how the arguments of the nested \min's are reordered.
+ \step
+ {%
+ \\
+ &=
+ \max
+ \left(
+ % The macro \activatestep is used by \stepwise to `wrap' the argument of a \bstep command at the _first_ time
+ % it appears.
+ % Usually, it does nothing. Now, we redefine it to highlight its background, so it is easier to spot the
+ % places where the additional arguments were inserted.
+ \let\activatestep\highlightboxed
+ \begin{array}{l}
+ \min
+ \left(
+ % The inner \bstep's display the missing arguments, which are completely identical in both lines.
+ % It is intended that all the missing arguments appear at the same time, so \rebstep is used for the
+ % remaining arguments which have been left out.
+ \min\left(\bstep{F'(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{F_1(x),G_1(y)}\right)\right),\min\left(G_i(y),H_i(z)\right)
+ \right),\\[-2ex]
+ \vdots\\[-1ex]
+ \min
+ \left(
+ \min\left(\rebstep{F'(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{F_n(x),G_n(y)}\right)\right),\min\left(G_i(y),H_i(z)\right)
+ \right)
+ \end{array}
+ \right)
+ \\
+ &=
+ \max
+ \left(
+ \let\activatestep\highlightboxed
+ \begin{array}{l}
+ \min
+ \left(
+ \min\left(
+ % Here are the remaining arguments of \min which are all to be displayed in one step (together with
+ % those from the previous line).
+ \rebstep{F'(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{F_1(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{G_1(y)},G_i(y)\right)\right)
+ \right),
+ H_i(z)
+ \right),\\[-2.5ex]
+ \vdots\\[-1.5ex]
+ \min
+ \left(
+ \min\left(
+ \rebstep{F'(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{F_n(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{G_n(y)},G_i(y)\right)\right)
+ \right),
+ H_i(z)
+ \right)
+ \end{array}
+ \right)
+ }
+ \step
+ {%
+ \\
+ &=
+ \min
+ \left(
+ F'(x),
+ \min
+ \left(
+ \max
+ \left(
+ \begin{array}{l}
+ \min\left(F_1(x),\min\left(G_1(y),G_i(y)\right)\right),\\[-1.5ex]
+ \vdots\\[-.5ex]
+ \min\left(F_n(x),\min\left(G_n(y),G_i(y)\right)\right)
+ \end{array}
+ \right),
+ H_i(z)
+ \right)
+ \right)
+ }
+ \end{align}
+ }%
+ \newslide
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: Inside A Paragraph}\label{Sec:ExPar}
+
+%
+% We show that \stepwise can be used for highlighting words within a paragraph.
+% Furthermore, it is demonstrated how the order in which \step's are executed can be changed.
+%
+% We define a `placeholder' which will mark the place of missing words (instead of \displayphantom).
+%
+\newcommand{\placeholder}[1]{\leavevmode\phantom{#1}\llap{\rule{\widthof{\phantom{#1}}}{\fboxrule}}}%
+ %
+ % We use the custom command \parstepwise which not only wraps the whole argument of \stepwise into a minipage (because
+ % otherwise vertical spacing goes haywire, don't ask me why), but also gives substance to steps.
+ %
+ % All variants of \stepwise take an optional argument the contents of which are executed inside a group before the
+ % inner loop of starts. It can be used to set parameters locally.
+ % Here, we redefine \activatestep (which has been explained in the equation example) to highlight the first
+ % appearance of any word.
+ % \hidestepcontents is used as a `wrapper' for those arguments of \step which should not appear yet. It either
+ % displays nothing (this is the default for \stepwise and \liststepwise) or puts its argument into a \phantom
+ % (the default for \parstepwise); this behaviour is also toggled by \boxedsteps and \nonboxedsteps.
+ % Here, we redefine it to use our selfdefined \placeholder to mark `missing' words.
+ %
+ \parstepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\placeholder\let\activatestep=\highlightboxed]%
+ {%
+ \begin{quote}
+ \Huge We can \step{create} a \step{fill-in-the-blanks}
+ %
+ % \step takes an optional argument with which it can be specified _when_ its argument is to appear. This is
+ % expressed in \ifthenelse syntax (see the documentation of the ifthen package).
+ % Here, we refer to the counter step which is advanced by \stepwise and contains the number of the current step.
+ % This way, steps can be made to appear in any order.
+ \step[\value{step}=5]{text} which is then
+ \step[\value{step}=4]{filled} in in
+ \step[\value{step}=3]{\textbf{any}} order!
+ \end{quote}
+ }%
+
+ \newslide
+
+ % The \hidetext command hides its argument while respecting automatic line breaks and such. The command needs the soul
+ % package to work. Read the documentation of soul for restrictions as to what can go in the argument of \hidetext.
+
+ \stepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidetext\let\activatestep=\highlighttext]
+ {%
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \begin{quote}
+ \Huge We can step through a \step{paragraph} of \step{free text}
+ \step{without disturbing} line breaks!
+ \end{quote}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \vspace*{\fill}\vspace*{\fill}
+ }
+ \newslide
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: Writing Backwards}\label{Sec:ExBackwards}
+ %
+ % The following example doesn't really demonstrate a useful application. Its purpose is twofold:
+ % a) Show how the functionality of \stepwise can be extended by the user by referring to the macros provided by the
+ % package.
+ % b) Show that \steps can appear in any order, and can be made to appear simultaneously in several places (and mention
+ % the problems this raises).
+
+ % We define a new macro \backstep which will call \step, but the steps will be executed in _reverse_ order.
+ % This is achieved as follows:
+ % * We refer to the counter totalsteps, which gives the total number of steps occurring in this argument of
+ % \stepwise.
+ % * From this, we subtract the value of the counter stepcommand, which gives the number of this \step command (in the
+ % order of appearance).
+ % * The result is compared with the counter step, which gives the number of the current step.
+ % (the default for `triggering' a \step is the condition \value{step}=\value{stepcommand})
+ %
+ % Note that if the ifthen Package would support this syntax, we could use the bracketed optional argument of \step (as
+ % in the previous example), defining \backstep like this:
+ %
+ % \newcommand{\backstep}{\step[\value{totalsteps}-\value{stepcommand}+1=\value{step}]}
+ %
+ % As \ifthenelse doesn't offer this syntax, we have to calculate \value{totalsteps}-\value{stepcommand}+1 in a separate
+ % counter. This doesn't fit the intended use of \step's optional argument. But hey, there is another syntax ;-)
+ % If the optional argument is specified with braces (...), then it can contain an arbitrary test which takes two
+ % arguments and selects the first if it succeeds and the second if it fails. We use this variant here.
+ %
+ \newcounter{reversestepno}%
+ \newcommand{\backstep}{\step(\setcounter{reversestepno}{\value{totalsteps}-\value{stepcommand}+1}\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{reversestepno}})}%
+ %
+ % We use the custom command \parstepwise which not only wraps the whole argument of \stepwise into a minipage (because
+ % otherwise vertical spacing goes haywire, don't ask me why), but also gives substance to steps.
+ %
+ % If the following \stepwise command would only contain the calls to \backstep, everything would be fine.
+ % But we _had_ to add something else....
+ % In the second part of this application of \stepwise, several steps are executed simultaneously with those executed
+ % backwards in the first part. This means the value of the counter totalsteps is 14, i.e. the calls to \backstep
+ % correspond to steps 8...14. To remedy this, we decree that the first step performed shall be number 7, by setting
+ % the counter firststep accordingly in the optional argument of \stepwise.
+ %
+ \parstepwise[\setcounter{firststep}{\value{totalsteps}/2+\value{firststep}}]
+ {%
+ \begin{quote}
+ \Huge
+ \backstep{Is} \backstep{now} \backstep{it}
+ \backstep{backwards} \backstep{write} \backstep{to}
+ \backstep{possible\,!}
+
+ \bigskip
+
+ % By determining explicitly the times at which the following steps are executed, we make them appear
+ % simultaneously with the preceding flock of \backsteps. As we have set the counter firststep to 7, we start
+ % counting with 8.
+ %
+ \step[\value{step}=8]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=9]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=10]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=11]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=12]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=13]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}
+ \step[\value{step}=14]{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{fig-1}}%
+ \end{quote}
+ }%
+ \newslide
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: Highlighting Text}\label{Sec:Exhl}
+% The default for \step's which are not yet `active' is to be `invisible'. In preceding examples, we have redefined
+% internal macros like \hidestepcontents or \activatestep to achieve special `highlighting' effects.
+% Here, we demonstrate how make text `stand out' from the background incrementally without having it appear from thin
+% air.
+
+% The first example demonstrates how to make \step its argument `stand out' instead of making it appear `out of
+% nowhere'.
+
+\makeatletter
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Can we use colors?
+{% Yes. In this case \step should change colors from `dimmed' to `active'.
+
+ % The command \hidedimmed switches colors to `dimmed', the command \highlightenhanced switches colors to `enhanced'.
+ \liststepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidedimmed\let\activatestep=\highlightenhanced]
+ {%
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{quote}
+ \Large%
+ \step{Instead of making things appear out of `thin air',} \step{we can also make them appear `out of the
+ background'} \step{by incrementally changing color from \concept{inactive}} \step{to \concept{active}.}
+ \step{This also works with \emph{color emphasis}} \step{and \concept{math coloring}: $a=b^2$.}
+ \end{quote}
+ \vspace*{\fill}\vspace*{\fill}
+ }%
+ }
+{% No. In this case we have to `handwave' using the soul package.
+ % Instead of hiding its argument, the new command \myhide just changes the font size (maintaining the overall text
+ % length though).
+ \def\myhide
+ {%
+ \leavevmode%
+ \SOUL@setup
+ \def\SOUL@everytoken{\makebox[\widthof{\the\SOUL@token}][s]{\rule[\depthof{\the\SOUL@token}*-1]{0pt}{\depthof{\the\SOUL@token}+\heightof{\the\SOUL@token}}\hrulefill\tiny\the\SOUL@token\hrulefill}\SOUL@setkern\SOUL@charkern}%
+ \SOUL@%
+ }
+
+ \liststepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\myhide\setcounter{firststep}{0}]
+ {%
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{quote}
+ \LARGE%
+ \step{Instead of making things appear out of `thin air',} \step{we can also make them appear `out of the
+ background'} \step{incrementally.}
+ \end{quote}
+ \vspace*{\fill}\vspace*{\fill}
+ }%
+ }
+\makeatother
+
+\newslide
+
+% Next, it is demonstrated how we can `flip through' an itemize environment by just highlighting the items in turn
+% instead of making them appear one by one.
+%
+% Define a macro \mystep which implements the highlighting effect.
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Can we use colors?
+{% Yes. In this case highlighting is implemented by switching color.
+ \def\mystep% Note that \mystep takes no argument. It just changes the way the next item is displayed.
+ {%
+ \usecolorset{stwcolors}% Restore the undimmed colors valid at the beginning of \stepwise.
+ \dstep[][\boolean{firstactivation}]% \dstep switches colors. The optional argument makes it appear only once.
+ }%
+}
+{% No. In this case highlighting is implemented by redefining \labelitemi.
+ \def\mystep
+ {%
+ \switch[][\boolean{firstactivation}]% The optional arguments make \switch act only once.
+ {\def\labelitemi{\origmath{\gg}}}{\def\labelitemi{\origmath{\cdot}}}%
+ }%
+ }
+
+% We define a custom itemize environment which automatically adds calls to \mystep:
+\newenvironment{stepitemize}
+{%
+ \huge
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \let\origitem=\item
+ % Here, the \mystep command is hidden inside \item
+ \renewcommand{\item}{\mystep\origitem}%
+ }
+ {%
+ \end{itemize}
+ }
+
+Instead of displaying incrementally, we can just `flip through' some items by highlighting them:
+
+% Note that we use the starred version of \liststepwise so that the first item is highlighted on the first slide
+% produced by \liststepwise.
+%
+\liststepwise*
+{%
+ \begin{stepitemize}
+ \item Item 1
+ \item Item 2
+ \item Item 3
+ \end{stepitemize}
+ }
+
+\pause
+
+% The following example demonstrates highlighting inside a paragraph using \highlighttext. By redefining \activatestep
+% to \highlighttext, the argument of every \step will be highlighted when the \step is activated for the first
+% time. Note that highlighting doesn't influence line breaks because \highlighttext is implemented using the soul
+% package.
+%
+% Again, we define \hidestepcontents to display its argument, so that the complete text is visible from the outset.
+
+\stepwise[\let\activatestep=\highlighttext\let\hidestepcontents=\displayidentical]
+{%
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \LARGE
+ \step{Inside} a paragraph, we can \step{highlight} text \step{without influencing} \step{line breaks}.
+ \end{minipage}
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ }
+\newslide
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: Fooling Around}\label{Sec:ExFooling}
+% The following example is just to show that a lot of fancy things are possible by appropriately defining the diverse
+% `hooks' offererd by \stepwise.
+`Tweaking' the hooks a little allows some truly bizarre applications\dots
+
+% In the following \stepwise command, \activatestep will be set to \textbf. This means the `first' occurrence of a number
+% is wider (because bf is an extended font) than all other occurrences of it. To avoid glitches in line breaks, all
+% other occurrences of numbers (visible and invisible) need to be of the same width. Hence we define new versions of
+% \displaystepcontents and \hidestepcontents.
+\def\mydisplay#1{\makebox[\widthof{\textbf{#1}}]{#1}}
+\def\myhide#1{\phantom{\makebox[\widthof{\textbf{#1}}]{#1}}}
+
+\newcounter{modulo}
+\newcounter{i}
+
+% Finally, we define a custom \step command which sets the optional arguments of \step.
+% We already have introduced the first optional argument, which determines when a \step is activated for the first
+% time. Here, this one is left at its default value (\value{step}=\value{stepcommand}).
+% Here, we also use the second optional argument, which has the same syntax as the first one (i.e. it can be surrounded
+% either by square brackets or braces), but determines when a \step is active _at all_ (i.e. whether
+% \displaystepcontents or \hidestepcontents is used). The default is the internal check \if@first@TP@true, which determines
+% whether step number \value{stepcommand} has already been activated for the first time (this is saved internally for
+% every step). Now, we redefine this condition to be fulfilled whenever the value of the counter step is divisible by
+% the value of the counter stepcommand.
+\def\mystep{\step[](\setcounter{modulo}{\value{step}/\value{stepcommand}*\value{stepcommand}}\ifthenelse{\value{step}=\value{modulo}})}%
+
+
+% By setting the page duration to 0.5 seconds, we make the following sequence of slides appear automatically one by one,
+% one every half second.
+
+\pageDuration{0.5}
+
+%
+% We use the custom command \parstepwise which not only wraps the whole argument of \stepwise into a minipage (because
+% otherwise vertical spacing goes haywire, don't ask me why), but also gives substance to steps. We use the starred
+% version of this command so that the number 1 appears on the first slide generated by \parstepwise.
+%
+% \activatestep is set to \textbf to emphasize the number the divisors of which are displayed.
+\parstepwise*[\let\activatestep=\textbf\let\displaystepcontents=\mydisplay\let\hidestepcontents=\myhide]
+{%
+ \huge
+ \setcounter{i}{0}%
+ Divisibility demo:
+
+ % We just have to generate the appropriate number of \mystep commands which display `their' numbers.
+ \whiledo{\value{i}<40}{\stepcounter{i}\mystep{\arabic{i}} }%
+
+ }
+
+% Stop automatic advancing of pages.
+
+\stopAdvancing
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}\relax
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The `title' for the documentation is a section heading. As sectioning in the manual (doc-tag) file starts with
+% \section, we have to `downgrade' sectioning commands.
+
+\let\origsection=\section
+
+\renewcommand{\makeslidetitle}[1]
+{%
+ \let\section\subsection
+ \let\subsection\subsubsection
+ \def\thanks##1{}%
+ \origsection{#1}
+}
+
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\clearpage}
+
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% Documentation of the TeXPower bundle.
+%
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Mar 29, 2000: Added `usage and basic options' section.
+%
+% v0.0.3 Apr 04, 2000: Added `Color Emphasis and Highlighting' section.
+%
+% v0.0.4 Apr 12, 2000: A lot of small additions in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+% v0.0.5 May 31, 2000: Updated for TeXpower v0.0.8.
+%
+% v0.0.6 Jun 09, 2000: Some updates for TeXpower v0.0.8b.
+%
+% v0.0.6a Jun 13, 2000: Some updates for TeXpower v0.0.8c.
+%
+% v0.0.6b Jun 23, 2000: Some updates for TeXpower v0.0.8e.
+%
+% v0.0.6c Jul 25, 2000: Some updates for TeXpower v0.0.8g. Colors section rewritten for new color management kernel.
+%
+% v0.0.7 May 15, 2003: Added index and updates for TeXpower v0.0.9d.
+%
+% v0.0.8 July 27, 2004: Added the "Miscellaneous commands" section. Moved the tpslifonts doc into tpslifonts.dtx.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\def\docversion{v0.0.8 of July 27, 2004}
+\def\tpversion{v0.1b of July 27, 2004}
+
+\makeslidetitle
+{%
+ Documentation%
+ \thanks{Documentation \docversion\ for \TeX Power \tpversion\ (alpha).}%
+ }%
+
+The \TeX Power bundle contains style and class files for creating dynamic online presentations with \LaTeX.
+
+The heart of the bundle is the package \code{texpower.sty} which implements some commands for presentation effects. This
+includes setting page transitions, color highlighting and displaying pages incrementally.
+
+For finding out how to achieve special effects (as shown in the \nameref{Sec:Ex}),
+please look at the comments inside the files ending with \code{example.tex} and \code{demo.tex}
+and read this manual to find out what's going on.
+
+\newslide
+
+For your own first steps with \TeX Power, the simple demo file \code{simpledemo.tex} is the best starting
+place. There, some basic applications of the dynamic features provided by the \code{texpower} package are
+demonstrated. You can make your own dynamic presentations by modifying that demo to your convenience.
+
+\code{simpledemo.tex} uses the \code{article} document class for maximum
+compatibility. There are other simple demos named
+\code{slidesdemo.tex}, \code{foilsdemo.tex}, \code{seminardemo.tex},
+\code{pp4sldemo.tex}, \code{pdfslidemo.tex}, \code{pdfscrdemo.tex},
+\code{prosperdemo.tex}, and \code{ifmslidemo.tex}
+which demonstrate how to combine \TeX Power with the
+most popular presentation-making document classes and packages.
+
+\newslide
+
+The other, more sophisticated examples demonstrate the expressive power of the
+\code{texpower} package. Look at the commented code of these examples to find out how to achieve special effects and
+create your own presentation effects with \TeX Power.
+
+For the first \emph{alpha} release, this documentation will be completed. For the first \emph{beta} release, when the
+code is a little more stable, the \code{texpower} package will be made into a properly documented \code{.dtx} file.
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{Usage and general options}
+The \code{texpower} package is loaded by putting
+\begin{center}
+ \present{\commandapp{usepackage}{texpower}}
+\end{center}
+into the preamble of a document.
+
+There are no specific restrictions as to which document classes can be used.
+
+It should be stressed that \TeX Power is \underl{not} (currently) a complete presentation package. It just adds dynamic
+presentation effects (and some other gimmicks specifically interesting for dynamic presentations) and should always be
+combined with a document class dedicated to designing presentations (or a package like
+\href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfslide.html}{\code{pdfslide}}).
+
+Some of the presentation effects created by \code{texpower} require special capabilities of the viewer which is used for
+presenting the resulting document. The target for the development of \code{texpower} has so far been
+\href{http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readermain.html}%
+{\concept{Adobe Acrobat\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Reader}}, which means the
+document should (finally) be produced in \code{pdf} format. The produced
+\code{pdf} documents should display well in
+\href{http://www.cs.wisc.edu/~ghost/gsview/}{\concept{GSview}} also, but that
+viewer doesn't support page transitions and duration.
+
+There are no specific restrictions as to which way the \code{pdf} format is produced. All demos and examples
+have been tested with pdf\LaTeX{} and standard \LaTeX, using
+\code{dvips} and \href{http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/}%
+{\concept{Adobe Acrobat\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Distiller}}
+or \code{dvips} and \code{ps2pdf} (from the \href{http://www.ghostscript.com/}%
+{\concept{Ghostscript suite}}) for generating \code{pdf}.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{General options}\label{Sec:GenOpt}
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{option: \code{display}}.]\indexpckopt{texpower}{display} Enable `dynamic' features. If not set, it is assumed that the document is to be
+ printed, and all commands for dynamic presentations, like \macroname{pause} or \macroname{stepwise} have no effect.
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{printout} (default)}.]\indexpckopt{texpower}{printout} Disable `dynamic' features. As this is the default behaviour,
+ setting this option explicitly is useful only if the option \code{display} is set by default for instance in the
+ \code{tpoptions.cfg} file (see section \ref{Sec:Config}).
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{verbose}}.]\indexpckopt{texpower}{verbose} Output some administrative info.
+\end{description}
+Some font options are listed in section \ref{Sec:BaseFont}.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Side effects of page contents duplication}\label{Sec:Dupl}
+In the implementation of the \macroname{pause} and \macroname{stepwise} commands, it is neccessary to duplicate some
+material on the page.
+
+This way, not only `visible' page contents will be duplicated, but also some `invisible' control code stored in
+\concept{whatsits} (see the \TeX book for an explanation of this concept). Duplicating whatsits can lead to undesirable
+side effects.
+
+For instance, a \macroname{section} command creates a whatsit for writing the table of contents entry. Duplicating this
+whatsit will also duplicate the toc entry.
+
+\newslide
+
+So, whatsit items effecting file access are inhibited when duplicating page material.
+
+A second type of whatsits is created by \TeX's \macroname{special} command which is used for instance for color
+management. Some drivers, like \code{dvips} and \code{textures}, use a color stack which is controlled by
+\macroname{special} items included in the dvi file. When page contents are duplicated, then these \macroname{special}s
+are also duplicated, which can seriously mess up the color stack.
+
+\newslide
+
+\code{texpower} implements a `color stack correction' method by maintaining a stack of color corrections, which should
+counteract this effect. Owing to potential performance problems, this method is turned off by default.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{option: \code{fixcolorstack}}]\indexpckopt{texpower}{fixcolorstack} switches on color stack correction. Use it if you experience strange color
+ switches in your document.
+\end{description}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Setting the base font}\label{Sec:BaseFont}
+\code{texpower} offers no options for setting the base font of the document.
+Use the \code{tpslifonts} package in stead. Read more in section \ref{Sec:TPslifonts}.
+
+Further, there are packages like \code{cmbright} or \code{beton} which change the whole set of fonts to something less
+fragile than cmr.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Switches}
+There are some boolean registers provided and set automatically by \code{texpower}.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{boolean: \code{psspecialsallowed}}]\indexpckswitch{texpower}{psspecialsallowed} True if PostScript\textsuperscript{\textregistered} specials may be
+ used.
+
+ \code{texpower} tries to find out whether or not PostScript\textsuperscript{\textregistered} specials may be used in
+ the current document. For instance, pdf\LaTeX{} can't interpret arbitrary specials. This switch is set automatically
+ and can be used inside a document to enable/disable parts which need PostScript\textsuperscript{\textregistered}
+ specials.
+
+\newslide
+
+\item[\present{boolean: \code{display}}]\indexpckswitch{texpower}{display} True if \code{display} option was given.
+
+ This switch indicates whether `dynamic' features of \code{texpower} are enabled. Use it inside your document
+ to distinguish between the `presented' and the printed version of your document.
+
+\item[\present{boolean: \code{TPcolor}}]\indexpckswitch{texpower}{TPcolor} True if any of the color highlighting options (see section
+ \ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis}) were given.
+
+ This switch indicates whether `color' features of \code{texpower} are enabled (compare section
+ \ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis}). You can use it inside your document to distinguish between a `colored' and a `monochrome'
+ version of your document.
+\end{description}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Configuration files}\label{Sec:Config}
+\code{texpower} loads three configuration files (if present):
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{file: \code{tpoptions.cfg}}]\indexcode{tpoptions.cfg}
+ is loaded before options are processed. Can be used to set default options
+ in a system-specific way. See the comments inside the file
+ \code{tpoptions.cfg} which is part of the \TeX Power bundle
+ for instructions.
+
+\item[\present{file: \code{tpsettings.cfg}}]\indexcode{tpsettings.cfg}
+ is loaded at the end of \code{texpower}. Here, you can do some
+ system-specific settings. See the comments inside the
+ file \code{tpsettings.cfg} which is part of the
+ \TeX Power bundle for instructions.
+
+\item[\present{file: \code{tpcolors.cfg}}]\indexcode{tpcolors.cfg}
+ is loaded if \code{TPcolor} is true. The file defines the standard
+ colors/colorsets (see section \ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis}). See the
+ comments inside the file \code{tpcolors.cfg} which is part of the
+ \TeX Power bundle for instructions.
+\end{description}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Miscellaneous commands}\label{Sec:MiscCmd}
+Some important commands that don't fit in the latter sections:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{\commandapp{currentpagevalue}{\carg{value}}}]\indexmacro{currentpagevalue}
+ sets how to find the number of the current page, \commandapp{value}{page} is default.
+ Used to name the hyper target on the first subpage of every page. Also used in the
+ TeXPower navigation buttons.
+\item[\present{\commandapp{pausesafecounter}{\carg{counter}}}]\indexmacro{pausesafecounter}
+ is used to add counters that are to be restored to their original value after \macroname{pause}. The \code{page}
+ counter is always restored. In addition the \code{slide} counter is restored if the \code{seminar} class is used. If
+ you need more counters to be restored after \macroname{pause}, use \macroname{pausesafecounter}.
+\end{description}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Dependencies on other packages}
+\code{textpower} always loads the packages \code{ifthen} and \code{calc}, as the extended command syntax provided by
+these is indispensable for the macros to work. They are in the \code{base} and \code{tools} area of the \LaTeX{}
+distribution, respectively, so I hope they are available on all systems.
+
+Furthermore, \code{texpower} loads the package \code{color} if any color-specific options are set (see section
+\ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis}).
+
+Further packages are \emph{not} loaded automatically by \code{texpower} to avoid incompatibilities, although some
+features of \code{texpower} are enabled \emph{only} if a certain package is loaded. If you wish to use these features,
+you are responsible for loading the respective package yourself.
+
+If some necessary package is \emph{not} loaded, \code{texpower} will issue a warning and disable the respective
+features.
+
+The following packages are neccessary for certain features of \code{texpower}:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{package: \code{hyperref}}]\indexfile{hyperref}{package}
+ is neccessary for page transition effects to work (see section
+ \ref{Sec:PageTrans}).
+
+ In particular, the \macroname{pageDuration} (see section \ref{Sec:PageDuration}) command only works if the version of
+ hyperref loaded is at least v6.70a (where the \code{pdfpageduration} key was introduced).
+
+ Commands which work only when \code{hyperref} is loaded are marked with \textbf{\textsf{h}} in the description.
+
+\newslide
+
+\item[\present{package: \code{soul}}]\indexfile{soul}{package}
+ is neccessary for the implementation of the commands \macroname{hidetext} and
+ \macroname{highlighttext} (see section \ref{Sec:displaycustom}).
+
+ Commands which work only when \code{soul} is loaded are marked with \textbf{\textsf{s}} in the description.
+\end{description}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{What else is part of the \TeX Power bundle?}
+Besides the package \code{texpower} (which is described here), there are four
+more packages, \code{tpslifonts}, \code{fixseminar}, \code{automata} and
+\code{tplists}, and one document class,
+\code{powersem}, in the \TeX Power bundle which so far have no documentation
+of their own. They will be described in this section until they are turned
+into \code{dtx} files producing their own documentation.
+
+See the file \code{00readme.txt} which is part of the \TeX Power bundle for a short description of all files.
+
+\newslide
+
+\minisec{The document class \code{powersem}}\indexfile{powersem}{class}
+This is planned to provide a more `modern' version of \code{seminar} which can be used for creating dynamic
+presentations.
+
+Currently, this document class doesn't do much more than load \code{seminar} and apply some fixes, but it is planned to
+add some presentation-specific features (like navigation panels).
+
+\newslide
+
+There are three new options which are specific for \code{powersem}, all other options are passed to \code{seminar}:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{option: \code{display}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{display}
+ Turns off all features of \code{seminar} (notes, vertical centering of slides)
+ which can disturb dynamic presentations.
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{calcdimensions}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{calcdimensions}
+ \code{seminar} automatically calculates the slide dimensions
+ \macroname{slidewidth} and \macroname{slideheight} only for the default \code{letter} and for its own option
+ \code{a4}. For all the other paper sizes which are possible with the \code{KOMA} option, the slide dimensions are not
+ calculated automatically.
+
+ The \code{calcdimensions} option makes \code{powersem} calculate the slide dimensions automatically from paper size
+ and margins.
+
+\newslide
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{truepagenumbers}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{truepagenumbers}
+ The truepagenumbers option makes powersem count pages with the counter page, independently of the counter slide. This
+ enables proper working of TeXPowers navigation buttons (some of which calculate relative page numbers) even when the
+ counter slide is reset frequently (for slide numberings of the type \verb|<l>.<n>.<m>|).
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{KOMA}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{KOMA} Makes
+ \code{seminar} load \code{scrartcl} (from the KOMA-Script bundle) instead of
+ \code{article} as its base class. All new features of \code{scrartcl} are then available also for slides.
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{UseBaseClass}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{UseBaseClass}
+ Makes \code{seminar} load the class \macroname{baseclass} (initially \code{article}) instead of
+ \code{article} as its base class.
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{reportclass}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{reportclass}
+ Makes \code{seminar} load the class \macroname{baseclass} (initially \code{report}) instead of
+ \code{article}.
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{bookclass}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{bookclass}
+ Makes \code{seminar} load the class \macroname{baseclass} (initially \code{book}) instead of
+ \code{article}.
+
+\end{description}
+
+There is one change in \code{powersem} which will lead to incompatibilities with \code{seminar}. \code{seminar} has the
+unfortunate custom of \emph{not} exchanging \macroname{paperwidth} and \macroname{paperheight} when making landscape
+slides, as for instance \code{typearea} and \code{geometry} do.
+
+This leads to problems with setting the paper size for \code{pdf} files, as done for instance by the \code{hyperref}
+package.
+
+\code{powersem} effectively turns off \code{seminar}'s papersize management and leaves this to the base class (with the
+pleasant side effect that you can use e.\,g.\ \commandapp[KOMA,a0paper]{documentclass}{powersem} for making posters).
+
+In consequence, the \code{portrait} option of \code{seminar} is turned on by \code{powersem} to avoid confusing
+\code{seminar}. You have to explicitly use the \code{landscape} option (and a base class or package which understands
+this option) to get landscape slides with powersem.
+
+\newslide
+
+\minisec{The package \code{fixseminar}}\indexfile{fixseminar}{package}
+Unfortunately, there are some fixes to seminar which can \emph{not} be applied in \code{powersem} because they have to
+be applied after \code{hyperref} is loaded (if this package should be loaded).
+
+The package \code{fixseminar} applies these fixes, so this package should be loaded after \code{hyperref} (if
+\code{hyperref} is loaded at all, otherwise \code{fixseminar} can be loaded anywhere in the preamble).
+
+\newslide
+
+It applies two fixes:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item In case \code{pdflatex} is being run, the lengths \macroname{pdfpageheight} and \macroname{pdfpagewidth} have to
+ be set in a `magnification-sensitive' way.
+
+\item \code{hyperref} introduces some code at the beginning of every page which can produce spurious vertical space,
+ which in turn disturbs building dynamic pages. This code is `fixed' so it cannot produce vertical space.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newslide
+
+\minisec{The package \code{tpslifonts}}
+\indexfile{tpslifonts}{package}\label{Sec:TPslifonts}
+Presentations to be displayed `online' with a video beamer have special needs concerning font configuration owing to low
+`screen' resolution and bad contrast caused by possibly bad light conditions combined with color highlighting.
+
+This package tries to cater to these needs by offering a holistic configuration of all document fonts, including text,
+typewriter, and math fonts. Special features are `smooth scaling' of Type1 fonts and careful design size selection for
+optimal readability.
+
+\newslide
+
+For more information on package options and used fonts (and on implementation) read the documentation coming with the
+package - check the \code{tpslifonts} directory.
+
+\minisec{The package \code{automata}}\indexfile{automata}{package}
+Experimental package for drawing automata in the sense of theoretical computer
+science (using PSTricks) and animating them with TeXPower. Only DFA and Mealy
+automata are supported so far.
+
+\newslide
+
+\minisec{The package \code{tplists}}\indexfile{tplists}{package}
+Experimental package providing easy dynamic lists. Currently there are stepped, flipped and dimmed versions of itemize
+and enumerate (and corresponding lists from the \code{eqlist} and \code{paralist} package). For more information
+and an example read the start of the file \code{tplists.sty}.
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{The \macroname{pause} command}\label{Sec:pause}
+\present{\macroname{pause}}\indexmacro{pause} is derived from the \macroname{pause} command from the package
+\href{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/pp4sty.zip}{\code{texpause}} which is part of the
+\href{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/}{PPower4 suite} by
+\href{mailto:guntermann@iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de}{Klaus Guntermann}.
+
+ It will ship out the current page, start a new page and copy whatever was on the current page onto the new page, where
+ typesetting is resumed.
+
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}{Here, let's do a little demo\pause}{}
+
+ This will create the effect of a \concept{pause} in the presentation, i.\,e.\ the presentation stops because the
+ current page ends at the point where the \macroname{pause} command occurred and is resumed at this point when the
+ presenter switches to the next page.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \macroname{pause} should appear in \concept{vertical mode} only, i.\,e.\ between paragraphs or at places where
+ ending the current paragraph doesn't hurt.
+
+ \item This means \macroname{pause} is forbidden in all \concept{boxed} material (including \code{tabular}),
+ \concept{headers/footers}, and \concept{floats}.
+
+ \item \macroname{pause} shouldn't appear either in environments which have to be \emph{closed} to work properly, like
+ \code{picture}, \code{tabbing}, and (unfortunately) environments for \concept{aligned math formulas}.
+
+ \item \macroname{pause} does work in all environments which mainly influence paragraph formatting, like \code{center},
+ \code{quote} or all \concept{list} environments.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item \macroname{pause} doesn't really have problems with automatic page breaking, but beware of \emph{overfull}
+ pages/slides. In this case, it may occur that only the last page(s)/slide(s) of a sequence are overfull, which
+ changes vertical spacing, making lines `wobble' when switching to the last page/slide of a sequence.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item The duplication of page material done by \macroname{pause} can lead to unwanted side effects. See section
+ \ref{Sec:Dupl} for further explanations. In particular, if you should experience strange color switches when using
+ \macroname{pause} (and you are \underl{not} using \code{pdftex}), turn on color stack correction with the option
+ \code{fixcolorstack}. In addition you should be aware of \macroname{pausesafecounter}, see section
+ \ref{Sec:MiscCmd}.
+
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ A lot of the restrictions for the use of pause can be avoided by using \macroname{stepwise} (see next section).
+
+ \newslide
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \section{The \macroname{stepwise} command}
+ \present{\commandapp{stepwise}{\carg{contents}}}\indexmacro{stepwise} is a command for displaying some part of a \LaTeX{} document (which
+ is contained in \carg{contents}) `step by step'. As of itself, \macroname{stepwise} doesn't do very much. If
+ \carg{contents} contains one or more constructs of the form \present{\commandapp{step}{\carg{stepcontents}}}\indexmacro{step}, the
+ following happens:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item The current contents of the page are saved (as with \macroname{pause}).
+
+ \item As many pages as there are \macroname{step} commands in \carg{contents} are produced.
+
+ Every page starts with what was on the current page when \macroname{stepwise} started.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The first page also contains everything in \carg{contents} which is \emph{not} in \carg{stepcontents} for any
+ \macroname{step} command.
+
+ The second page additionally contains the \carg{stepcontents} for the \emph{first} \macroname{step} command, and so
+ on, until all \carg{stepcontents} are displayed.
+
+ \item When all \carg{stepcontents} are displayed, \macroname{stepwise} ends and typesetting is resumed (still on the
+ current page).
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \parstepwise{This will create the effect that the \macroname{step} commands are executed `\step{step} \step{by}
+ \step{step}'.}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \macroname{stepwise} should appear in \concept{vertical mode} only, i.\,e.\ between paragraphs, just like
+ \macroname{pause}.
+
+ \item Don't put \macroname{pause} or nested occurrences of \macroname{stepwise} into \carg{contents}.
+
+ \item Structures where \macroname{pause} does not work (like \code{tabular} or aligned equations) can go
+ \emph{completely} into \carg{contents}, where \macroname{step} can be used freely (see \nameref{Sec:Ex}).
+
+ \item As \carg{contents} is read as a macro argument, constructs involving \concept{catcode} changes (like
+ \macroname{verb} or language switches) won't work in \carg{contents}. Using a suggestion by \name{Ross
+ Moore}, I hope to remedy this until the \emph{alpha} release.
+
+\newslide
+
+ \item Several instances of \macroname{stepwise} may occur on one page, also combined with \macroname{pause} (outside
+ of \carg{contents}).
+
+ But beware of page breaks in \carg{contents}. This will really mess things up.
+
+ Overfull pages/slides are also a problem, just like with \macroname{pause}. See the description of \macroname{pause}
+ (section \ref{Sec:pause}) concerning this and also concerning side effects of duplicating page material.
+
+ \item \macroname{step} can go in \carg{stepcontents}. The order of execution of \macroname{step} commands is just the
+ order in which they appear in \carg{contents}, independent of nesting within each other.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item As \carg{contents} is executed several times, \LaTeX{} constructs changing \concept{global counters}, accessing
+ \concept{files} etc.\ are problematic. This concerns sections, numbered equations, labels, hyperlinks and the like.
+
+ Counters are taken care of explicitly by \macroname{stepwise}, so equation numbers are no problem.
+
+ Commands accessing toc files and such (like \macroname{section}) are taken care of by the whatsit suppression
+ mechanism (compare section \ref{Sec:Dupl}).
+
+ Labels and hyperlinks work sort of (giving a lot of warnings though).
+
+ I will try to remedy remaining problems until the first \emph{alpha} release.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{\macroname{boxedsteps} and \macroname{nonboxedsteps}}\label{Sec:boxedsteps}%
+ By default, \carg{stepcontents} belonging to a \macroname{step} which is not yet `active' are ignored altogether. This
+ makes it possible to include e.\,g.\ tabulators \code{\&} or line breaks into \carg{stepcontents} without breaking
+ anything.
+
+ Sometimes, however, this behaviour is undesirable, for instance when stepping through an equation `from outer to
+ inner', or when filling in blanks in a paragraph. Then, the desired behaviour of a \macroname{step} which is not yet
+ `active' is to create an appropriate amount of \emph{blank space} where \carg{stepcontents} can go as soon as it is
+ activated.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The simplest and most robust way of doing this is to create an empty box (aka \macroname{phantom}) with the same
+ dimensions as the text to be hidden.
+
+ This behaviour is toggled by the following commands. See section \ref{Sec:displaycustom} for more sophisticated
+ (albeit more fragile) variants.
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{boxedsteps}}]\indexmacro{boxedsteps} makes \macroname{step} create a blank box the size of \carg{stepcontents} when
+ inactive and put \carg{stepcontents} into a box when active.
+ \item[\present{\macroname{nonboxedsteps}}]\indexmacro{nonboxedsteps} makes \macroname{step} ignore \carg{stepcontents} when inactive and leave
+ \carg{stepcontents} alone when active (default).
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item The settings effected by \macroname{boxedsteps} and \macroname{nonboxedsteps} are \emph{local}, i.\,e.\ whenever
+ a group closes, the setting is restored to its previous value.
+
+ \item Putting stuff into boxes can break things like tabulators (\code{\&}). It can also mess up math spacing, which
+ then has to be corrected manually. Compare the following examples:
+
+ \parstepwise{%
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \left(\frac{a+b}{c}\right)\qquad\left(\frac{a\step{+b}}{c}\right)\qquad\left(\frac{a\restep{{}+b}}{c}\right)
+ \end{displaymath}%
+ }%
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Custom versions of \macroname{stepwise}}%
+ Sometimes, it might happen that vertical spacing is different on every page of a sequence generated by
+ \macroname{stepwise}, making lines `wobble'.
+
+ This is caused by interactions between different ways vertical spacing is added to the page. Hopefully, problems
+ caused this way can be reduced until the first \emph{alpha} release.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ There are two custom versions of \macroname{stepwise} which should produce better vertical spacing.
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{liststepwise}{\carg{contents}}}]
+ \indexmacro{liststepwise} works exactly like \macroname{stepwise}, but adds
+ an `invisible rule' before \carg{contents}. Use for list environments and
+ aligned equations.
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{parstepwise}{\carg{contents}}}]
+ \indexmacro{parstepwise} works like \macroname{liststepwise}, but
+ \macroname{boxedsteps} is turned on by default. Use for texts where
+ \macroname{step}s are to be filled into blank spaces.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Starred versions of \macroname{stepwise} commands}\label{Sec:StarredStepwise}%
+ Usually, the first page of a sequence produced contains \emph{only} material which is \emph{not} part of any
+ \carg{stepcontents}. The first \carg{stepcontents} are displayed on the second page of the sequence.
+
+ For special effects (see example \ref{Sec:Exhl}), it might be desirable to have the first \carg{stepcontents} active
+ even on the first page of the sequence.
+
+ All variants of \macroname{stepwise} have a starred version (e.\,g.\ \macroname{stepwise*}) which does exactly that.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{The optional argument of \macroname{stepwise}}%
+ Every variant of \macroname{stepwise} takes an optional argument, like this
+ \begin{center}
+ \present{\commandapp[\carg{settings}]{stepwise}{\carg{contents}}}.
+ \end{center}
+ \carg{settings} will be placed right before the internal loop which produces the sequence of pages. It can
+ contain settings of parameters which modify the behaviour of \macroname{stepwise} or \macroname{step}. \carg{settings}
+ is placed inside a group so all changes are local to this call of \macroname{stepwise}.
+
+ Some internal macros and counters which can be adjusted are explained in the following.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Customizing the way \carg{stepcontents} is diplayed}\label{Sec:displaycustom}%
+ Internally, there are three macros (taking one argument each) which control how \carg{stepcontents} is displayed:
+ \macroname{displaystepcontents}\indexmacro{displaystepcontents},
+ \macroname{hidestepcontents}\indexmacro{hidestepcontents}, and
+ \macroname{activatestep}\indexmacro{activatestep}. Virtually, every
+ \commandapp{step}{\carg{stepcontents}} is replaced by
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{hidestepcontents}{\carg{stepcontents}}}]\mbox{}\\ when this step is not yet active.
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{displaystepcontents}{\commandapp{activatestep}{\carg{stepcontents}}}}] when this step is
+ activated \emph{for the first time}.
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{displaystepcontents}{\carg{stepcontents}}}]\mbox{}\\
+ when this step has been activated before.
+ \end{description}
+
+ By redefining these macros, the behaviour of \macroname{step} is changed accordingly. You can redefine them inside
+ \carg{contents} to provide a change affecting one \macroname{step} only, or in the optional argument of
+ \macroname{stepwise} to provide a change for all \macroname{step}s inside \carg{contents}.
+
+ In the \nameref{Sec:Ex}, it is demonstrated how special effects can be achieved by redefining these macros.
+
+ \macroname{activatestep} is set to \macroname{displayidentical} by default, the default settings of
+ \macroname{hidestepcontents} and \macroname{displaystepcontents} depend on whether \macroname{boxedsteps} or
+ \macroname{nonboxedsteps} (default) is used.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \code{texpower} offers nine standard definitions.
+
+ For interpreting \macroname{displaystepcontents}:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{displayidentical}}]\indexmacro{displayidentical}
+ Simply expands to its argument. The same as \LaTeX s
+ \macroname{@ident}. Used by \macroname{nonboxedsteps} (default).
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{displayboxed}}]\indexmacro{displayboxed}
+ Expands to an \macroname{mbox} containing its argument. Used by
+ \macroname{boxedsteps}.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ For interpreting \macroname{hidestepcontents}:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{hideignore}}]\indexmacro{hideignore}
+ Expands to nothing. The same as \LaTeX s \macroname{@gobble}. Used by
+ \macroname{nonboxedsteps} (default).
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{hidephantom}}]\indexmacro{hidephantom}
+ Expands to a \macroname{phantom} containing its argument. Used by
+ \macroname{boxedsteps}.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{hidevanish}}]\indexmacro{hidevanish}
+ In a colored document, makes its argument `vanish' by setting all colors to
+ \macroname{vanishcolor} (defaults to \code{pagecolor}; compare section
+ \ref{Sec:Colorcommands}). Note that this will give weird results with
+ structures backgrounds.
+
+ For monochrome documents, there is no useful interpretation for this command, so it is disabled.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[{\present[s]{\macroname{hidetext}}}]\indexmacro{hidetext}
+ Produces blank space of the same dimensions as the space that would be
+ occupied if its argument would be typeset in the current paragraph. Respects automatic hyphenation and line breaks.
+
+ This command needs the \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} package
+ to work, which is not loaded by \code{texpower} itself. Consult the documentation of
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} concerning restrictions on
+ commands implemented using \code{soul}. If you don't load the \code{soul} package yourself, there is no useful
+ definition for this command, so it defaults to \macroname{hidephantom}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{hidedimmed}}]\indexmacro{hidedimmed}
+ In a colored document, displays its argument with dimmed colors (compare
+ section \ref{Sec:Colors}). Note that this doesn't make the argument completely invisible.
+
+ For monochrome documents, there is no useful interpretation for this command, so it is disabled.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ For interpreting \macroname{activatestep}:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{highlightboxed}}]\indexmacro{highlightboxed}
+ If the \code{colorhighlight} option (see section \ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis})
+ is set, expands to a \highlightboxed{box with colored background} containing its argument. Otherwise, expands to an
+ \macroname{fbox} containing its argument. It is made sure that the resulting box has the same dimensions as the
+ argument (the outer frame may overlap surrounding text).
+
+ There is a new length register \present{\macroname{highlightboxsep}}
+ \indexmacro{highlightboxsep} which acts like \macroname{fboxsep} for the
+ resulting box and defaults to \code{0.5\macroname{fboxsep}}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[{\present[s]{\macroname{highlighttext}}}]\indexmacro{highlighttext}
+ If the \code{colorhighlight} option (see section \ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis})
+ is set, puts its argument \highlighttext{on colored background}. Otherwise, underlines its
+ argument. It is made sure that the resulting text has the same dimensions as the argument (the outer frame may
+ overlap surrounding text).
+
+ \present{\macroname{highlightboxsep}} is used to determine the extent of the coloured box(es) used as background.
+
+ This command needs the \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} package
+ to work (compare the description of \macroname{hidetext}). If you don't load the \code{soul} package yourself, there
+ is no useful definition for this command, so it is disabled.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{highlightenhanced}}]\indexmacro{highlightenhanced}
+ In a colored document, displays its argument \highlightenhanced{with
+ enhanced colors} (compare section \ref{Sec:Colors}).
+
+ For monochrome documents, there is no useful interpretation for this command, so it is disabled.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Variants of \macroname{step}}
+ There are a couple of custom versions of \macroname{step} which make it easier to achieve special effects needed
+ frequently.
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{bstep}}]\indexmacro{bstep}
+ Like \macroname{step}, but is \emph{always} boxed (see section
+ \ref{Sec:boxedsteps}). \commandapp{bstep}{\carg{stepcontents}} is
+ implemented in principle as
+ \code{\{\macroname{boxedsteps}\commandapp{step}{\carg{stepcontents}}\}}.
+
+ In aligned equations where \macroname{stepwise} is used for being able to put tabulators into \carg{stepcontents},
+ but where nested occurrences of \macroname{step} should be boxed to assure correct sizes of growing braces or such,
+ this variant of \macroname{step} is more convenient than using \macroname{boxedsteps} for every nested occurrence
+ of \macroname{step}.
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{switch}{\carg{ifinactive}\}\{\carg{ifactive}}}]
+ \indexmacro{switch} is a variant of \macroname{step} which,
+ instead of making its argument appear, switches between \carg{ifinactive}
+ and \carg{ifactive} when activated.
+
+ In fact, \commandapp{step}{\carg{stepcontents}} is in principle implemented by
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ \macroname{switch}\=\code{\{\commandapp{hidestepcontents}{\carg{stepcontents}}\}}\\
+ \>\code{\{\commandapp{displaystepcontents}{\carg{stepcontents}}\}}
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+ This command can be used, for instance, to add an \macroname{underbrace} to a formula, which is difficult using
+ \macroname{step}.
+
+ Beware of problems when \carg{ifinactive} and \carg{ifactive} have different dimensions.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{dstep}}]\indexmacro{dstep}
+ A variant of \macroname{step} which takes \underl{no} argument, but simply
+ switches colors to `dimmed' (compare section \ref{Sec:Colors}) if not
+ active. Not that the scope of this color change will
+ last until the next outer group closes. This command does nothing in a monochrome document.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{vstep}}]\indexmacro{vstep}
+ A variant of \macroname{step} which takes \underl{no} argument, but simply
+ switches all colors to \macroname{vanishcolor} (defaults to
+ \code{pagecolor}; compare section \ref{Sec:Colorcommands}) if not
+ active. Not that the scope of this color change will last until the next outer group closes. This command does
+ nothing in a monochrome document.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{steponce}}]\indexmacro{steponce}
+ % \steponce[<activatefirst>]{<stepcontents>}
+ Like \macroname{step}, but goes inactive again in the subsequent step.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{multistep}}]\indexmacro{multistep}
+ is a shorthand macro for executing several steps successively. In
+ fact, it would better be called \macroname{multiswitch}, because it's
+ functionality is based on \macroname{switch}, it only acts like a
+ (simplified) \macroname{step} command which is executed `several times'.
+ The syntax is
+ \begin{center}
+ \commandapp[\carg{activatefirst}]{multistep}{\carg{n}\}\{\carg{stepcontents}}
+ \end{center}
+ where \carg{n} is the number of steps. Only one instance of
+ \carg{stepcontents} is displayed at a time. Inside \carg{stepcontents}, a
+ counter \code{substep} can be evaluated which tells the number of the
+ current instance. In the starred form the last instance of
+ \carg{stepcontents} stays visible.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{movie}}]\indexmacro{movie}
+ works like \macroname{multistep}, but between \macroname{steps}, pages are
+ advanced automatically every \carg{dur} seconds. The syntax is
+ \begin{center}
+ \commandapp{movie}{\carg{n}\}\{\carg{dur}\}[\carg{stop}]\{\carg{stepcontents}}
+ \end{center}
+ where \carg{n} is the number of steps. The additional optional argument
+ \carg{stop} gives the code (default: \macroname{stopAdvancing})
+ \indexmacro{stopAdvancing} which stops the animation.
+ (\macroname{movie} accepts the same first optional argument as
+ \macroname{multistep} but it was left out above.)
+
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{overlays}}]\indexmacro{overlays}
+ is another shorthand macro for executing several steps successively. In
+ contrast to \macroname{multistep}, it doesn't print things \emph{after}
+ each other, but \emph{over} each other. The syntax is
+ \begin{center}
+ \commandapp[\carg{activatefirst}]{overlays}{\carg{n}\}\{\carg{stepcontents}}
+ \end{center}
+ where \carg{n} is the number of steps. Inside \carg{stepcontents}, a
+ counter \code{substep} can be evaluated which tells the number of the
+ current instance.
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\small%
+ \present{\macroname{restep}}\indexmacro{restep},
+ \present{\macroname{rebstep}}\indexmacro{rebstep},
+ \present{\macroname{reswitch}}\indexmacro{reswitch},
+ \present{\macroname{redstep}}\indexmacro{redstep},
+ \present{\macroname{revstep}}\indexmacro{revstep}.]\mbox{}\\
+ Frequently, it is desirable for two or more steps to appear at the same
+ time, for instance to fill in arguments at
+ several places in a formula at once (see example \ref{Sec:ExEq}).
+
+ \present{\commandapp{restep}{\carg{stepcontents}}} is identical with \commandapp{step}{\carg{stepcontents}}, but is
+ activated at the same time as the previous occurrence of \macroname{step}.
+
+ \present{\macroname{rebstep}}, \present{\macroname{reswitch}}, \present{\macroname{redstep}}, and
+ \present{\macroname{revstep}} do the same for \macroname{bstep}, \macroname{switch}, \macroname{dstep}, and
+ \macroname{vstep}.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Optional arguments of \macroname{step}}%
+ Sometimes, letting two \macroname{step}s appear at the same time (with \macroname{restep}) is not the only desirable
+ modification of the order in which \macroname{step}s appear. \macroname{step}, \macroname{bstep} and
+ \macroname{switch} take two optional arguments for influencing the mode of activation, like this:
+ \begin{center}
+ \present{\commandapp[{\carg{activatefirst}][\carg{whenactive}}]{step}{\carg{stepcontents}}}.
+ \end{center}
+ Both \carg{activatefirst} and \carg{whenactive} should be conditions in the syntax of the \macroname{ifthenelse}
+ command (see the documentation of the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/ifthen.html}{\code{ifthen}} package for details).
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \present{\carg{activatefirst}} checks whether this \macroname{step} is to be activated \emph{for the first time}. The
+ default value is \present{\commandapp{value}{step}=\commandapp{value}{stepcommand}} (see section \ref{Sec:Internals}
+ for a list of internal values). By using \commandapp{value}{step}=\carg{$n$}, this \macroname{step} can be forced to
+ appear as the $n$th one. See example \ref{Sec:ExPar} for a demonstration of how this can be used to make
+ \macroname{step}s appear in arbitrary order.
+
+ \present{\carg{whenactive}} checks whether this \macroname{step} is to be considered active \emph{at all}. The default
+ behaviour is to check whether this \macroname{step} has been activated before (this is saved internally for every
+ step). See example \ref{Sec:ExFooling} for a demonstration of how this can be used to make \macroname{step}s appear
+ and disappear after a defined fashion.
+
+ \minisec{If you know what you're doing\dots}
+ Both optional arguments allow two syntctical forms:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item enclosed in square brackets \code{[]} like explained above.
+ \item enclosed in braces \code{()}. In this case, \carg{activatefirst} and \carg{whenactive} are \emph{not} treated as
+ conditions in the sense of \macroname{ifthenelse}, but as conditionals like those used internally by \LaTeX. That
+ means, \carg{activatefirst} (when enclosed in braces) can contain arbitrary \TeX{} code which then takes two
+ arguments and expands to one of them, depending on whether the condition is fulfilled or not fulfilled. For
+ instance, \commandapp[{\carg{activatefirst}}]{step}{\carg{stepcontents}} could be replaced by
+ \macroname{step}\code{(\commandapp{ifthenelse}{\carg{activatefirst}})\{\carg{stepcontents}\}}.
+
+ See example \ref{Sec:ExBackwards} for a simple application of this syntax.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ Internally, the default for the treatment of \carg{whenactive} is \code{(\macroname{if@first@TP@true})}, where
+ \macroname{if@first@TP@true} is an internal condition checking whether this \macroname{step} has been activated before.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Finding out what's going on}\label{Sec:Internals}%
+ Inside \carg{settings} and \carg{contents}, you can refer to the following internal state variables which provide
+ information about the current state of the process executed by \macroname{stepwise}:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{counter: \code{firststep}}]
+ \indexstepwise{firststep}{counter}
+ The number from which to start counting steps (see counter \code{step}
+ below). Is $0$ by default and $1$ for starred versions (section \ref{Sec:StarredStepwise}) of \macroname{stepwise}.
+ You can set this in \carg{settings} for special effects (see example \ref{Sec:ExBackwards}).
+
+ \item[\present{counter: \code{totalsteps}}]
+ \indexstepwise{totalsteps}{counter}
+ The total number of \macroname{step} commands occurring in \carg{contents}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{counter: \code{step}}]
+ \indexstepwise{step}{counter}
+ The number of the current iteration, i.\,e.\ the number of the current page in
+ the sequence of pages produced by \macroname{stepwise}. Runs from \commandapp{value}{firststep} to
+ \commandapp{value}{totalsteps}.
+
+ \item[\present{counter: \code{stepcommand}}]
+ \indexstepwise{stepcommand}{counter}
+ The number of the \macroname{step} command currently being executed.
+
+ \item[\present{boolean: \code{firstactivation}}]
+ \indexstepwise{firstactivation}{boolean}
+ \code{true} if this \macroname{step} is active for the first time,
+ \code{false} otherwise.
+
+ \item[\present{boolean: \code{active}}]\indexstepwise{active}{boolean}
+ \code{true} if this \macroname{step} is currently active, \code{false}
+ otherwise.
+ \end{description}
+ \code{stepcommand}, \code{firstactivation}, and \code{active} are useful only inside \carg{stepcontents}.
+
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{\macroname{afterstep}}\indexmacro{afterstep}%
+ It might be neccessary to set some parameters which affect the appearance of the \emph{page} (like page transitions)
+ inside \carg{stepcontents}. However, the \macroname{step} commands are usually placed deeply inside some structure, so
+ that all \emph{local} settings are likely to be undone by groups closing before the page is completed.
+
+ \present{\commandapp{afterstep}{\carg{settings}}} puts \carg{settings} right before the end of the page, after the
+ current step is performed.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item There can be only one effective value for \carg{settings}. Every occurrence of \macroname{afterstep} overwrites
+ this value globally.
+
+ \item \macroname{afterstep} will \emph{not} be executed in \carg{stepcontents} if the corresponding \macroname{step}
+ is not active, even if \carg{stepcontents} is displayed owing to a redefinition of \macroname{hidestepcontents},
+ like in example \ref{Sec:Exhl}.
+
+ \item As \carg{settings} is put immediately before the page break, there is no means of restoring the original value
+ of whatever has been set. So if you set something via \macroname{afterstep} and want it to be reset in some later
+ step, you have to reset it explicitly with another call of \macroname{afterstep}.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \section{Page transitions and automatic advancing}\label{Sec:PageTrans}
+ \subsection{Page transitions}
+ I am indepted to \href{mailto:dongen@cs.ucc.ie}{\name{Marc van Dongen}} for allowing me to include a suite of commands
+ written by him and posted to the \href{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/}{PPower4}
+ mailing list which set page transitions (using
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/hyperref.html}{\code{hyperref}s} \macroname{hypersetup}).
+
+ These commands work only if the \code{hyperref} package is loaded.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The following page transition commands are defined:\pause
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionSplitHO}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionSplitHO}
+ Split Horizontally to the outside. \pageTransitionSplitHO\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionSplitHI}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionSplitHI}
+ Split Horizontally to the inside. \pageTransitionSplitHI\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionSplitVO}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionSplitVO}
+ Split Vertically to the outside. \pageTransitionSplitVO\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionSplitVI}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionSplitVI}
+ Split Vertically to the inside. \pageTransitionSplitVI\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionBlindsH}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionBlindsH}
+ Horizontal Blinds. \pageTransitionBlindsH\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionBlindsV}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionBlindsV}
+ Vertical Blinds. \pageTransitionBlindsV
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionBoxO}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionBoxO}
+ Growing Box. \pageTransitionBoxO\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionBoxI}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionBoxI}
+ Shrinking Box. \pageTransitionBoxI\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\commandapp{pageTransitionWipe}{\carg{angle}}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionWipe}\mbox{}\\
+ Wipe from one edge of the page to the facing edge.
+
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \carg{angle} is a number between $0$ and $360$ which specifies the direction (in degrees) in which to wipe.
+
+ Apparently, only the values \afterstep{\pageTransitionWipe{0}}$0$, \step{\afterstep{\pageTransitionWipe{90}}$90$,}
+ \step{\afterstep{\pageTransitionWipe{180}}$180$,} \step{$270$ are supported.}%
+ }%
+ \pageTransitionWipe{270}\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionDissolve}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionDissolve}
+ Dissolve. \pageTransitionDissolve
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\commandapp{pageTransitionGlitter}{\carg{angle}}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionGlitter}\mbox{}\\
+ Glitter from one edge of the page to the facing edge.
+
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \carg{angle} is a number between $0$ and $360$ which specifies the direction (in degrees) in which to glitter.
+
+ Apparently, only the values \afterstep{\pageTransitionGlitter{0}}$0$,
+ \step{\afterstep{\pageTransitionGlitter{270}}$270$,} \step{$315$ are supported.}%
+ }%
+ \pageTransitionGlitter{315}\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionReplace}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionReplace}
+ Simple Replace (the default).
+ \end{description}
+
+ \pageTransitionReplace
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item The setting of the page transition is a property of the \emph{page}, i.~e.\ whatever page transition is in
+ effect when a page break occurs, will be assigned to the corresponding pdf page.
+
+ \item The setting of the page transition is undone when a group ends.
+
+ Make sure no \LaTeX{} environment is ended between a \macroname{pageTransition} setting and the next page break. In
+ particular, in \carg{stepcontents}, \macroname{afterstep} should be used (see example \ref{Sec:ExPic}).
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item Setting page transitions works well with \macroname{pause}. Here, \macroname{pause} acts as a page break,
+ i.\,e.\ a different page transition can be set before every occurrence of \macroname{pause}.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Automatic advancing of pages}\label{Sec:PageDuration}
+ If you have loaded a sufficiently new version of the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/hyperref.html}{\code{hyperref}} package (which allows to
+ set \code{pdfpageduration}), then the following command is defined which enables automatic advancing of \code{pdf}
+ pages.
+
+ \present[h]{\commandapp{pageDuration}{\carg{dur}}}\indexmacro{pageDuration}
+ causes pages to be advanced automatically every \carg{dur}
+ seconds. \carg{dur} should be a non-negative fixed-point number.
+
+ \pageDuration{2}\pause
+
+ Depending on the \code{pdf} viewer, this will happen only in full-screen mode.
+
+ See example \ref{Sec:ExFooling} for a demonstration of this effect.
+
+ \stopAdvancing
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The same restrictions as for \concept{page transitions} apply. In particular, the page duration setting is undone by
+ the end of a group, i.\,e.\ it is useless to set the page duration if a \LaTeX{} environment ends before the next page
+ break.
+
+ There is no `neutral' value for \carg{dur} ($0$ means advance as fast as possible). You can make automatic advancing
+ stop by calling \commandapp{pageDuration}{}. \code{texpower} offers the custom command
+ \begin{center}
+ \present[h]{\macroname{stopAdvancing}}\indexmacro{stopAdvancing}
+ \end{center}
+ to do this.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \section{Color management, color emphasis and highlighting}\label{Sec:ColorEmphasis}
+ \TeX Power tries to find out whether you are making a colored document. This is assumed if
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item the \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/color.html}{\code{color}} package has been
+ loaded before the \code{texpower} package or
+ \item a color-related option (see sections \ref{Sec:ColBgdOpt} and \ref{Sec:ColorOptions}) is given to the
+ \code{texpower} package (in this case, the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/color.html}{\code{color}} package is loaded
+ automatically).
+ \end{itemize}
+ If this is the case, \TeX Power installs an extensive color management scheme on top of the kernel of the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/color.html}{\code{color}} package.
+
+ In the following, some new concepts established by this management scheme are explained. Sections \ref{Sec:ColBgdOpt}
+ and \ref{Sec:ColorOptions} list options for color activation, section \ref{Sec:Colorcommands} lists some new
+ highlighting commands, and section \ref{Sec:Colors} gives the names and meaning of \TeX Power's predefined colors.
+
+ Note that parts of the kernel of the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/color.html}{\code{color}} package are overloaded for
+ special purposes (getting driver-independent representations of defined colors to be used by \macroname{colorbetween}
+ (\ref{Sec:MiscColorCommands}), for instance), so it is recommended to execute color definition commands like
+ \macroname{definecolor} \emph{after} the \code{texpower} package has been loaded (see also the next section on
+ \macroname{defineTPcolor}).
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Standard colors}\label{Sec:StdCols}
+ \TeX Power maintains a list of \concept{standard colors} which are recognized and handled by \TeX Power's color
+ management. Some commands like \macroname{dimcolors} (see section \ref{Sec:ColorVariants}) affect \emph{all} standard
+ colors. There are some predefined colors which are in this list from the outset (see section \ref{Sec:Colors}).
+
+ If colors defined by the user are to be recognized by \TeX Power, they have to be included in this list. The easiest
+ way is to use the following command for defining them.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \present{\commandapp{defineTPcolor}{\carg{name}\}\{\carg{model}\}\{\carg{def}}}
+ \indexmacro{defineTPcolor} acts like \macroname{definecolor}
+ \indexmacro{defineTPcolor} from the \code{color} package, but the color
+ \carg{name} is also added to the list of standard colors.
+
+ If you want to make a color a standard color which is defined elsewhere (by a document class, say), you can simply add
+ it to the list of standard colors with the command
+ \present{\commandapp{addTPcolor}{\carg{name}}}\indexmacro{addTPcolor}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Color sets}
+ Every standard color may be defined in one or several \concept{color sets}. There are two fundamentally different
+ types of color set:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[The current color set.] This contains the current definition of every standard color which is actually used at
+ the moment. Every standard color should be defined at least in the current color set. The current color set is not
+ distinguished by a special name.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[Named color sets.] These are `containers' for a full set of color definitions (for the standard colors) which
+ can be activated by respective commands (see below). The color sets are distinguished by their names. Color
+ definitions in a named color set are not currently available, they have to be made available by activating the named
+ color set.
+
+ There are four predefined color sets named \code{whitebg}\indexcode{whitebg},
+ \code{lightbg}\indexcode{lightbg}, \code{darkbg}\indexcode{darkbg},
+ \code{blackbg}\indexcode{blackbg}, each of which contains a full set of (predefined)
+ standard colors customized for a white, light, dark, black background
+ color, respectively.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ There are the following commands for manipulating color sets:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{usecolorset}{\carg{name}}}]\indexmacro{usecolorset}
+ Make the color set named \carg{name} the current color set.
+ \emph{All standard colors in the current color set which are also in color set \carg{name} are overwritten.}
+
+ The standard color \code{textcolor} is set automatically after activating color set \carg{name}.
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{dumpcolorset}{\carg{name}}}]\indexmacro{dumpcolorset}
+ Copy the definitions of \emph{all} standard colors in the
+ current color set into color set named \carg{name}. All standard colors in color set \carg{name} will be
+ overwritten.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ Using \commandapp{defineTPcolor}{\carg{name}} or \commandapp{definecolor}{\carg{name}} will define the color
+ \carg{name} in the \emph{current} color set. To define a color in color set \carg{cset}, use
+ \present{\commandapp[\carg{cset}]{defineTPcolor}{\carg{name}}}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Color sets are not really `\TeX{} objects', but are distinguished by color name suffixes. This means, a color
+ named \code{foo} is automatically in the current color set. Executing \commandapp[\carg{cset}]{defineTPcolor}{foo}
+ means executing \macroname{definecolor} for a specific color the name of which is a combination of \code{foo} and
+ \carg{cset}.
+
+ Consequently, \macroname{usecolorset} and \macroname{dumpcolorset} do not copy color sets as composite objects, but
+ simply all colors the names of which are generated from the list of standard colors.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item The command \commandapp{usecolorset}{\carg{name}} overwrites only those colors which have been defined in color
+ set \carg{name}. If a standard color is defined in the current color set, but not in color set \carg{name}, it is
+ preserved (but if \commandapp{dumpcolorset}{\carg{name}} is executed later, then it will also be copied back into
+ the color set \carg{name}).
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Color Background Options}\label{Sec:ColBgdOpt}
+ For activating the predefined color sets, there are shorthands
+ \macroname{whitebackground}\indexmacro{whitebackground},
+ \macroname{lightbackground}\indexmacro{lightbackground},
+ \macroname{darkbackground}\indexmacro{darkbackground},
+ \macroname{blackbackground}\indexmacro{blackbackground} which execute
+ \macroname{usecolorset} and additionally set the background color to its current value.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ When one of the following options is given, the respective command is executed automatically at the beginning of the
+ document.
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{option: \code{whitebackground} (default)}]
+ \indexpckopt{texpower}{whitebackground}
+ Set standard colors to match a white background color.
+
+ \item[\present{option: \code{lightbackground}}]
+ \indexpckopt{texpower}{lightbackground}
+ Set standard colors to match a light (but not white) background color.
+
+ \item[\present{option: \code{darkbackground}}]
+ \indexpckopt{texpower}{darkbackground}
+ Set standard colors to match a dark (but not black) background color.
+
+ \item[\present{option: \code{blackbackground}}]
+ \indexpckopt{texpower}{blackbackground}
+ Set standard colors to match a black background color.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Color variants}\label{Sec:ColorVariants}
+ In addition to color sets, \TeX Power implements a concept of \concept{color variant}. Currently, every color has three
+ variants: \concept{normal}, \concept{dimmed}, and \concept{enhanced}. The normal variant is what is usually seen, text
+ written in the dimmed variant appears ``faded into the background'' and text written in the enhanced variant appears
+ to ``stick out''.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ When switching variants, for every color one of two cases can occur:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item A \concept{designated color} for this variant has been defined.
+
+ For color \carg{color} the designated name of the \concept{dimmed}
+ \indexcode{dimmed color variant} variant is \code{d\carg{color}}, the designated
+ name of the \concept{enhanced}\indexcode{enhanced color variant} variant is
+ \code{e\carg{color}}.
+
+ If a color by that name exists at the time the variant is switched to, then variant switching is executed by
+ replacing color \carg{color} with the designated color.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item A \concept{designated color} for this variant has not been defined.
+
+ If a color by the designated name does not exist at the time a color variant is switched to, then variant switching
+ is executed by \concept{automatically} calculating the color variant from the original color.
+
+ The method for calculation depends on the variant:
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[dimmed.] The dimmed variant is calculated by \concept{interpolating} between \code{pagecolor} and the color to
+ be dimmed, using the \macroname{colorbetween} command (see \ref{Sec:MiscColorCommands}).
+
+ There is a command \present{\macroname{dimlevel}}\indexmacro{dimlevel}
+ which contains the parameter \carg{weight} given to \macroname{colorbetween}
+ (default: \code{0.7}). This default can be overridden by either redefining
+ \macroname{dimlevel} or giving an alternative \carg{weight} as an optional
+ argument to the color dimming command (see below).
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[enhanced.] The enhanced variant is calculated by \concept{extrapolating} the color to be enhanced (relative to
+ \code{pagecolor}).
+
+ There is a command \present{\macroname{enhancelevel}}\indexmacro{enhancelevel}
+ which gives the \concept{extent} of the extrapolation (default: \code{0.5}).
+ The same holds for overriding this default as for \macroname{dimlevel}.
+ \end{description}
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The following commands switch color variants:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\commandapp[\carg{level}]{dimcolor}{\carg{color}}}]
+ \indexmacro{dimcolor} switches color \carg{color} to the \concept{dimmed}
+ variant. If given, \carg{level} replaces the value of \macroname{dimlevel} in automatic calculation of the dimmed
+ variant (see above).
+
+ \item[\present{\code{\macroname{dimcolors}[\carg{level}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{dimcolors} switches \emph{all} standard colors to the \concept{dimmed}
+ variant. The optional argument \carg{level} acts as for \macroname{dimcolor}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp[\carg{level}]{enhancecolor}{\carg{color}}}]
+ \indexmacro{enhancecolor} switches color \carg{color} to the
+ \concept{enhanced} variant. If given, \carg{level} replaces the value of \macroname{enhancelevel} in automatic
+ calculation of the enhanced variant (see above).
+
+ \item[\present{\code{\macroname{enhancecolors}[\carg{level}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{enhancecolors} switches \emph{all} standard colors to the
+ \concept{enhanceed} variant. The optional argument \carg{level} acts as for \macroname{enhancecolor}.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item While automatic calculation of a \concept{dimmed} color will almost always yield the desired result
+ (interpolating between colors by calculating a weighted average is trivial), automatic calculation of an
+ \concept{enhanced} color by `extrapolating' is tricky at best and will often lead to unsatisfactory results. This is
+ because the idea of making a color `stronger' is very hard to formulate numerically.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The following effects of the current algorithm should be kept in mind:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item if the background color is light, enhancing a color will make it darker;
+ \item if the background color is dark, enhancing a color will make it lighter;
+ \item sometimes, the numerical values describing an enhanced color have to be \concept{bounded} to avoid exceeding
+ the allowed range, diminishing the enhancing effect. For instance, if the background color is black and the color
+ to be enhanced is a `full-powered' yellow, there is no way of enhancing it by simple numeric calculation.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ As a conclusion, for best results it is recommended to provide custom \code{e} variants of colors to be enhanced. By
+ default, \TeX Power does not provide dedicated enhanced colors, but the file \code{tpsettings.cfg} contains complete
+ sets of enhanced variants for the standard colors in the different color sets, which you can uncomment and
+ experiment with as convenient.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item Currently, switching to a different color variant is done by simply overwriting the current definitions of all
+ standard colors. This means
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item there is no way of `undimming' a color once it has been dimmed,
+ \item a dimmed color can not be enhanced and vice versa.
+ \end{itemize}
+ Maybe this will be solved in a slightly more clever way in subsequent releases of \TeX Power.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ Hence, it is recommended to
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item restrict the \concept{scope} of a global variant switching command like \macroname{dimcolors},
+ \macroname{enhancecolors} or \macroname{dstep} by enlcosing it into a \LaTeX{} group (like \code{\{\dots\}}) or
+ \item use \macroname{dumpcolorset} before the command to save the current definitions of all colors, to be restored
+ with \macroname{usecolorset}.
+
+ At the very beginning of a \macroname{stepwise} command, \TeX Power executes \commandapp{dumpcolorset}{stwcolors},
+ so you can restore the colors anywhere in the argument of \macroname{stepwise} by saying
+ \commandapp{usecolorset}{stwcolors}.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item Some rudimentary attempts are made to keep track of which color is in what variant, to the effect that
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item a color which is not in the normal variant will neither be dimmed nor enhanced;
+ \item when \macroname{usecolorset} overwrites a color with its normal variant, this is registered.
+ \end{itemize}
+ Still, it is easy to get in trouble by mixing variant changes with color set changes (say, if not all standard
+ colors are defined in a color set, or if a color set is dumped when not all colors are in normal variant), so it is
+ recommended not to use or dump color sets when outside the normal variant (unless for special applications like
+ undoing a variant change by \commandapp{usecolorset}{stwcolors}).
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Miscellaneous color management commands}\label{Sec:MiscColorCommands}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\commandapp[\carg{tset}]{replacecolor}{\carg{tcolor}\}[\carg{sset}]\{\carg{scolor}}}]
+ \indexmacro{} makes
+ \carg{tcolor} have the same definition as \carg{scolor} (if \carg{scolor} is defined at all), where \carg{tcolor}
+ and \carg{scolor} are color names as given in the first argument of \macroname{definecolor}. If (one of)
+ \carg{tset} and \carg{sset} are given, the respective color is taken from the respective color set, otherwise from
+ the current color set.
+
+ If \carg{scolor} is not defined (in color set \carg{sset}), \carg{tcolor} is left alone.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp[\carg{weight}]{colorbetween}{\carg{src1}\}\{\carg{src2}\}\{\carg{target}}}]
+ \indexmacro{colorbetween} calculates a
+ `weighted average' between two colors. \carg{src1} and \carg{src2} are the names of the two colors. \carg{weight}
+ (default: $0.5$) is a fixed-point number between $0$ and $1$ giving the `weight' for the interpolation between
+ \carg{src1} and \carg{src2}. \carg{target} is the name to be given to the resulting mixed color.
+
+ If \carg{weight} is $1$, then \carg{target} will be identical to \carg{src1} (up to color model conversions, see
+ below), if \carg{weight} is $0$, then \carg{target} will be identical to \carg{src2}, if \carg{weight} is $0.5$
+ (default), then \carg{target} will be exactly in the middle between \carg{src1} and \carg{src2}.
+
+ \macroname{colorbetween} supports the following color models: \code{rgb}, \code{RGB}, \code{gray}, \code{cmyk},
+ \code{hsb}. If both colors are of the same model, the resulting color is also of the respective model. If
+ \carg{src1} and \carg{src2} are from \emph{different} models, then \carg{target} will \emph{always} be an \code{rgb}
+ color. The only exception is the \code{hsb} color model: As I don't know how to convert \code{hsb} to \code{rgb},
+ mixing \code{hsb} with another color model will always raise an error.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{mkfactor}{\carg{expr}\}\{\carg{macroname}}}]
+ \indexmacro{mkfactor} is a helper command for automatically
+ generating the fixed point numbers between $0$ and $1$ which are employed by the color calculation commands.
+ \carg{expr} can be any expression which can stand behind \code{*} in expressions allowed by the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/calc.html}{\code{calc}} package (for instance:
+ \code{\commandapp{value}{counter}/\commandapp{value}{maxcounter}} or \macroname{ratio} or whatever).
+ \carg{macroname} should be a valid macro name. \carg{expr} is converted into a fixed-point representation which is
+ then assigned to \carg{macroname}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\code{\macroname{vanishcolors}[\carg{color}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{vanishcolors} is similar to the color variant command
+ \macroname{dimcolors}, but instead of dimming colors, all standard colors are replaced by a single color given by
+ the new command \present{\macroname{vanishcolor}} (default: \code{pagecolor}). Hence, the result of calling
+ \macroname{vanishcolors} should be that all text vanishes, as it is written in the background color (this doesn't
+ work with structured backgrounds, of course).
+
+ For getting a color different from the default \code{pagecolor}, you can either redefinine \macroname{vanishcolor}
+ or give an alternative \carg{color} as an optional argument to \macroname{vanishcolors}.
+
+ There is no dedicated command for making a single color vanish. To achieve this, use
+ \commandapp{replacecolor}{\carg{color}\}\{\macroname{vanishcolor}}.
+ \end{description}
+
+
+ \subsection{Color Emphasis and Highlighting}\label{Sec:ColorOptions}
+ \code{texpower} offers some support for text emphasis and highlighting with colors (instead of, say, font
+ changes). These features are enabled by the following options:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{option: \code{coloremph}}]\indexpckopt{texpower}{coloremph}
+ Make \macroname{em} and \macroname{emph} switch colors instead of fonts.
+
+ \item[\present{option: \code{colormath}}]\indexpckopt{texpower}{colormath}
+ Color all mathematical formulae.
+
+ \item[\present{option: \code{colorhighlight}}]\indexpckopt{texpower}{colorhighlight}
+ Make new highlighting and emphasis commands defined by \code{texpower}
+ use colors.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item You need the \code{color} package to use any of the color features.
+
+ \item To implement the options \code{coloremph} and \code{colormath}, it is neccessary to redefine some \LaTeX{}
+ internals. This can lead to problems and incompatibilities with other packages. Use with caution.
+
+ \item If the \code{colorhighlight} option is \emph{not} given, new highlighting and emphasis commands defined by
+ \code{texpower} are realized otherwise. Sometimes, however, there is no good alternative to colors, so different
+ emphasis commands can become disabled or indistinguishable.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item Because of font changes, emphasized or highlighted text can have different dimensions whether or not the options
+ \code{coloremph}, \code{colormath}, and \code{colorhighlight} are set. Prepare for different line and page breaks
+ when changing one of these options.
+
+ \item Color emphasis and highlighting makes use of the predefined standard colors described in section
+ \ref{Sec:Colors}. See sections \ref{Sec:StdCols} to \ref{Sec:ColBgdOpt} for further information on standard colors,
+ color sets, and customization.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{New commands for emphasis and highlighting elements}\label{Sec:Colorcommands}
+ Some things like setting the page or text color, making emphasised text or math colored are done automatically when
+ the respective options are set. There are some additional new commands for creating emphasis and highlighting
+ elements.
+
+ \minisec{Concerning math:}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{origmath}}]\indexmacro{origmath}
+ When the \code{colormath} option is given, \emph{everything} which appears in
+ math mode is colored accordingly. Sometimes, however, math mode is used for something besides mathematical formulae.
+ Some \LaTeX{} commands which internally use math mode (like \code{tabular} or \macroname{textsuperscript}) are
+ redefined accordingly when the \code{colormath} option is given (this is a potential source of trouble; beware of
+ problems\dots).
+
+ If you need to use math mode for something which is not to be colored (like a symbol for \code{itemize}), you can
+ use the \macroname{origmath} command which works exactly like \macroname{ensuremath} but doesn't color its argument.
+ If a nested use of math mode should occur in the argument of \macroname{origmath}, it will again be colored.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Documenting \TeX{} code:}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{code}}]\indexmacro{code}
+ Simple command for typesetting \code{code} (like shell commands).
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{macroname}}]\indexmacro{macroname}
+ For \macroname{macro names}. Like \macroname{code}, but with a \macroname{} in
+ front.
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp[\carg{opt arg}]{commandapp}{\carg{command}\}\{\carg{arg}}}]
+ \indexmacro{commandapp} For \TeX{} commands. \carg{arg}
+ stands for the command argument, \carg{opt arg} for an optional argument.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{carg}}]\indexmacro{carg}
+ For \carg{macro arguments}.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Additional emphasis commands:}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{underl}}]\indexmacro{underl}
+ Additional \underl{emphasis} command. Can be used like \macroname{emph}. Defaults
+ to \textbf{bold face} if the \code{colorhighlight} option is not given.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{concept}}]\indexmacro{concept}
+ Additional \concept{emphasis} command, especially for new concepts. Can be
+ augmented by things like automatic index entry creation. Also defaults to \textbf{bold face} if the
+ \code{colorhighlight} option is not given.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{inactive}}]\indexmacro{inactive}
+ Additional \inactive{emphasis} command, this time for `de-emphasising'. There is
+ no sensible default if the \code{colorhighlight} option is not given, as base \LaTeX{} doesn't offer an appropriate
+ font. In this case, \macroname{inactive} defaults to \macroname{monochromeinactive}, which does nothing.
+
+ You can (re-)define \macroname{monochromeinactive} to provide some sensible behaviour in the absence of colors, for
+ instance striking out if you're using the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} package.
+ \end{description}
+
+
+ \minisec{Color Highlighting:}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{present}}]\indexmacro{present}
+ Highlighting command which puts its argument into a \present{box with colored
+ background}. Defaults to an \fbox{\macroname{fbox}} if the \code{colorhighlight} option is not given.
+
+ See section \ref{Sec:displaycustom} for some further highlighting commands.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Predefined standard colors}\label{Sec:Colors}
+ In previous subsections, it has been mentioned that \TeX Power predefines some standard colors which have appropriate
+ values in the predefined color sets \code{whitebg}, \code{lightbg}, \code{darkbg}, and \code{blackbg} (see sections
+ \ref{Sec:StdCols} to \ref{Sec:ColBgdOpt} for further information on standard colors, color sets, and customization).
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{color: \code{pagecolor}}]\indexcode{pagecolor}
+ Background color of the page. Is set automatically at the beginning of the
+ document if color management is active.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{textcolor}}]\indexcode{textcolor}
+ Color of normal text. Is set automatically at the beginning of the
+ document if color management is active.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{emcolor}}]\indexcode{emcolor}
+ Color used for \emph{emphasis} if the \code{coloremph} option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{altemcolor}}]\indexcode{altemcolor}
+ Color used \emph{for \emph{double} emphasis} if the \code{coloremph} option
+ is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{mathcolor}}]\indexcode{mathcolor}
+ Color used for math $a^2+b^2=c^2$ if the \code{colormath} option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{codecolor}}]\indexcode{codecolor}
+ Color used by the \macroname{code} command if the \code{colorhighlight}
+ option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{underlcolor}}]\indexcode{underlcolor}
+ Color used by the \underl{\macroname{underl} command} if the
+ \code{colorhighlight} option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{conceptcolor}}]\indexcode{conceptcolor}
+ Color used by the \concept{\macroname{concept} command} if the
+ \code{colorhighlight} option is set.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{inactivecolor}}]\indexcode{inactivecolor}
+ Color used by the \inactive{\macroname{inactive} command} if the
+ \code{colorhighlight} option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{presentcolor}}]\indexcode{presentcolor}
+ Color used as background color by the \present{\macroname{present}}
+ command if the \code{colorhighlight} option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{highlightcolor}}]\indexcode{highlightcolor}
+ Color used as background color by the
+ \highlightboxed{\macroname{highlightboxed}} and \macroname{highlighttext} commands (see section
+ \ref{Sec:displaycustom}) if the \code{colorhighlight} option is set.
+ \end{description}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}
+{%
+ \newslide
+
+ \whitebackground
+
+ \minisec{Color tables}
+
+ \newlength{\widthfirstcol}
+ \settowidth{\widthfirstcol}{\textbf{\footnotesize white background}}
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{|p{\widthfirstcol}*{3}{|p{2cm}}|}
+ \cline{2-4}
+ \multicolumn{1}{l|}{\textbf{\footnotesize white background}}&standard&dimmed&enhanced\\\hline
+ \code{textcolor}&\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{emcolor}&\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{altemcolor}&\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{mathcolor}&\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{codecolor}&\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{underlcolor}&\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{conceptcolor}&\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{inactivecolor}&\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{presentcolor}&\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{highlightcolor}&\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \lightbackground
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{|p{\widthfirstcol}*{3}{|p{2cm}}|}
+ \cline{2-4}
+ \multicolumn{1}{l|}{\textbf{\footnotesize light background}}&standard&dimmed&enhanced\\\hline
+ \code{textcolor}&\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{emcolor}&\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{altemcolor}&\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{mathcolor}&\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{codecolor}&\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{underlcolor}&\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{conceptcolor}&\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{inactivecolor}&\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{presentcolor}&\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{highlightcolor}&\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \darkbackground
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{|p{\widthfirstcol}*{3}{|p{2cm}}|}
+ \cline{2-4}
+ \multicolumn{1}{l|}{\textbf{\footnotesize dark background}}&standard&dimmed&enhanced\\\hline
+ \code{textcolor}&\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{emcolor}&\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{altemcolor}&\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{mathcolor}&\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{codecolor}&\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{underlcolor}&\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{conceptcolor}&\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{inactivecolor}&\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{presentcolor}&\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{highlightcolor}&\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \blackbackground
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{|p{\widthfirstcol}*{3}{|p{2cm}}|}
+ \cline{2-4}
+ \multicolumn{1}{l|}{\textbf{\footnotesize black background}}&standard&dimmed&enhanced\\\hline
+ \code{textcolor}&\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{emcolor}&\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{altemcolor}&\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{mathcolor}&\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{codecolor}&\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{underlcolor}&\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{conceptcolor}&\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{inactivecolor}&\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{presentcolor}&\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{highlightcolor}&\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+}{}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}{\lightbackground}{}
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \section{Structured page backgrounds and panels}\label{Sec:PageBackPanel}
+ \subsection{Structured page backgrounds}
+
+ \present{\commandapp[\carg{options}]{backgroundstyle}{\carg{style}}}
+ \indexmacro{backgroundstyle}
+ is the central command for structured page backgrounds. It works like
+ \macroname{pagestyle} and other commands of this type. This means
+ \carg{style} is a symbolic name specifying the general method by which the
+ page background is constructed.
+
+ The detailed construction is influenced by parameters which can be set in
+ \carg{options}. If given, the optional parameter \carg{options} should
+ contain a list of settings in ``keyval'' manner. The keyval method
+ % (which is used by the \includegraphics command from the graphicx package,
+ %for instance)
+ is based on associating a symbolic name with every parameter. \carg{options}
+ is then a comma-separated list of parameter settings of the form
+ \carg{name}=\carg{value}, where \carg{name} is the symbolic name of the
+ parameter to be set and \carg{value} is the value it is to be set to.
+
+ Not every \carg{style} evaluates every parameter. In the following, a
+ description of all styles, together with lists of the parameters employed, is
+ given. It is followed by a list of all parameters. Note that some parameter
+ names internally access the same parameter. For instance, parameters
+ \code{startcolor} and \code{startcolordef} both set the start color of a color
+ gradient. In case of conflict, the last setting in the list \carg{options}
+ will prevail. It is noted in the list of parameters which other parameters
+ are overwritten.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \carg{style} may have one of the following values:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{none}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{none}%
+ No background. This means the page background is whatever it would be if
+ \macroname{backgroundstyle} wasn't used at all (for instance, a plain area
+ of color pagecolor if one of the color options has been given).
+
+ Parameters used: none.
+
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{plain}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{plain}%
+ Plain background. This means the page background is whatever it would be if
+ \macroname{backgroundstyle} wasn't used at all (as for no background). In
+ addition to background style \code{none}, the background style \code{plain}
+ does produce panel backgrounds. The colors and dimensions of a \code{top
+ panel}, \code{bottom panel}, \code{left panel}, and \code{right panel} can
+ be specified.
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Parameters used: \code{hpanels}, \code{autopanels}, \code{toppanelcolor},
+ \code{bottompanelcolor}, \code{leftpanelcolor}, \code{rightpanelcolor},
+ \code{toppanelcolordef}, \code{bottompanelcolordef}, \code{leftpanelcolordef},
+ \code{rightpanelcolordef}, \code{toppanelheight}, \code{bottompanelheight},
+ \code{leftpanelwidth}, \code{rightpanelwidth}.
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{vgradient}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{vgradient}%
+ Vertical gradient. The page background is constructed using the
+ \macroname{vgradrule}\indexmacro{vgradrule} command. In addition to the
+ usual parameters of gradient rules, the vgradient background style allows
+ to leave space for headers, footers, or panels. The colors and dimensions
+ of a \code{top panel}, \code{bottom panel}, \code{left panel}, and
+ \code{right panel} can be specified. The gradient rule fills the
+ rectangular space left between the specified panels.
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Parameters used: \code{stripes}, \code{firstgradprogression},
+ \code{startcolor}, \code{startcolordef}, \code{endcolor}, \code{endcolordef}
+ in addition to the parameters used for style \code{plain}.
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{hgradient}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{hgradient}%
+ Horizontal gradient. The page background is constructed using the
+ \macroname{hgradrule}\indexmacro{hgradrule} command. See the description of
+ \macroname{vgradient} concerning panels.
+
+ Parameters used: See list for style \code{vgradient}.
+
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{doublevgradient}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{doublevgradient}%
+ Double vertical gradient. The page background is constructed using the
+ \macroname{dblvgradrule}\indexmacro{dblvgradrule} command. See the
+ description of \macroname{vgradient} concerning panels.
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Parameters used: \code{gradmidpoint}, \code{secondgradprogression},
+ \code{midcolor}, \code{midcolordef} in addition to the parameters used for
+ style \code{vgradient} (and \code{plain}).
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{doublehgradient}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{doublehgradient}%
+ Double horizontal gradient. The page background is constructed using the
+ \macroname{dblhgradrule}\indexmacro{dblhgradrule} command. See the description of
+ \macroname{vgradient} concerning panels.
+
+ Parameters used: See list for \code{doublevgradient}.
+
+ \end{description}
+ Now, a list of all parameters and their meaning. In the following,
+ \begin{itemize}\setlength{\itemsep}{0cm}
+ \item[\carg{n}] denotes a (calc expression for a) nonnegative integer
+ \item[\carg{i}] denotes a (calc expression for an) integer
+ \item[\carg{r}] denotes a fixed-point number
+ \item[\carg{l}] denotes a (calc expression for a) length
+ \item[\carg{c}] denotes the name of a defined color
+ \item[\carg{cm}] denotes a valid color model name (in the sense of the color
+ package)
+ \item[\carg{cd}] denotes a valid color definition (in the sense of the color
+ package) wrt a given \carg{cm} parameter
+ \item[\carg{t}] denotes a `truth value' in the sense of the ifthen package:
+ either true or false. As usual for keyval, if =\carg{t} is omitted, the
+ default true is assumed.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{stripes=}\carg{n}}] Set the \carg{stripes}
+ parameter of gradient rules to \carg{n}.\\
+ Default: \macroname{bgndstripes}. \\
+ Used by: \code{vgradient}, \code{hgradient}, \code{doublevgradient},
+ \code{doublehgradient}.
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{gradmidpoint=}\carg{r}}] Set the \carg{midpoint}
+ parameter of double gradient rules to \carg{r}.\\
+ Default: \macroname{bgndgradmidpoint}\\
+ Used by: doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{firstgradprogression=}\carg{i}}]
+ Set the first gradient progression of gradient rules to \carg{i}.\\
+ Default: \macroname{bgndfirstgradprogression}\\
+ Used by: vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{secondgradprogression=}\carg{i}}]
+ Set the second gradient progression of double gradient rules to \carg{i}.\\
+ Default: \macroname{bgndsecondgradprogression}\\
+ Used by: doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{startcolor=}\carg{c}}]
+ Set the \carg{startcolor} parameter of gradient rules to \carg{c}.\\
+ Default: If neither startcolor nor startcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndstartcolor is used as startcolor.\\
+ Used by: vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: startcolordef
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{startcolordef=\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}}]
+ Set the \carg{startcolor} parameter of gradient rules to color foo, which
+ is obtained by \macroname{definecolor\{foo\}\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}.
+ Note that the two pairs of curly braces are mandatory.\\
+ Default: If neither startcolor nor startcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndstartcolor is used as startcolor.\\
+ Used by: vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: startcolor
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{endcolor=}\carg{c}}]
+ Set the \carg{endcolor} parameter of gradient rules to \carg{c}.\\
+ Default: If neither endcolor nor endcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndendcolor is used as endcolor.\\
+ Used by: vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: endcolordef
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{endcolordef=\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}}]
+ Set the \carg{endcolor} parameter of gradient rules to color foo, which
+ is obtained by \macroname{definecolor\{foo\}\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}.
+ Note that the two pairs of curly braces are mandatory.\\
+ Default: If neither endcolor nor endcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndendcolor is used as endcolor.\\
+ Used by: vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: endcolor
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{midcolor=}\carg{c}}]
+ Set the \carg{midcolor} parameter of double gradient rules to \carg{c}.\\
+ Default: If neither midcolor nor midcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndmidcolor is used as midcolor.\\
+ Used by: doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: midcolordef
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{midcolordef=\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}}]
+ Set the \carg{midcolor} parameter of double gradient rules to color foo,
+ which is obtained by \macroname{definecolor\{foo\}\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}.
+ Note that the two pairs of curly braces are mandatory.\\
+ Default: If neither midcolor nor midcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndmidcolor is used as midcolor.\\
+ Used by: doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: midcolor
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{hpanels=}\carg{t}}]
+ Specifies the `direction' of panels produced. hpanels=true means the top
+ and bottom panel span the full width of the screen. In the space left in
+ the middle, the left panel, the background itself, and the right panel are
+ displayed. hpanels=false means the left and right panel span the full
+ height of the screen. In the space left in the middle, the top panel,
+ the background itself, and the bottom panel are
+ displayed.\\
+ Default: hpanels=true is the default for plain, hgradient and
+ doublehgradient. hpanels=false is the default for vgradient and
+ doublevgradient.\\
+ Used by: plain, vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{autopanels=}\carg{t}}]
+ Specifies whether the default values of the parameters toppanelheight,
+ bottompanelheight, leftpanelwidth, rightpanelwidth should be calculated
+ automatically from the contents of declared panels. The automatism used
+ is analogous to that of \macroname{DeclarePanel*}. Note that for panel
+ arrangement, both the width and the height of all declared panels are
+ overwritten. If you don't want this, calculate the panel parameters
+ yourself and set autopanels=false. In this case, the current panel
+ dimensions of declared panels are used as defaults for toppanelheight,
+ bottompanelheight, leftpanelwidth, rightpanelwidth.\\
+ Default: true.\\
+ Used by: plain, vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{\carg{pos}panelheight=}\carg{l}}]
+ Set the height/width of the space left for the top / bottom / left / right
+ panel to \carg{l}. Note that the remaining dimensions of panels, for
+ instance the width of the top panel, are always calculated automatically,
+ depending on the setting of the hpanels parameter.\\
+ Default: If a respective panel has been defined using
+ \macroname{DeclarePanel}, the default used depends on the setting of the
+ autopanels parameter. If autopanels=true, the correct dimension is
+ calculated from the contents of the panel. The respective one of
+ \macroname{toppanelheight}, \macroname{bottompanelheight},
+ \macroname{leftpanelwidth}, \macroname{rightpanelwidth} is overwritten
+ with the result. If autopanels=false, then the respective setting of
+ \macroname{toppanelheight}, \macroname{bottompanelheight},
+ \macroname{leftpanelwidth}, \macroname{rightpanelwidth} is taken as the
+ default. If a panel has not been declared, the appropriate one of
+ \macroname{bgndtoppanelheight}, \macroname{bgndbottompanelheight},
+ \macroname{bgndleftpanelwidth}, \macroname{bgndrightpanelwidth} is used
+ as default. \\
+ Used by: plain, vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{\carg{pos}panelcolor=}\carg{c}}]
+ Set the color of the space left for the top / bottom / left / right panel
+ to \carg{c}.\\
+ Default: The standard colors toppanelcolor, bottompanelcolor, leftpanelcolor,
+ rightpanelcolor are used as defaults.\\
+ Used by: plain, vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: toppanelcolordef bottompanelcolordef leftpanelcolordef
+ rightpanelcolordef
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{\carg{pos}panelcolordef=\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}}]
+ Set the color of the space left for the top / bottom / left / right panel
+ to color foo, which is obtained by
+ \macroname{definecolor\{foo\}\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}.
+ Note that the two pairs of curly braces are mandatory. \\
+ Default: See the description of top/bottom/left/rightpanelcolor.\\
+ Used by: plain, vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: toppanelcolor bottompanelcolor leftpanelcolor rightpanelcolor
+
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Panel-specific user level commands}
+ If you're using a package that has it own panel (as
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfscreen.html}%
+ {\code{pdfscreen}}) don't even consider using the following.
+
+ \present{\commandapp[\carg{name}]{DeclarePanel}{\carg{pos}\}\{\carg{contents}}}
+ \indexmacro{DeclarePanel}
+ declares the contents \carg{contents} of the panel at position \carg{pos}.
+ Afterwards, on every page the panel contents are set in a parbox of
+ dimensions and position specified by \carg{pos}panelwidth,
+ \carg{pos}panelheight, \macroname{panelmargin} and \carg{pos}panelshift for
+ top and bottom panels and \carg{pos}panelraise for left and right panels. The
+ parbox is constructed anew on every page, so all changes influencing panel
+ contents or parameters (like a \macroname{thepage} in the panel contents) are
+ respected.
+
+ The panel contents are set in color \carg{pos}paneltextcolor. There is
+ another standard color \carg{pos}panelcolor, which is however not activated by
+ \macroname{DeclarePanel} but by selecting an appropriate background style.
+
+ Note that \macroname{backgroundstyle} must be called after the panel
+ declaration.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ Pages are constructed as follows: first the page background, then
+ the panels, and then the page contents. \emph{Hence, panels overwrite the background
+ and the page contents overwrite the panels.} The user is supposed to make sure
+ themselves that there is enough space left on the page for the panels
+ (document class specific settings). The panel declaration is global. A panel
+ can be `undeclared' by using \macroname{DeclarePanel\{\carg{pos}\}\{\}}.
+
+ If the optional argument \carg{name} is given, the panel contents and
+ (calculated) size will also be stored under the given name, to be restored
+ later with \macroname{restorepanels}. This is nice for switching between
+ different sets of panels.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ For an example look at the files \code{simplepanel.tex} and \code{panelexample.tex}.
+ A very simple example follows:
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+\DeclarePanel{left}{%
+ \textsf{Your Name}
+
+ \vfill
+
+ \button{\Acrobatmenu{PrevPage}}{Back}
+ \button{\Acrobatmenu{NextPage}}{Next} }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ There is a starred version which will (try to) automatically calculate the
+ \indexmacro{DeclarePanel*} `flexible' dimension of each panel. For top and
+ bottom panels this is the height, for left and right panels this is the width.
+ Make sure the panel contents are `valid' at the time \macroname{DeclarePanel*}
+ is called so the calculation can be carried out in a meaningful way.
+
+ While the automatic calculation of the height of top and bottom panels is
+ trivial (using \macroname{settoheight}), there is a sophisticated procedure
+ for calculating a `good' width for the parbox containing the panel. Owing to
+ limitations set by TeX, there are certain limits to the sophistication of the
+ procedure.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ For instance, any `whatsits' (specials (like color changes), file
+ accesses (like \macroname{label}), or hyper anchors)
+ or rules which are inserted directly in the vertical list of the parbox
+ `block' the analysis, so the procedure can't `see' past them (starting at the
+ bottom of the box) when analysing the contents of the parbox.
+
+ The user should make sure such items are set in horizontal mode (by using
+ \macroname{leavevmode} or enclosing stuff in boxes). Furthermore, only
+ overfull and underfull hboxes which occur while setting the parbox are
+ considered when judging which width is `best'. This will reliably make the
+ width large enough to contain `wide' objects like tabulars, logos and buttons,
+ but might not give optimal results for justified text. vboxes occurring
+ directly in the vbox are ignored.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ Note further that hboxes with fixed width
+ (made by \macroname{hbox} to...) which occur directly in the vbox may disturb
+ the procedure, because the fixed width cannot be recovered. These hboxes will
+ be reformatted with the width of the vbox, generating an extremely large
+ badness, unsettling the calculation of maximum badness. To avoid this such
+ hboxes should be either contained in a vbox or set in horizontal mode with
+ appropriate glue at the end.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Navigation buttons}
+ The following provides only the very basics for navigation buttons. If you're
+ using a package that has it's own naviagtion buttons (as
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfscreen.html}%
+ {\code{pdfscreen}}) don't even consider using the following.
+
+ \present{\macroname{button\{\carg{navcommand}\}\{\carg{text}\}}}
+ \indexmacro{button}
+ creates a button labelled \carg{text} which executes \carg{navcommand} when
+ pressed. The command takes four optional arguments (left out above):
+ \carg{width}, \carg{height}, \carg{depth} and \carg{alignment} in that order.
+ \carg{navcommand} can be for instance \commandapp{Acrobatmenu}{\carg{command}} or
+ \commandapp{hyperlink}{\carg{target}} (note that \carg{navcommand} should take
+ one (more) argument specifying the sensitive area which is provided by
+ \macroname{button}). If given, the optional parameters \carg{width}, \carg{height}, and
+ \carg{depth} give the width, height and depth, respectively, of the framed
+ area comprising the button (excluding the shadow, but including the
+ frame). Default are the `real' width, height and depth, respectively, of
+ \carg{text}, plus allowance for the frame. If given, the optional parameter
+ \carg{alignment} (one of l,c,r) gives the alignment of \carg{text} inside the
+ button box (makes sense only if \carg{width} is given).
+
+ The button appearence is defined by some configurable button parameters:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{buttonsep}}]
+ \indexmacro{buttonsep}
+ Space between button label and border. (Default: \macroname{fboxsep})
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{buttonrule}}]
+ \indexmacro{buttonrule}
+ Width of button frame. (Default: \code{0pt})
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{buttonshadowhshift}}]
+ \indexmacro{buttonshadowhshift}
+ Horizontal displacement of button shadow. (Default: 0.3\macroname{fboxsep})
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{buttonshadowvshift}}]
+ \indexmacro{buttonshadowvshift}
+ Vertical displacement of button shadow. (Default: 0.3\macroname{fboxsep})
+ \end{description}
+
+ A list of predefined buttons follows:
+ \begin{description}
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{backpagebutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{backpagebutton}
+ Last subpage of previous page.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{backstepbutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{backstepbutton}
+ Previous step.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{gobackbutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{gobackbutton}
+ `Undo action' (go back to whatever was before last action).
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{nextstepbutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{nextstepbutton}
+ Next step.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{nextpagebutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{nextpagebutton}
+ First subpage of next page.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{nextfullpagebutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{nextfullpagebutton}
+ Last subpage of next page.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{fullscreenbutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{fullscreenbutton}
+ Toggle fullscreen mode.
+
+ \end{description}
+
+\clearpage
+\printindex
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `fulldemo.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/hilitexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/hilitexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2cd8be37ed5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/hilitexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `hilitexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `hilitexample,hilitexample-src,end')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{hilitexample.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: hilitexample.tex
+%
+% Highlighting example for the package texpower.sty.
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be processed with
+%
+% dvips -Ppdf -j0 hilitexample
+%
+% afterwards processing the resulting ps file with
+%
+% distill hilitexample.ps
+%
+% (The syntax is for a unix system with tetex 1.0 and distiller 3. Modify appropriately for other configurations.)
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 27, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+% Added demo for \highlighttext.
+% Itemize demo now checks whether color is activated.
+%
+% v0.0.3 May 26, 2000: Added an example for how to make the text in a paragraph `stand out' from the background.
+%
+% v0.0.4 Jun 07, 2000: Now using \hidedimmed and \highlightenhanced.
+%
+% v0.0.5 Jul 19, 2000: stepitemize example rewritten for TeXPower v0.0.8g.
+%
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Use slifonts.
+
+\RequirePackage{tpslifonts}
+
+% Input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower highlighting example}}
+
+% The package soul is needed for \highlighttext to work.
+
+\usepackage{soul}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: Highlighting Text}\label{Sec:Exhl}
+% The default for \step's which are not yet `active' is to be `invisible'. In preceding examples, we have redefined
+% internal macros like \hidestepcontents or \activatestep to achieve special `highlighting' effects.
+% Here, we demonstrate how make text `stand out' from the background incrementally without having it appear from thin
+% air.
+
+% The first example demonstrates how to make \step its argument `stand out' instead of making it appear `out of
+% nowhere'.
+
+\makeatletter
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Can we use colors?
+{% Yes. In this case \step should change colors from `dimmed' to `active'.
+
+ % The command \hidedimmed switches colors to `dimmed', the command \highlightenhanced switches colors to `enhanced'.
+ \liststepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidedimmed\let\activatestep=\highlightenhanced]
+ {%
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{quote}
+ \Large%
+ \step{Instead of making things appear out of `thin air',} \step{we can also make them appear `out of the
+ background'} \step{by incrementally changing color from \concept{inactive}} \step{to \concept{active}.}
+ \step{This also works with \emph{color emphasis}} \step{and \concept{math coloring}: $a=b^2$.}
+ \end{quote}
+ \vspace*{\fill}\vspace*{\fill}
+ }%
+ }
+{% No. In this case we have to `handwave' using the soul package.
+ % Instead of hiding its argument, the new command \myhide just changes the font size (maintaining the overall text
+ % length though).
+ \def\myhide
+ {%
+ \leavevmode%
+ \SOUL@setup
+ \def\SOUL@everytoken{\makebox[\widthof{\the\SOUL@token}][s]{\rule[\depthof{\the\SOUL@token}*-1]{0pt}{\depthof{\the\SOUL@token}+\heightof{\the\SOUL@token}}\hrulefill\tiny\the\SOUL@token\hrulefill}\SOUL@setkern\SOUL@charkern}%
+ \SOUL@%
+ }
+
+ \liststepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\myhide\setcounter{firststep}{0}]
+ {%
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{quote}
+ \LARGE%
+ \step{Instead of making things appear out of `thin air',} \step{we can also make them appear `out of the
+ background'} \step{incrementally.}
+ \end{quote}
+ \vspace*{\fill}\vspace*{\fill}
+ }%
+ }
+\makeatother
+
+\newslide
+
+% Next, it is demonstrated how we can `flip through' an itemize environment by just highlighting the items in turn
+% instead of making them appear one by one.
+%
+% Define a macro \mystep which implements the highlighting effect.
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}% Can we use colors?
+{% Yes. In this case highlighting is implemented by switching color.
+ \def\mystep% Note that \mystep takes no argument. It just changes the way the next item is displayed.
+ {%
+ \usecolorset{stwcolors}% Restore the undimmed colors valid at the beginning of \stepwise.
+ \dstep[][\boolean{firstactivation}]% \dstep switches colors. The optional argument makes it appear only once.
+ }%
+}
+{% No. In this case highlighting is implemented by redefining \labelitemi.
+ \def\mystep
+ {%
+ \switch[][\boolean{firstactivation}]% The optional arguments make \switch act only once.
+ {\def\labelitemi{\origmath{\gg}}}{\def\labelitemi{\origmath{\cdot}}}%
+ }%
+ }
+
+% We define a custom itemize environment which automatically adds calls to \mystep:
+\newenvironment{stepitemize}
+{%
+ \huge
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \let\origitem=\item
+ % Here, the \mystep command is hidden inside \item
+ \renewcommand{\item}{\mystep\origitem}%
+ }
+ {%
+ \end{itemize}
+ }
+
+Instead of displaying incrementally, we can just `flip through' some items by highlighting them:
+
+% Note that we use the starred version of \liststepwise so that the first item is highlighted on the first slide
+% produced by \liststepwise.
+%
+\liststepwise*
+{%
+ \begin{stepitemize}
+ \item Item 1
+ \item Item 2
+ \item Item 3
+ \end{stepitemize}
+ }
+
+\pause
+
+% The following example demonstrates highlighting inside a paragraph using \highlighttext. By redefining \activatestep
+% to \highlighttext, the argument of every \step will be highlighted when the \step is activated for the first
+% time. Note that highlighting doesn't influence line breaks because \highlighttext is implemented using the soul
+% package.
+%
+% Again, we define \hidestepcontents to display its argument, so that the complete text is visible from the outset.
+
+\stepwise[\let\activatestep=\highlighttext\let\hidestepcontents=\displayidentical]
+{%
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \LARGE
+ \step{Inside} a paragraph, we can \step{highlight} text \step{without influencing} \step{line breaks}.
+ \end{minipage}
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ }
+\newslide
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `hilitexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/ifmslidemo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/ifmslidemo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b1177f70190
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/ifmslidemo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `ifmslidemo.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `ifmslidemo')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{ifmslidemo.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: ifmslidemo.tex
+%
+% Simple examples the for combining the ifmslide package with the dynamic features provided by the package texpower.sty.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 May 25, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Jul 31, 2000: Slightly updated for ifmslide v0.43.
+%
+
+\documentclass[KOMA,landscape,display]{powersem}
+
+\usepackage[stmo,button]{ifmslide}
+
+\slidepagestyle{sidebar}
+\centerslidesfalse
+
+\hypersetup{linkcolor=red}
+
+\pagestyle{plain}
+
+\panellogo{fig-2}
+
+\renewcommand{\currentpagevalue}{\value{slide}}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+
+\begin{slide}
+\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\{\normalfont \texttt{ifmslide} Demo}}
+\author{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}
+\section{A list environment}
+
+% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which
+% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages
+% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation
+% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to
+% the next page.
+
+\pause
+
+% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For
+% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step
+% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the
+% \step commands appear ``one by one''.
+
+\stepwise
+{%
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[foo.] \step{bar.}
+ \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.}
+ \end{description}
+ }
+
+
+
+\section{An aligned equation}
+
+\pause
+
+% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb
+% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step.
+% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the
+% proper amount of white space.
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only
+ % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation
+ % numbers `appear'.
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ %
+ % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As
+ % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the
+ % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command.
+ %
+ \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep
+ {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the
+ % order of appearance, independent of nesting.
+ % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on
+ % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'.
+ % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be
+ % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed.
+ \switch
+ {%
+ \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
+ }
+ {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ }
+ \\
+ %
+ % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by
+ % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator.
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\section{An array}
+
+\stepwise
+{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths.
+ %
+ % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that
+ % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step,
+ % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning.
+ %
+ % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the
+ % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the
+ % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by
+ % a) using only p cells,
+ % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If
+ % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into
+ % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth.
+ %
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \begin{array}{rrrrr}
+ \step
+ {%
+ n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\
+ \hline%
+ }%
+ \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}%
+ \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}%
+ \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}%
+ \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}%
+ \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}%
+ \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }%
+ \end{array}
+ \end{displaymath}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\section{A picture}
+
+\pause
+
+\begin{center}%
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.5\semcm}%
+ \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces
+ \begin{picture}(14,2)
+ \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}}
+ \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}}
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ %
+ % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step.
+ % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of
+ % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for
+ % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces.
+ %
+ \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}}
+ }
+ \end{picture}%
+ }%
+\end{center}%
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `ifmslidemo.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/manual.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/manual.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a85adf08dd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/manual.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/manual.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/manual.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..472db32a79a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/manual.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,2264 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `manual.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `manual,docu,enddoc')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{manual.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower manual]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: manual.tex
+%
+% (Preliminary) documentation of the TeXPower bundle.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 11, 2000: Now producing a document which is meant for printing on paper.
+%
+
+\documentclass[12pt]{scrartcl}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% We need some more packages...
+%
+\usepackage[nottoc]{tocbibind}
+
+\usepackage{textcomp}% Just for \textregistered. Comment out if you like.
+
+\usepackage{url}
+
+% The following package makes code look a little nicer, but it may not be present on all systems.
+
+\IfFileExists{cmtt.sty}{\usepackage[override]{cmtt}}{}
+
+% Loading the soul package enables the \highlighttext command.
+
+\IfFileExists{soul.sty}{\usepackage{soul}}
+
+% One more Text emphasis command...
+
+\let\name=\textsc
+
+% We input the xr package for external references.
+
+\usepackage{xr-hyper}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Load hyperref.
+%
+\usepackage[bookmarksopen,colorlinks]{hyperref}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, the texpower package is loaded.
+%
+\usepackage{texpower}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The configuration file allows user-specific settings.
+
+\input{__TPcfg}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Setting up indexing and custom indexing commands
+\input{__TPindexing}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% We use references from the full demo file.
+
+%\externaldocument{fulldemo}[http://texpower.sourceforge.net/doc/fulldemo.pdf]
+\externaldocument{fulldemo}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The code in the manual (doc tag) is meant for the document class seminar. Thus, it contains some
+% seminar-specific commands which are replaced by dummies here.
+
+\let\newslide=\relax
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The following command produces the title for this document.
+
+\newcommand{\makeslidetitle}[1]
+{%
+ \hypersetup{pdftitle={#1}}
+ \title{The \TeX Power bundle\\{\normalfont #1}}
+ \author
+ {%
+ Stephan Lehmke\\\url{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@udo.edu}
+ \and
+ Hans Fr.\ Nordhaug\\\url{mailto:hansfn@users.sourceforge.net}%
+ }
+ \maketitle
+
+ \tableofcontents
+
+ \subsubsection*{}
+}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% As the documentation text contains a lot of stuff in boxes, we use \sloppy to avoid stuff projecting into the margin.
+
+\sloppy
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+
+\begin{document}
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% Documentation of the TeXPower bundle.
+%
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Mar 29, 2000: Added `usage and basic options' section.
+%
+% v0.0.3 Apr 04, 2000: Added `Color Emphasis and Highlighting' section.
+%
+% v0.0.4 Apr 12, 2000: A lot of small additions in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+% v0.0.5 May 31, 2000: Updated for TeXpower v0.0.8.
+%
+% v0.0.6 Jun 09, 2000: Some updates for TeXpower v0.0.8b.
+%
+% v0.0.6a Jun 13, 2000: Some updates for TeXpower v0.0.8c.
+%
+% v0.0.6b Jun 23, 2000: Some updates for TeXpower v0.0.8e.
+%
+% v0.0.6c Jul 25, 2000: Some updates for TeXpower v0.0.8g. Colors section rewritten for new color management kernel.
+%
+% v0.0.7 May 15, 2003: Added index and updates for TeXpower v0.0.9d.
+%
+% v0.0.8 July 27, 2004: Added the "Miscellaneous commands" section. Moved the tpslifonts doc into tpslifonts.dtx.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\def\docversion{v0.0.8 of July 27, 2004}
+\def\tpversion{v0.1b of July 27, 2004}
+
+\makeslidetitle
+{%
+ Documentation%
+ \thanks{Documentation \docversion\ for \TeX Power \tpversion\ (alpha).}%
+ }%
+
+The \TeX Power bundle contains style and class files for creating dynamic online presentations with \LaTeX.
+
+The heart of the bundle is the package \code{texpower.sty} which implements some commands for presentation effects. This
+includes setting page transitions, color highlighting and displaying pages incrementally.
+
+For finding out how to achieve special effects (as shown in the \nameref{Sec:Ex}),
+please look at the comments inside the files ending with \code{example.tex} and \code{demo.tex}
+and read this manual to find out what's going on.
+
+\newslide
+
+For your own first steps with \TeX Power, the simple demo file \code{simpledemo.tex} is the best starting
+place. There, some basic applications of the dynamic features provided by the \code{texpower} package are
+demonstrated. You can make your own dynamic presentations by modifying that demo to your convenience.
+
+\code{simpledemo.tex} uses the \code{article} document class for maximum
+compatibility. There are other simple demos named
+\code{slidesdemo.tex}, \code{foilsdemo.tex}, \code{seminardemo.tex},
+\code{pp4sldemo.tex}, \code{pdfslidemo.tex}, \code{pdfscrdemo.tex},
+\code{prosperdemo.tex}, and \code{ifmslidemo.tex}
+which demonstrate how to combine \TeX Power with the
+most popular presentation-making document classes and packages.
+
+\newslide
+
+The other, more sophisticated examples demonstrate the expressive power of the
+\code{texpower} package. Look at the commented code of these examples to find out how to achieve special effects and
+create your own presentation effects with \TeX Power.
+
+For the first \emph{alpha} release, this documentation will be completed. For the first \emph{beta} release, when the
+code is a little more stable, the \code{texpower} package will be made into a properly documented \code{.dtx} file.
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{Usage and general options}
+The \code{texpower} package is loaded by putting
+\begin{center}
+ \present{\commandapp{usepackage}{texpower}}
+\end{center}
+into the preamble of a document.
+
+There are no specific restrictions as to which document classes can be used.
+
+It should be stressed that \TeX Power is \underl{not} (currently) a complete presentation package. It just adds dynamic
+presentation effects (and some other gimmicks specifically interesting for dynamic presentations) and should always be
+combined with a document class dedicated to designing presentations (or a package like
+\href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfslide.html}{\code{pdfslide}}).
+
+Some of the presentation effects created by \code{texpower} require special capabilities of the viewer which is used for
+presenting the resulting document. The target for the development of \code{texpower} has so far been
+\href{http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readermain.html}%
+{\concept{Adobe Acrobat\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Reader}}, which means the
+document should (finally) be produced in \code{pdf} format. The produced
+\code{pdf} documents should display well in
+\href{http://www.cs.wisc.edu/~ghost/gsview/}{\concept{GSview}} also, but that
+viewer doesn't support page transitions and duration.
+
+There are no specific restrictions as to which way the \code{pdf} format is produced. All demos and examples
+have been tested with pdf\LaTeX{} and standard \LaTeX, using
+\code{dvips} and \href{http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/}%
+{\concept{Adobe Acrobat\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Distiller}}
+or \code{dvips} and \code{ps2pdf} (from the \href{http://www.ghostscript.com/}%
+{\concept{Ghostscript suite}}) for generating \code{pdf}.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{General options}\label{Sec:GenOpt}
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{option: \code{display}}.]\indexpckopt{texpower}{display} Enable `dynamic' features. If not set, it is assumed that the document is to be
+ printed, and all commands for dynamic presentations, like \macroname{pause} or \macroname{stepwise} have no effect.
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{printout} (default)}.]\indexpckopt{texpower}{printout} Disable `dynamic' features. As this is the default behaviour,
+ setting this option explicitly is useful only if the option \code{display} is set by default for instance in the
+ \code{tpoptions.cfg} file (see section \ref{Sec:Config}).
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{verbose}}.]\indexpckopt{texpower}{verbose} Output some administrative info.
+\end{description}
+Some font options are listed in section \ref{Sec:BaseFont}.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Side effects of page contents duplication}\label{Sec:Dupl}
+In the implementation of the \macroname{pause} and \macroname{stepwise} commands, it is neccessary to duplicate some
+material on the page.
+
+This way, not only `visible' page contents will be duplicated, but also some `invisible' control code stored in
+\concept{whatsits} (see the \TeX book for an explanation of this concept). Duplicating whatsits can lead to undesirable
+side effects.
+
+For instance, a \macroname{section} command creates a whatsit for writing the table of contents entry. Duplicating this
+whatsit will also duplicate the toc entry.
+
+\newslide
+
+So, whatsit items effecting file access are inhibited when duplicating page material.
+
+A second type of whatsits is created by \TeX's \macroname{special} command which is used for instance for color
+management. Some drivers, like \code{dvips} and \code{textures}, use a color stack which is controlled by
+\macroname{special} items included in the dvi file. When page contents are duplicated, then these \macroname{special}s
+are also duplicated, which can seriously mess up the color stack.
+
+\newslide
+
+\code{texpower} implements a `color stack correction' method by maintaining a stack of color corrections, which should
+counteract this effect. Owing to potential performance problems, this method is turned off by default.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{option: \code{fixcolorstack}}]\indexpckopt{texpower}{fixcolorstack} switches on color stack correction. Use it if you experience strange color
+ switches in your document.
+\end{description}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Setting the base font}\label{Sec:BaseFont}
+\code{texpower} offers no options for setting the base font of the document.
+Use the \code{tpslifonts} package in stead. Read more in section \ref{Sec:TPslifonts}.
+
+Further, there are packages like \code{cmbright} or \code{beton} which change the whole set of fonts to something less
+fragile than cmr.
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Switches}
+There are some boolean registers provided and set automatically by \code{texpower}.
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{boolean: \code{psspecialsallowed}}]\indexpckswitch{texpower}{psspecialsallowed} True if PostScript\textsuperscript{\textregistered} specials may be
+ used.
+
+ \code{texpower} tries to find out whether or not PostScript\textsuperscript{\textregistered} specials may be used in
+ the current document. For instance, pdf\LaTeX{} can't interpret arbitrary specials. This switch is set automatically
+ and can be used inside a document to enable/disable parts which need PostScript\textsuperscript{\textregistered}
+ specials.
+
+\newslide
+
+\item[\present{boolean: \code{display}}]\indexpckswitch{texpower}{display} True if \code{display} option was given.
+
+ This switch indicates whether `dynamic' features of \code{texpower} are enabled. Use it inside your document
+ to distinguish between the `presented' and the printed version of your document.
+
+\item[\present{boolean: \code{TPcolor}}]\indexpckswitch{texpower}{TPcolor} True if any of the color highlighting options (see section
+ \ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis}) were given.
+
+ This switch indicates whether `color' features of \code{texpower} are enabled (compare section
+ \ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis}). You can use it inside your document to distinguish between a `colored' and a `monochrome'
+ version of your document.
+\end{description}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Configuration files}\label{Sec:Config}
+\code{texpower} loads three configuration files (if present):
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{file: \code{tpoptions.cfg}}]\indexcode{tpoptions.cfg}
+ is loaded before options are processed. Can be used to set default options
+ in a system-specific way. See the comments inside the file
+ \code{tpoptions.cfg} which is part of the \TeX Power bundle
+ for instructions.
+
+\item[\present{file: \code{tpsettings.cfg}}]\indexcode{tpsettings.cfg}
+ is loaded at the end of \code{texpower}. Here, you can do some
+ system-specific settings. See the comments inside the
+ file \code{tpsettings.cfg} which is part of the
+ \TeX Power bundle for instructions.
+
+\item[\present{file: \code{tpcolors.cfg}}]\indexcode{tpcolors.cfg}
+ is loaded if \code{TPcolor} is true. The file defines the standard
+ colors/colorsets (see section \ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis}). See the
+ comments inside the file \code{tpcolors.cfg} which is part of the
+ \TeX Power bundle for instructions.
+\end{description}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Miscellaneous commands}\label{Sec:MiscCmd}
+Some important commands that don't fit in the latter sections:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{\commandapp{currentpagevalue}{\carg{value}}}]\indexmacro{currentpagevalue}
+ sets how to find the number of the current page, \commandapp{value}{page} is default.
+ Used to name the hyper target on the first subpage of every page. Also used in the
+ TeXPower navigation buttons.
+\item[\present{\commandapp{pausesafecounter}{\carg{counter}}}]\indexmacro{pausesafecounter}
+ is used to add counters that are to be restored to their original value after \macroname{pause}. The \code{page}
+ counter is always restored. In addition the \code{slide} counter is restored if the \code{seminar} class is used. If
+ you need more counters to be restored after \macroname{pause}, use \macroname{pausesafecounter}.
+\end{description}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{Dependencies on other packages}
+\code{textpower} always loads the packages \code{ifthen} and \code{calc}, as the extended command syntax provided by
+these is indispensable for the macros to work. They are in the \code{base} and \code{tools} area of the \LaTeX{}
+distribution, respectively, so I hope they are available on all systems.
+
+Furthermore, \code{texpower} loads the package \code{color} if any color-specific options are set (see section
+\ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis}).
+
+Further packages are \emph{not} loaded automatically by \code{texpower} to avoid incompatibilities, although some
+features of \code{texpower} are enabled \emph{only} if a certain package is loaded. If you wish to use these features,
+you are responsible for loading the respective package yourself.
+
+If some necessary package is \emph{not} loaded, \code{texpower} will issue a warning and disable the respective
+features.
+
+The following packages are neccessary for certain features of \code{texpower}:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{package: \code{hyperref}}]\indexfile{hyperref}{package}
+ is neccessary for page transition effects to work (see section
+ \ref{Sec:PageTrans}).
+
+ In particular, the \macroname{pageDuration} (see section \ref{Sec:PageDuration}) command only works if the version of
+ hyperref loaded is at least v6.70a (where the \code{pdfpageduration} key was introduced).
+
+ Commands which work only when \code{hyperref} is loaded are marked with \textbf{\textsf{h}} in the description.
+
+\newslide
+
+\item[\present{package: \code{soul}}]\indexfile{soul}{package}
+ is neccessary for the implementation of the commands \macroname{hidetext} and
+ \macroname{highlighttext} (see section \ref{Sec:displaycustom}).
+
+ Commands which work only when \code{soul} is loaded are marked with \textbf{\textsf{s}} in the description.
+\end{description}
+
+\newslide
+
+\subsection{What else is part of the \TeX Power bundle?}
+Besides the package \code{texpower} (which is described here), there are four
+more packages, \code{tpslifonts}, \code{fixseminar}, \code{automata} and
+\code{tplists}, and one document class,
+\code{powersem}, in the \TeX Power bundle which so far have no documentation
+of their own. They will be described in this section until they are turned
+into \code{dtx} files producing their own documentation.
+
+See the file \code{00readme.txt} which is part of the \TeX Power bundle for a short description of all files.
+
+\newslide
+
+\minisec{The document class \code{powersem}}\indexfile{powersem}{class}
+This is planned to provide a more `modern' version of \code{seminar} which can be used for creating dynamic
+presentations.
+
+Currently, this document class doesn't do much more than load \code{seminar} and apply some fixes, but it is planned to
+add some presentation-specific features (like navigation panels).
+
+\newslide
+
+There are three new options which are specific for \code{powersem}, all other options are passed to \code{seminar}:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\present{option: \code{display}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{display}
+ Turns off all features of \code{seminar} (notes, vertical centering of slides)
+ which can disturb dynamic presentations.
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{calcdimensions}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{calcdimensions}
+ \code{seminar} automatically calculates the slide dimensions
+ \macroname{slidewidth} and \macroname{slideheight} only for the default \code{letter} and for its own option
+ \code{a4}. For all the other paper sizes which are possible with the \code{KOMA} option, the slide dimensions are not
+ calculated automatically.
+
+ The \code{calcdimensions} option makes \code{powersem} calculate the slide dimensions automatically from paper size
+ and margins.
+
+\newslide
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{truepagenumbers}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{truepagenumbers}
+ The truepagenumbers option makes powersem count pages with the counter page, independently of the counter slide. This
+ enables proper working of TeXPowers navigation buttons (some of which calculate relative page numbers) even when the
+ counter slide is reset frequently (for slide numberings of the type \verb|<l>.<n>.<m>|).
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{KOMA}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{KOMA} Makes
+ \code{seminar} load \code{scrartcl} (from the KOMA-Script bundle) instead of
+ \code{article} as its base class. All new features of \code{scrartcl} are then available also for slides.
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{UseBaseClass}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{UseBaseClass}
+ Makes \code{seminar} load the class \macroname{baseclass} (initially \code{article}) instead of
+ \code{article} as its base class.
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{reportclass}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{reportclass}
+ Makes \code{seminar} load the class \macroname{baseclass} (initially \code{report}) instead of
+ \code{article}.
+
+\item[\present{option: \code{bookclass}}]\indexpckopt{powersem}{bookclass}
+ Makes \code{seminar} load the class \macroname{baseclass} (initially \code{book}) instead of
+ \code{article}.
+
+\end{description}
+
+There is one change in \code{powersem} which will lead to incompatibilities with \code{seminar}. \code{seminar} has the
+unfortunate custom of \emph{not} exchanging \macroname{paperwidth} and \macroname{paperheight} when making landscape
+slides, as for instance \code{typearea} and \code{geometry} do.
+
+This leads to problems with setting the paper size for \code{pdf} files, as done for instance by the \code{hyperref}
+package.
+
+\code{powersem} effectively turns off \code{seminar}'s papersize management and leaves this to the base class (with the
+pleasant side effect that you can use e.\,g.\ \commandapp[KOMA,a0paper]{documentclass}{powersem} for making posters).
+
+In consequence, the \code{portrait} option of \code{seminar} is turned on by \code{powersem} to avoid confusing
+\code{seminar}. You have to explicitly use the \code{landscape} option (and a base class or package which understands
+this option) to get landscape slides with powersem.
+
+\newslide
+
+\minisec{The package \code{fixseminar}}\indexfile{fixseminar}{package}
+Unfortunately, there are some fixes to seminar which can \emph{not} be applied in \code{powersem} because they have to
+be applied after \code{hyperref} is loaded (if this package should be loaded).
+
+The package \code{fixseminar} applies these fixes, so this package should be loaded after \code{hyperref} (if
+\code{hyperref} is loaded at all, otherwise \code{fixseminar} can be loaded anywhere in the preamble).
+
+\newslide
+
+It applies two fixes:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item In case \code{pdflatex} is being run, the lengths \macroname{pdfpageheight} and \macroname{pdfpagewidth} have to
+ be set in a `magnification-sensitive' way.
+
+\item \code{hyperref} introduces some code at the beginning of every page which can produce spurious vertical space,
+ which in turn disturbs building dynamic pages. This code is `fixed' so it cannot produce vertical space.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newslide
+
+\minisec{The package \code{tpslifonts}}
+\indexfile{tpslifonts}{package}\label{Sec:TPslifonts}
+Presentations to be displayed `online' with a video beamer have special needs concerning font configuration owing to low
+`screen' resolution and bad contrast caused by possibly bad light conditions combined with color highlighting.
+
+This package tries to cater to these needs by offering a holistic configuration of all document fonts, including text,
+typewriter, and math fonts. Special features are `smooth scaling' of Type1 fonts and careful design size selection for
+optimal readability.
+
+\newslide
+
+For more information on package options and used fonts (and on implementation) read the documentation coming with the
+package - check the \code{tpslifonts} directory.
+
+\minisec{The package \code{automata}}\indexfile{automata}{package}
+Experimental package for drawing automata in the sense of theoretical computer
+science (using PSTricks) and animating them with TeXPower. Only DFA and Mealy
+automata are supported so far.
+
+\newslide
+
+\minisec{The package \code{tplists}}\indexfile{tplists}{package}
+Experimental package providing easy dynamic lists. Currently there are stepped, flipped and dimmed versions of itemize
+and enumerate (and corresponding lists from the \code{eqlist} and \code{paralist} package). For more information
+and an example read the start of the file \code{tplists.sty}.
+
+\newslide
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\section{The \macroname{pause} command}\label{Sec:pause}
+\present{\macroname{pause}}\indexmacro{pause} is derived from the \macroname{pause} command from the package
+\href{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/pp4sty.zip}{\code{texpause}} which is part of the
+\href{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/}{PPower4 suite} by
+\href{mailto:guntermann@iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de}{Klaus Guntermann}.
+
+ It will ship out the current page, start a new page and copy whatever was on the current page onto the new page, where
+ typesetting is resumed.
+
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{display}}{Here, let's do a little demo\pause}{}
+
+ This will create the effect of a \concept{pause} in the presentation, i.\,e.\ the presentation stops because the
+ current page ends at the point where the \macroname{pause} command occurred and is resumed at this point when the
+ presenter switches to the next page.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \macroname{pause} should appear in \concept{vertical mode} only, i.\,e.\ between paragraphs or at places where
+ ending the current paragraph doesn't hurt.
+
+ \item This means \macroname{pause} is forbidden in all \concept{boxed} material (including \code{tabular}),
+ \concept{headers/footers}, and \concept{floats}.
+
+ \item \macroname{pause} shouldn't appear either in environments which have to be \emph{closed} to work properly, like
+ \code{picture}, \code{tabbing}, and (unfortunately) environments for \concept{aligned math formulas}.
+
+ \item \macroname{pause} does work in all environments which mainly influence paragraph formatting, like \code{center},
+ \code{quote} or all \concept{list} environments.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item \macroname{pause} doesn't really have problems with automatic page breaking, but beware of \emph{overfull}
+ pages/slides. In this case, it may occur that only the last page(s)/slide(s) of a sequence are overfull, which
+ changes vertical spacing, making lines `wobble' when switching to the last page/slide of a sequence.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item The duplication of page material done by \macroname{pause} can lead to unwanted side effects. See section
+ \ref{Sec:Dupl} for further explanations. In particular, if you should experience strange color switches when using
+ \macroname{pause} (and you are \underl{not} using \code{pdftex}), turn on color stack correction with the option
+ \code{fixcolorstack}. In addition you should be aware of \macroname{pausesafecounter}, see section
+ \ref{Sec:MiscCmd}.
+
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ A lot of the restrictions for the use of pause can be avoided by using \macroname{stepwise} (see next section).
+
+ \newslide
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \section{The \macroname{stepwise} command}
+ \present{\commandapp{stepwise}{\carg{contents}}}\indexmacro{stepwise} is a command for displaying some part of a \LaTeX{} document (which
+ is contained in \carg{contents}) `step by step'. As of itself, \macroname{stepwise} doesn't do very much. If
+ \carg{contents} contains one or more constructs of the form \present{\commandapp{step}{\carg{stepcontents}}}\indexmacro{step}, the
+ following happens:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item The current contents of the page are saved (as with \macroname{pause}).
+
+ \item As many pages as there are \macroname{step} commands in \carg{contents} are produced.
+
+ Every page starts with what was on the current page when \macroname{stepwise} started.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The first page also contains everything in \carg{contents} which is \emph{not} in \carg{stepcontents} for any
+ \macroname{step} command.
+
+ The second page additionally contains the \carg{stepcontents} for the \emph{first} \macroname{step} command, and so
+ on, until all \carg{stepcontents} are displayed.
+
+ \item When all \carg{stepcontents} are displayed, \macroname{stepwise} ends and typesetting is resumed (still on the
+ current page).
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \parstepwise{This will create the effect that the \macroname{step} commands are executed `\step{step} \step{by}
+ \step{step}'.}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \macroname{stepwise} should appear in \concept{vertical mode} only, i.\,e.\ between paragraphs, just like
+ \macroname{pause}.
+
+ \item Don't put \macroname{pause} or nested occurrences of \macroname{stepwise} into \carg{contents}.
+
+ \item Structures where \macroname{pause} does not work (like \code{tabular} or aligned equations) can go
+ \emph{completely} into \carg{contents}, where \macroname{step} can be used freely (see \nameref{Sec:Ex}).
+
+ \item As \carg{contents} is read as a macro argument, constructs involving \concept{catcode} changes (like
+ \macroname{verb} or language switches) won't work in \carg{contents}. Using a suggestion by \name{Ross
+ Moore}, I hope to remedy this until the \emph{alpha} release.
+
+\newslide
+
+ \item Several instances of \macroname{stepwise} may occur on one page, also combined with \macroname{pause} (outside
+ of \carg{contents}).
+
+ But beware of page breaks in \carg{contents}. This will really mess things up.
+
+ Overfull pages/slides are also a problem, just like with \macroname{pause}. See the description of \macroname{pause}
+ (section \ref{Sec:pause}) concerning this and also concerning side effects of duplicating page material.
+
+ \item \macroname{step} can go in \carg{stepcontents}. The order of execution of \macroname{step} commands is just the
+ order in which they appear in \carg{contents}, independent of nesting within each other.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item As \carg{contents} is executed several times, \LaTeX{} constructs changing \concept{global counters}, accessing
+ \concept{files} etc.\ are problematic. This concerns sections, numbered equations, labels, hyperlinks and the like.
+
+ Counters are taken care of explicitly by \macroname{stepwise}, so equation numbers are no problem.
+
+ Commands accessing toc files and such (like \macroname{section}) are taken care of by the whatsit suppression
+ mechanism (compare section \ref{Sec:Dupl}).
+
+ Labels and hyperlinks work sort of (giving a lot of warnings though).
+
+ I will try to remedy remaining problems until the first \emph{alpha} release.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{\macroname{boxedsteps} and \macroname{nonboxedsteps}}\label{Sec:boxedsteps}%
+ By default, \carg{stepcontents} belonging to a \macroname{step} which is not yet `active' are ignored altogether. This
+ makes it possible to include e.\,g.\ tabulators \code{\&} or line breaks into \carg{stepcontents} without breaking
+ anything.
+
+ Sometimes, however, this behaviour is undesirable, for instance when stepping through an equation `from outer to
+ inner', or when filling in blanks in a paragraph. Then, the desired behaviour of a \macroname{step} which is not yet
+ `active' is to create an appropriate amount of \emph{blank space} where \carg{stepcontents} can go as soon as it is
+ activated.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The simplest and most robust way of doing this is to create an empty box (aka \macroname{phantom}) with the same
+ dimensions as the text to be hidden.
+
+ This behaviour is toggled by the following commands. See section \ref{Sec:displaycustom} for more sophisticated
+ (albeit more fragile) variants.
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{boxedsteps}}]\indexmacro{boxedsteps} makes \macroname{step} create a blank box the size of \carg{stepcontents} when
+ inactive and put \carg{stepcontents} into a box when active.
+ \item[\present{\macroname{nonboxedsteps}}]\indexmacro{nonboxedsteps} makes \macroname{step} ignore \carg{stepcontents} when inactive and leave
+ \carg{stepcontents} alone when active (default).
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item The settings effected by \macroname{boxedsteps} and \macroname{nonboxedsteps} are \emph{local}, i.\,e.\ whenever
+ a group closes, the setting is restored to its previous value.
+
+ \item Putting stuff into boxes can break things like tabulators (\code{\&}). It can also mess up math spacing, which
+ then has to be corrected manually. Compare the following examples:
+
+ \parstepwise{%
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \left(\frac{a+b}{c}\right)\qquad\left(\frac{a\step{+b}}{c}\right)\qquad\left(\frac{a\restep{{}+b}}{c}\right)
+ \end{displaymath}%
+ }%
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Custom versions of \macroname{stepwise}}%
+ Sometimes, it might happen that vertical spacing is different on every page of a sequence generated by
+ \macroname{stepwise}, making lines `wobble'.
+
+ This is caused by interactions between different ways vertical spacing is added to the page. Hopefully, problems
+ caused this way can be reduced until the first \emph{alpha} release.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ There are two custom versions of \macroname{stepwise} which should produce better vertical spacing.
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{liststepwise}{\carg{contents}}}]
+ \indexmacro{liststepwise} works exactly like \macroname{stepwise}, but adds
+ an `invisible rule' before \carg{contents}. Use for list environments and
+ aligned equations.
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{parstepwise}{\carg{contents}}}]
+ \indexmacro{parstepwise} works like \macroname{liststepwise}, but
+ \macroname{boxedsteps} is turned on by default. Use for texts where
+ \macroname{step}s are to be filled into blank spaces.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Starred versions of \macroname{stepwise} commands}\label{Sec:StarredStepwise}%
+ Usually, the first page of a sequence produced contains \emph{only} material which is \emph{not} part of any
+ \carg{stepcontents}. The first \carg{stepcontents} are displayed on the second page of the sequence.
+
+ For special effects (see example \ref{Sec:Exhl}), it might be desirable to have the first \carg{stepcontents} active
+ even on the first page of the sequence.
+
+ All variants of \macroname{stepwise} have a starred version (e.\,g.\ \macroname{stepwise*}) which does exactly that.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{The optional argument of \macroname{stepwise}}%
+ Every variant of \macroname{stepwise} takes an optional argument, like this
+ \begin{center}
+ \present{\commandapp[\carg{settings}]{stepwise}{\carg{contents}}}.
+ \end{center}
+ \carg{settings} will be placed right before the internal loop which produces the sequence of pages. It can
+ contain settings of parameters which modify the behaviour of \macroname{stepwise} or \macroname{step}. \carg{settings}
+ is placed inside a group so all changes are local to this call of \macroname{stepwise}.
+
+ Some internal macros and counters which can be adjusted are explained in the following.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Customizing the way \carg{stepcontents} is diplayed}\label{Sec:displaycustom}%
+ Internally, there are three macros (taking one argument each) which control how \carg{stepcontents} is displayed:
+ \macroname{displaystepcontents}\indexmacro{displaystepcontents},
+ \macroname{hidestepcontents}\indexmacro{hidestepcontents}, and
+ \macroname{activatestep}\indexmacro{activatestep}. Virtually, every
+ \commandapp{step}{\carg{stepcontents}} is replaced by
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{hidestepcontents}{\carg{stepcontents}}}]\mbox{}\\ when this step is not yet active.
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{displaystepcontents}{\commandapp{activatestep}{\carg{stepcontents}}}}] when this step is
+ activated \emph{for the first time}.
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{displaystepcontents}{\carg{stepcontents}}}]\mbox{}\\
+ when this step has been activated before.
+ \end{description}
+
+ By redefining these macros, the behaviour of \macroname{step} is changed accordingly. You can redefine them inside
+ \carg{contents} to provide a change affecting one \macroname{step} only, or in the optional argument of
+ \macroname{stepwise} to provide a change for all \macroname{step}s inside \carg{contents}.
+
+ In the \nameref{Sec:Ex}, it is demonstrated how special effects can be achieved by redefining these macros.
+
+ \macroname{activatestep} is set to \macroname{displayidentical} by default, the default settings of
+ \macroname{hidestepcontents} and \macroname{displaystepcontents} depend on whether \macroname{boxedsteps} or
+ \macroname{nonboxedsteps} (default) is used.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \code{texpower} offers nine standard definitions.
+
+ For interpreting \macroname{displaystepcontents}:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{displayidentical}}]\indexmacro{displayidentical}
+ Simply expands to its argument. The same as \LaTeX s
+ \macroname{@ident}. Used by \macroname{nonboxedsteps} (default).
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{displayboxed}}]\indexmacro{displayboxed}
+ Expands to an \macroname{mbox} containing its argument. Used by
+ \macroname{boxedsteps}.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ For interpreting \macroname{hidestepcontents}:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{hideignore}}]\indexmacro{hideignore}
+ Expands to nothing. The same as \LaTeX s \macroname{@gobble}. Used by
+ \macroname{nonboxedsteps} (default).
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{hidephantom}}]\indexmacro{hidephantom}
+ Expands to a \macroname{phantom} containing its argument. Used by
+ \macroname{boxedsteps}.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{hidevanish}}]\indexmacro{hidevanish}
+ In a colored document, makes its argument `vanish' by setting all colors to
+ \macroname{vanishcolor} (defaults to \code{pagecolor}; compare section
+ \ref{Sec:Colorcommands}). Note that this will give weird results with
+ structures backgrounds.
+
+ For monochrome documents, there is no useful interpretation for this command, so it is disabled.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[{\present[s]{\macroname{hidetext}}}]\indexmacro{hidetext}
+ Produces blank space of the same dimensions as the space that would be
+ occupied if its argument would be typeset in the current paragraph. Respects automatic hyphenation and line breaks.
+
+ This command needs the \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} package
+ to work, which is not loaded by \code{texpower} itself. Consult the documentation of
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} concerning restrictions on
+ commands implemented using \code{soul}. If you don't load the \code{soul} package yourself, there is no useful
+ definition for this command, so it defaults to \macroname{hidephantom}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{hidedimmed}}]\indexmacro{hidedimmed}
+ In a colored document, displays its argument with dimmed colors (compare
+ section \ref{Sec:Colors}). Note that this doesn't make the argument completely invisible.
+
+ For monochrome documents, there is no useful interpretation for this command, so it is disabled.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ For interpreting \macroname{activatestep}:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{highlightboxed}}]\indexmacro{highlightboxed}
+ If the \code{colorhighlight} option (see section \ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis})
+ is set, expands to a \highlightboxed{box with colored background} containing its argument. Otherwise, expands to an
+ \macroname{fbox} containing its argument. It is made sure that the resulting box has the same dimensions as the
+ argument (the outer frame may overlap surrounding text).
+
+ There is a new length register \present{\macroname{highlightboxsep}}
+ \indexmacro{highlightboxsep} which acts like \macroname{fboxsep} for the
+ resulting box and defaults to \code{0.5\macroname{fboxsep}}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[{\present[s]{\macroname{highlighttext}}}]\indexmacro{highlighttext}
+ If the \code{colorhighlight} option (see section \ref{Sec:ColorEmphasis})
+ is set, puts its argument \highlighttext{on colored background}. Otherwise, underlines its
+ argument. It is made sure that the resulting text has the same dimensions as the argument (the outer frame may
+ overlap surrounding text).
+
+ \present{\macroname{highlightboxsep}} is used to determine the extent of the coloured box(es) used as background.
+
+ This command needs the \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} package
+ to work (compare the description of \macroname{hidetext}). If you don't load the \code{soul} package yourself, there
+ is no useful definition for this command, so it is disabled.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{highlightenhanced}}]\indexmacro{highlightenhanced}
+ In a colored document, displays its argument \highlightenhanced{with
+ enhanced colors} (compare section \ref{Sec:Colors}).
+
+ For monochrome documents, there is no useful interpretation for this command, so it is disabled.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Variants of \macroname{step}}
+ There are a couple of custom versions of \macroname{step} which make it easier to achieve special effects needed
+ frequently.
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{bstep}}]\indexmacro{bstep}
+ Like \macroname{step}, but is \emph{always} boxed (see section
+ \ref{Sec:boxedsteps}). \commandapp{bstep}{\carg{stepcontents}} is
+ implemented in principle as
+ \code{\{\macroname{boxedsteps}\commandapp{step}{\carg{stepcontents}}\}}.
+
+ In aligned equations where \macroname{stepwise} is used for being able to put tabulators into \carg{stepcontents},
+ but where nested occurrences of \macroname{step} should be boxed to assure correct sizes of growing braces or such,
+ this variant of \macroname{step} is more convenient than using \macroname{boxedsteps} for every nested occurrence
+ of \macroname{step}.
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{switch}{\carg{ifinactive}\}\{\carg{ifactive}}}]
+ \indexmacro{switch} is a variant of \macroname{step} which,
+ instead of making its argument appear, switches between \carg{ifinactive}
+ and \carg{ifactive} when activated.
+
+ In fact, \commandapp{step}{\carg{stepcontents}} is in principle implemented by
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ \macroname{switch}\=\code{\{\commandapp{hidestepcontents}{\carg{stepcontents}}\}}\\
+ \>\code{\{\commandapp{displaystepcontents}{\carg{stepcontents}}\}}
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+ This command can be used, for instance, to add an \macroname{underbrace} to a formula, which is difficult using
+ \macroname{step}.
+
+ Beware of problems when \carg{ifinactive} and \carg{ifactive} have different dimensions.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{dstep}}]\indexmacro{dstep}
+ A variant of \macroname{step} which takes \underl{no} argument, but simply
+ switches colors to `dimmed' (compare section \ref{Sec:Colors}) if not
+ active. Not that the scope of this color change will
+ last until the next outer group closes. This command does nothing in a monochrome document.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{vstep}}]\indexmacro{vstep}
+ A variant of \macroname{step} which takes \underl{no} argument, but simply
+ switches all colors to \macroname{vanishcolor} (defaults to
+ \code{pagecolor}; compare section \ref{Sec:Colorcommands}) if not
+ active. Not that the scope of this color change will last until the next outer group closes. This command does
+ nothing in a monochrome document.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{steponce}}]\indexmacro{steponce}
+ % \steponce[<activatefirst>]{<stepcontents>}
+ Like \macroname{step}, but goes inactive again in the subsequent step.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{multistep}}]\indexmacro{multistep}
+ is a shorthand macro for executing several steps successively. In
+ fact, it would better be called \macroname{multiswitch}, because it's
+ functionality is based on \macroname{switch}, it only acts like a
+ (simplified) \macroname{step} command which is executed `several times'.
+ The syntax is
+ \begin{center}
+ \commandapp[\carg{activatefirst}]{multistep}{\carg{n}\}\{\carg{stepcontents}}
+ \end{center}
+ where \carg{n} is the number of steps. Only one instance of
+ \carg{stepcontents} is displayed at a time. Inside \carg{stepcontents}, a
+ counter \code{substep} can be evaluated which tells the number of the
+ current instance. In the starred form the last instance of
+ \carg{stepcontents} stays visible.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{movie}}]\indexmacro{movie}
+ works like \macroname{multistep}, but between \macroname{steps}, pages are
+ advanced automatically every \carg{dur} seconds. The syntax is
+ \begin{center}
+ \commandapp{movie}{\carg{n}\}\{\carg{dur}\}[\carg{stop}]\{\carg{stepcontents}}
+ \end{center}
+ where \carg{n} is the number of steps. The additional optional argument
+ \carg{stop} gives the code (default: \macroname{stopAdvancing})
+ \indexmacro{stopAdvancing} which stops the animation.
+ (\macroname{movie} accepts the same first optional argument as
+ \macroname{multistep} but it was left out above.)
+
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{overlays}}]\indexmacro{overlays}
+ is another shorthand macro for executing several steps successively. In
+ contrast to \macroname{multistep}, it doesn't print things \emph{after}
+ each other, but \emph{over} each other. The syntax is
+ \begin{center}
+ \commandapp[\carg{activatefirst}]{overlays}{\carg{n}\}\{\carg{stepcontents}}
+ \end{center}
+ where \carg{n} is the number of steps. Inside \carg{stepcontents}, a
+ counter \code{substep} can be evaluated which tells the number of the
+ current instance.
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\small%
+ \present{\macroname{restep}}\indexmacro{restep},
+ \present{\macroname{rebstep}}\indexmacro{rebstep},
+ \present{\macroname{reswitch}}\indexmacro{reswitch},
+ \present{\macroname{redstep}}\indexmacro{redstep},
+ \present{\macroname{revstep}}\indexmacro{revstep}.]\mbox{}\\
+ Frequently, it is desirable for two or more steps to appear at the same
+ time, for instance to fill in arguments at
+ several places in a formula at once (see example \ref{Sec:ExEq}).
+
+ \present{\commandapp{restep}{\carg{stepcontents}}} is identical with \commandapp{step}{\carg{stepcontents}}, but is
+ activated at the same time as the previous occurrence of \macroname{step}.
+
+ \present{\macroname{rebstep}}, \present{\macroname{reswitch}}, \present{\macroname{redstep}}, and
+ \present{\macroname{revstep}} do the same for \macroname{bstep}, \macroname{switch}, \macroname{dstep}, and
+ \macroname{vstep}.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Optional arguments of \macroname{step}}%
+ Sometimes, letting two \macroname{step}s appear at the same time (with \macroname{restep}) is not the only desirable
+ modification of the order in which \macroname{step}s appear. \macroname{step}, \macroname{bstep} and
+ \macroname{switch} take two optional arguments for influencing the mode of activation, like this:
+ \begin{center}
+ \present{\commandapp[{\carg{activatefirst}][\carg{whenactive}}]{step}{\carg{stepcontents}}}.
+ \end{center}
+ Both \carg{activatefirst} and \carg{whenactive} should be conditions in the syntax of the \macroname{ifthenelse}
+ command (see the documentation of the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/ifthen.html}{\code{ifthen}} package for details).
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \present{\carg{activatefirst}} checks whether this \macroname{step} is to be activated \emph{for the first time}. The
+ default value is \present{\commandapp{value}{step}=\commandapp{value}{stepcommand}} (see section \ref{Sec:Internals}
+ for a list of internal values). By using \commandapp{value}{step}=\carg{$n$}, this \macroname{step} can be forced to
+ appear as the $n$th one. See example \ref{Sec:ExPar} for a demonstration of how this can be used to make
+ \macroname{step}s appear in arbitrary order.
+
+ \present{\carg{whenactive}} checks whether this \macroname{step} is to be considered active \emph{at all}. The default
+ behaviour is to check whether this \macroname{step} has been activated before (this is saved internally for every
+ step). See example \ref{Sec:ExFooling} for a demonstration of how this can be used to make \macroname{step}s appear
+ and disappear after a defined fashion.
+
+ \minisec{If you know what you're doing\dots}
+ Both optional arguments allow two syntctical forms:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item enclosed in square brackets \code{[]} like explained above.
+ \item enclosed in braces \code{()}. In this case, \carg{activatefirst} and \carg{whenactive} are \emph{not} treated as
+ conditions in the sense of \macroname{ifthenelse}, but as conditionals like those used internally by \LaTeX. That
+ means, \carg{activatefirst} (when enclosed in braces) can contain arbitrary \TeX{} code which then takes two
+ arguments and expands to one of them, depending on whether the condition is fulfilled or not fulfilled. For
+ instance, \commandapp[{\carg{activatefirst}}]{step}{\carg{stepcontents}} could be replaced by
+ \macroname{step}\code{(\commandapp{ifthenelse}{\carg{activatefirst}})\{\carg{stepcontents}\}}.
+
+ See example \ref{Sec:ExBackwards} for a simple application of this syntax.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ Internally, the default for the treatment of \carg{whenactive} is \code{(\macroname{if@first@TP@true})}, where
+ \macroname{if@first@TP@true} is an internal condition checking whether this \macroname{step} has been activated before.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Finding out what's going on}\label{Sec:Internals}%
+ Inside \carg{settings} and \carg{contents}, you can refer to the following internal state variables which provide
+ information about the current state of the process executed by \macroname{stepwise}:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{counter: \code{firststep}}]
+ \indexstepwise{firststep}{counter}
+ The number from which to start counting steps (see counter \code{step}
+ below). Is $0$ by default and $1$ for starred versions (section \ref{Sec:StarredStepwise}) of \macroname{stepwise}.
+ You can set this in \carg{settings} for special effects (see example \ref{Sec:ExBackwards}).
+
+ \item[\present{counter: \code{totalsteps}}]
+ \indexstepwise{totalsteps}{counter}
+ The total number of \macroname{step} commands occurring in \carg{contents}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{counter: \code{step}}]
+ \indexstepwise{step}{counter}
+ The number of the current iteration, i.\,e.\ the number of the current page in
+ the sequence of pages produced by \macroname{stepwise}. Runs from \commandapp{value}{firststep} to
+ \commandapp{value}{totalsteps}.
+
+ \item[\present{counter: \code{stepcommand}}]
+ \indexstepwise{stepcommand}{counter}
+ The number of the \macroname{step} command currently being executed.
+
+ \item[\present{boolean: \code{firstactivation}}]
+ \indexstepwise{firstactivation}{boolean}
+ \code{true} if this \macroname{step} is active for the first time,
+ \code{false} otherwise.
+
+ \item[\present{boolean: \code{active}}]\indexstepwise{active}{boolean}
+ \code{true} if this \macroname{step} is currently active, \code{false}
+ otherwise.
+ \end{description}
+ \code{stepcommand}, \code{firstactivation}, and \code{active} are useful only inside \carg{stepcontents}.
+
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{\macroname{afterstep}}\indexmacro{afterstep}%
+ It might be neccessary to set some parameters which affect the appearance of the \emph{page} (like page transitions)
+ inside \carg{stepcontents}. However, the \macroname{step} commands are usually placed deeply inside some structure, so
+ that all \emph{local} settings are likely to be undone by groups closing before the page is completed.
+
+ \present{\commandapp{afterstep}{\carg{settings}}} puts \carg{settings} right before the end of the page, after the
+ current step is performed.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item There can be only one effective value for \carg{settings}. Every occurrence of \macroname{afterstep} overwrites
+ this value globally.
+
+ \item \macroname{afterstep} will \emph{not} be executed in \carg{stepcontents} if the corresponding \macroname{step}
+ is not active, even if \carg{stepcontents} is displayed owing to a redefinition of \macroname{hidestepcontents},
+ like in example \ref{Sec:Exhl}.
+
+ \item As \carg{settings} is put immediately before the page break, there is no means of restoring the original value
+ of whatever has been set. So if you set something via \macroname{afterstep} and want it to be reset in some later
+ step, you have to reset it explicitly with another call of \macroname{afterstep}.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \section{Page transitions and automatic advancing}\label{Sec:PageTrans}
+ \subsection{Page transitions}
+ I am indepted to \href{mailto:dongen@cs.ucc.ie}{\name{Marc van Dongen}} for allowing me to include a suite of commands
+ written by him and posted to the \href{http://www-sp.iti.informatik.tu-darmstadt.de/software/ppower4/}{PPower4}
+ mailing list which set page transitions (using
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/hyperref.html}{\code{hyperref}s} \macroname{hypersetup}).
+
+ These commands work only if the \code{hyperref} package is loaded.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The following page transition commands are defined:\pause
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionSplitHO}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionSplitHO}
+ Split Horizontally to the outside. \pageTransitionSplitHO\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionSplitHI}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionSplitHI}
+ Split Horizontally to the inside. \pageTransitionSplitHI\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionSplitVO}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionSplitVO}
+ Split Vertically to the outside. \pageTransitionSplitVO\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionSplitVI}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionSplitVI}
+ Split Vertically to the inside. \pageTransitionSplitVI\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionBlindsH}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionBlindsH}
+ Horizontal Blinds. \pageTransitionBlindsH\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionBlindsV}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionBlindsV}
+ Vertical Blinds. \pageTransitionBlindsV
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionBoxO}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionBoxO}
+ Growing Box. \pageTransitionBoxO\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionBoxI}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionBoxI}
+ Shrinking Box. \pageTransitionBoxI\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\commandapp{pageTransitionWipe}{\carg{angle}}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionWipe}\mbox{}\\
+ Wipe from one edge of the page to the facing edge.
+
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \carg{angle} is a number between $0$ and $360$ which specifies the direction (in degrees) in which to wipe.
+
+ Apparently, only the values \afterstep{\pageTransitionWipe{0}}$0$, \step{\afterstep{\pageTransitionWipe{90}}$90$,}
+ \step{\afterstep{\pageTransitionWipe{180}}$180$,} \step{$270$ are supported.}%
+ }%
+ \pageTransitionWipe{270}\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionDissolve}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionDissolve}
+ Dissolve. \pageTransitionDissolve
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\commandapp{pageTransitionGlitter}{\carg{angle}}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionGlitter}\mbox{}\\
+ Glitter from one edge of the page to the facing edge.
+
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \carg{angle} is a number between $0$ and $360$ which specifies the direction (in degrees) in which to glitter.
+
+ Apparently, only the values \afterstep{\pageTransitionGlitter{0}}$0$,
+ \step{\afterstep{\pageTransitionGlitter{270}}$270$,} \step{$315$ are supported.}%
+ }%
+ \pageTransitionGlitter{315}\pause
+
+ \item[{\present[h]{\macroname{pageTransitionReplace}}}]
+ \indexmacro{pageTransitionReplace}
+ Simple Replace (the default).
+ \end{description}
+
+ \pageTransitionReplace
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item The setting of the page transition is a property of the \emph{page}, i.~e.\ whatever page transition is in
+ effect when a page break occurs, will be assigned to the corresponding pdf page.
+
+ \item The setting of the page transition is undone when a group ends.
+
+ Make sure no \LaTeX{} environment is ended between a \macroname{pageTransition} setting and the next page break. In
+ particular, in \carg{stepcontents}, \macroname{afterstep} should be used (see example \ref{Sec:ExPic}).
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item Setting page transitions works well with \macroname{pause}. Here, \macroname{pause} acts as a page break,
+ i.\,e.\ a different page transition can be set before every occurrence of \macroname{pause}.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Automatic advancing of pages}\label{Sec:PageDuration}
+ If you have loaded a sufficiently new version of the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/hyperref.html}{\code{hyperref}} package (which allows to
+ set \code{pdfpageduration}), then the following command is defined which enables automatic advancing of \code{pdf}
+ pages.
+
+ \present[h]{\commandapp{pageDuration}{\carg{dur}}}\indexmacro{pageDuration}
+ causes pages to be advanced automatically every \carg{dur}
+ seconds. \carg{dur} should be a non-negative fixed-point number.
+
+ \pageDuration{2}\pause
+
+ Depending on the \code{pdf} viewer, this will happen only in full-screen mode.
+
+ See example \ref{Sec:ExFooling} for a demonstration of this effect.
+
+ \stopAdvancing
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The same restrictions as for \concept{page transitions} apply. In particular, the page duration setting is undone by
+ the end of a group, i.\,e.\ it is useless to set the page duration if a \LaTeX{} environment ends before the next page
+ break.
+
+ There is no `neutral' value for \carg{dur} ($0$ means advance as fast as possible). You can make automatic advancing
+ stop by calling \commandapp{pageDuration}{}. \code{texpower} offers the custom command
+ \begin{center}
+ \present[h]{\macroname{stopAdvancing}}\indexmacro{stopAdvancing}
+ \end{center}
+ to do this.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \section{Color management, color emphasis and highlighting}\label{Sec:ColorEmphasis}
+ \TeX Power tries to find out whether you are making a colored document. This is assumed if
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item the \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/color.html}{\code{color}} package has been
+ loaded before the \code{texpower} package or
+ \item a color-related option (see sections \ref{Sec:ColBgdOpt} and \ref{Sec:ColorOptions}) is given to the
+ \code{texpower} package (in this case, the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/color.html}{\code{color}} package is loaded
+ automatically).
+ \end{itemize}
+ If this is the case, \TeX Power installs an extensive color management scheme on top of the kernel of the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/color.html}{\code{color}} package.
+
+ In the following, some new concepts established by this management scheme are explained. Sections \ref{Sec:ColBgdOpt}
+ and \ref{Sec:ColorOptions} list options for color activation, section \ref{Sec:Colorcommands} lists some new
+ highlighting commands, and section \ref{Sec:Colors} gives the names and meaning of \TeX Power's predefined colors.
+
+ Note that parts of the kernel of the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/color.html}{\code{color}} package are overloaded for
+ special purposes (getting driver-independent representations of defined colors to be used by \macroname{colorbetween}
+ (\ref{Sec:MiscColorCommands}), for instance), so it is recommended to execute color definition commands like
+ \macroname{definecolor} \emph{after} the \code{texpower} package has been loaded (see also the next section on
+ \macroname{defineTPcolor}).
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Standard colors}\label{Sec:StdCols}
+ \TeX Power maintains a list of \concept{standard colors} which are recognized and handled by \TeX Power's color
+ management. Some commands like \macroname{dimcolors} (see section \ref{Sec:ColorVariants}) affect \emph{all} standard
+ colors. There are some predefined colors which are in this list from the outset (see section \ref{Sec:Colors}).
+
+ If colors defined by the user are to be recognized by \TeX Power, they have to be included in this list. The easiest
+ way is to use the following command for defining them.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \present{\commandapp{defineTPcolor}{\carg{name}\}\{\carg{model}\}\{\carg{def}}}
+ \indexmacro{defineTPcolor} acts like \macroname{definecolor}
+ \indexmacro{defineTPcolor} from the \code{color} package, but the color
+ \carg{name} is also added to the list of standard colors.
+
+ If you want to make a color a standard color which is defined elsewhere (by a document class, say), you can simply add
+ it to the list of standard colors with the command
+ \present{\commandapp{addTPcolor}{\carg{name}}}\indexmacro{addTPcolor}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Color sets}
+ Every standard color may be defined in one or several \concept{color sets}. There are two fundamentally different
+ types of color set:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[The current color set.] This contains the current definition of every standard color which is actually used at
+ the moment. Every standard color should be defined at least in the current color set. The current color set is not
+ distinguished by a special name.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[Named color sets.] These are `containers' for a full set of color definitions (for the standard colors) which
+ can be activated by respective commands (see below). The color sets are distinguished by their names. Color
+ definitions in a named color set are not currently available, they have to be made available by activating the named
+ color set.
+
+ There are four predefined color sets named \code{whitebg}\indexcode{whitebg},
+ \code{lightbg}\indexcode{lightbg}, \code{darkbg}\indexcode{darkbg},
+ \code{blackbg}\indexcode{blackbg}, each of which contains a full set of (predefined)
+ standard colors customized for a white, light, dark, black background
+ color, respectively.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ There are the following commands for manipulating color sets:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{usecolorset}{\carg{name}}}]\indexmacro{usecolorset}
+ Make the color set named \carg{name} the current color set.
+ \emph{All standard colors in the current color set which are also in color set \carg{name} are overwritten.}
+
+ The standard color \code{textcolor} is set automatically after activating color set \carg{name}.
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{dumpcolorset}{\carg{name}}}]\indexmacro{dumpcolorset}
+ Copy the definitions of \emph{all} standard colors in the
+ current color set into color set named \carg{name}. All standard colors in color set \carg{name} will be
+ overwritten.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ Using \commandapp{defineTPcolor}{\carg{name}} or \commandapp{definecolor}{\carg{name}} will define the color
+ \carg{name} in the \emph{current} color set. To define a color in color set \carg{cset}, use
+ \present{\commandapp[\carg{cset}]{defineTPcolor}{\carg{name}}}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Color sets are not really `\TeX{} objects', but are distinguished by color name suffixes. This means, a color
+ named \code{foo} is automatically in the current color set. Executing \commandapp[\carg{cset}]{defineTPcolor}{foo}
+ means executing \macroname{definecolor} for a specific color the name of which is a combination of \code{foo} and
+ \carg{cset}.
+
+ Consequently, \macroname{usecolorset} and \macroname{dumpcolorset} do not copy color sets as composite objects, but
+ simply all colors the names of which are generated from the list of standard colors.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item The command \commandapp{usecolorset}{\carg{name}} overwrites only those colors which have been defined in color
+ set \carg{name}. If a standard color is defined in the current color set, but not in color set \carg{name}, it is
+ preserved (but if \commandapp{dumpcolorset}{\carg{name}} is executed later, then it will also be copied back into
+ the color set \carg{name}).
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Color Background Options}\label{Sec:ColBgdOpt}
+ For activating the predefined color sets, there are shorthands
+ \macroname{whitebackground}\indexmacro{whitebackground},
+ \macroname{lightbackground}\indexmacro{lightbackground},
+ \macroname{darkbackground}\indexmacro{darkbackground},
+ \macroname{blackbackground}\indexmacro{blackbackground} which execute
+ \macroname{usecolorset} and additionally set the background color to its current value.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ When one of the following options is given, the respective command is executed automatically at the beginning of the
+ document.
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{option: \code{whitebackground} (default)}]
+ \indexpckopt{texpower}{whitebackground}
+ Set standard colors to match a white background color.
+
+ \item[\present{option: \code{lightbackground}}]
+ \indexpckopt{texpower}{lightbackground}
+ Set standard colors to match a light (but not white) background color.
+
+ \item[\present{option: \code{darkbackground}}]
+ \indexpckopt{texpower}{darkbackground}
+ Set standard colors to match a dark (but not black) background color.
+
+ \item[\present{option: \code{blackbackground}}]
+ \indexpckopt{texpower}{blackbackground}
+ Set standard colors to match a black background color.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Color variants}\label{Sec:ColorVariants}
+ In addition to color sets, \TeX Power implements a concept of \concept{color variant}. Currently, every color has three
+ variants: \concept{normal}, \concept{dimmed}, and \concept{enhanced}. The normal variant is what is usually seen, text
+ written in the dimmed variant appears ``faded into the background'' and text written in the enhanced variant appears
+ to ``stick out''.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ When switching variants, for every color one of two cases can occur:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item A \concept{designated color} for this variant has been defined.
+
+ For color \carg{color} the designated name of the \concept{dimmed}
+ \indexcode{dimmed color variant} variant is \code{d\carg{color}}, the designated
+ name of the \concept{enhanced}\indexcode{enhanced color variant} variant is
+ \code{e\carg{color}}.
+
+ If a color by that name exists at the time the variant is switched to, then variant switching is executed by
+ replacing color \carg{color} with the designated color.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item A \concept{designated color} for this variant has not been defined.
+
+ If a color by the designated name does not exist at the time a color variant is switched to, then variant switching
+ is executed by \concept{automatically} calculating the color variant from the original color.
+
+ The method for calculation depends on the variant:
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[dimmed.] The dimmed variant is calculated by \concept{interpolating} between \code{pagecolor} and the color to
+ be dimmed, using the \macroname{colorbetween} command (see \ref{Sec:MiscColorCommands}).
+
+ There is a command \present{\macroname{dimlevel}}\indexmacro{dimlevel}
+ which contains the parameter \carg{weight} given to \macroname{colorbetween}
+ (default: \code{0.7}). This default can be overridden by either redefining
+ \macroname{dimlevel} or giving an alternative \carg{weight} as an optional
+ argument to the color dimming command (see below).
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[enhanced.] The enhanced variant is calculated by \concept{extrapolating} the color to be enhanced (relative to
+ \code{pagecolor}).
+
+ There is a command \present{\macroname{enhancelevel}}\indexmacro{enhancelevel}
+ which gives the \concept{extent} of the extrapolation (default: \code{0.5}).
+ The same holds for overriding this default as for \macroname{dimlevel}.
+ \end{description}
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The following commands switch color variants:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\commandapp[\carg{level}]{dimcolor}{\carg{color}}}]
+ \indexmacro{dimcolor} switches color \carg{color} to the \concept{dimmed}
+ variant. If given, \carg{level} replaces the value of \macroname{dimlevel} in automatic calculation of the dimmed
+ variant (see above).
+
+ \item[\present{\code{\macroname{dimcolors}[\carg{level}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{dimcolors} switches \emph{all} standard colors to the \concept{dimmed}
+ variant. The optional argument \carg{level} acts as for \macroname{dimcolor}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp[\carg{level}]{enhancecolor}{\carg{color}}}]
+ \indexmacro{enhancecolor} switches color \carg{color} to the
+ \concept{enhanced} variant. If given, \carg{level} replaces the value of \macroname{enhancelevel} in automatic
+ calculation of the enhanced variant (see above).
+
+ \item[\present{\code{\macroname{enhancecolors}[\carg{level}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{enhancecolors} switches \emph{all} standard colors to the
+ \concept{enhanceed} variant. The optional argument \carg{level} acts as for \macroname{enhancecolor}.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item While automatic calculation of a \concept{dimmed} color will almost always yield the desired result
+ (interpolating between colors by calculating a weighted average is trivial), automatic calculation of an
+ \concept{enhanced} color by `extrapolating' is tricky at best and will often lead to unsatisfactory results. This is
+ because the idea of making a color `stronger' is very hard to formulate numerically.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ The following effects of the current algorithm should be kept in mind:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item if the background color is light, enhancing a color will make it darker;
+ \item if the background color is dark, enhancing a color will make it lighter;
+ \item sometimes, the numerical values describing an enhanced color have to be \concept{bounded} to avoid exceeding
+ the allowed range, diminishing the enhancing effect. For instance, if the background color is black and the color
+ to be enhanced is a `full-powered' yellow, there is no way of enhancing it by simple numeric calculation.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ As a conclusion, for best results it is recommended to provide custom \code{e} variants of colors to be enhanced. By
+ default, \TeX Power does not provide dedicated enhanced colors, but the file \code{tpsettings.cfg} contains complete
+ sets of enhanced variants for the standard colors in the different color sets, which you can uncomment and
+ experiment with as convenient.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item Currently, switching to a different color variant is done by simply overwriting the current definitions of all
+ standard colors. This means
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item there is no way of `undimming' a color once it has been dimmed,
+ \item a dimmed color can not be enhanced and vice versa.
+ \end{itemize}
+ Maybe this will be solved in a slightly more clever way in subsequent releases of \TeX Power.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ Hence, it is recommended to
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item restrict the \concept{scope} of a global variant switching command like \macroname{dimcolors},
+ \macroname{enhancecolors} or \macroname{dstep} by enlcosing it into a \LaTeX{} group (like \code{\{\dots\}}) or
+ \item use \macroname{dumpcolorset} before the command to save the current definitions of all colors, to be restored
+ with \macroname{usecolorset}.
+
+ At the very beginning of a \macroname{stepwise} command, \TeX Power executes \commandapp{dumpcolorset}{stwcolors},
+ so you can restore the colors anywhere in the argument of \macroname{stepwise} by saying
+ \commandapp{usecolorset}{stwcolors}.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item Some rudimentary attempts are made to keep track of which color is in what variant, to the effect that
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item a color which is not in the normal variant will neither be dimmed nor enhanced;
+ \item when \macroname{usecolorset} overwrites a color with its normal variant, this is registered.
+ \end{itemize}
+ Still, it is easy to get in trouble by mixing variant changes with color set changes (say, if not all standard
+ colors are defined in a color set, or if a color set is dumped when not all colors are in normal variant), so it is
+ recommended not to use or dump color sets when outside the normal variant (unless for special applications like
+ undoing a variant change by \commandapp{usecolorset}{stwcolors}).
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Miscellaneous color management commands}\label{Sec:MiscColorCommands}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\commandapp[\carg{tset}]{replacecolor}{\carg{tcolor}\}[\carg{sset}]\{\carg{scolor}}}]
+ \indexmacro{} makes
+ \carg{tcolor} have the same definition as \carg{scolor} (if \carg{scolor} is defined at all), where \carg{tcolor}
+ and \carg{scolor} are color names as given in the first argument of \macroname{definecolor}. If (one of)
+ \carg{tset} and \carg{sset} are given, the respective color is taken from the respective color set, otherwise from
+ the current color set.
+
+ If \carg{scolor} is not defined (in color set \carg{sset}), \carg{tcolor} is left alone.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp[\carg{weight}]{colorbetween}{\carg{src1}\}\{\carg{src2}\}\{\carg{target}}}]
+ \indexmacro{colorbetween} calculates a
+ `weighted average' between two colors. \carg{src1} and \carg{src2} are the names of the two colors. \carg{weight}
+ (default: $0.5$) is a fixed-point number between $0$ and $1$ giving the `weight' for the interpolation between
+ \carg{src1} and \carg{src2}. \carg{target} is the name to be given to the resulting mixed color.
+
+ If \carg{weight} is $1$, then \carg{target} will be identical to \carg{src1} (up to color model conversions, see
+ below), if \carg{weight} is $0$, then \carg{target} will be identical to \carg{src2}, if \carg{weight} is $0.5$
+ (default), then \carg{target} will be exactly in the middle between \carg{src1} and \carg{src2}.
+
+ \macroname{colorbetween} supports the following color models: \code{rgb}, \code{RGB}, \code{gray}, \code{cmyk},
+ \code{hsb}. If both colors are of the same model, the resulting color is also of the respective model. If
+ \carg{src1} and \carg{src2} are from \emph{different} models, then \carg{target} will \emph{always} be an \code{rgb}
+ color. The only exception is the \code{hsb} color model: As I don't know how to convert \code{hsb} to \code{rgb},
+ mixing \code{hsb} with another color model will always raise an error.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp{mkfactor}{\carg{expr}\}\{\carg{macroname}}}]
+ \indexmacro{mkfactor} is a helper command for automatically
+ generating the fixed point numbers between $0$ and $1$ which are employed by the color calculation commands.
+ \carg{expr} can be any expression which can stand behind \code{*} in expressions allowed by the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/calc.html}{\code{calc}} package (for instance:
+ \code{\commandapp{value}{counter}/\commandapp{value}{maxcounter}} or \macroname{ratio} or whatever).
+ \carg{macroname} should be a valid macro name. \carg{expr} is converted into a fixed-point representation which is
+ then assigned to \carg{macroname}.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{\code{\macroname{vanishcolors}[\carg{color}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{vanishcolors} is similar to the color variant command
+ \macroname{dimcolors}, but instead of dimming colors, all standard colors are replaced by a single color given by
+ the new command \present{\macroname{vanishcolor}} (default: \code{pagecolor}). Hence, the result of calling
+ \macroname{vanishcolors} should be that all text vanishes, as it is written in the background color (this doesn't
+ work with structured backgrounds, of course).
+
+ For getting a color different from the default \code{pagecolor}, you can either redefinine \macroname{vanishcolor}
+ or give an alternative \carg{color} as an optional argument to \macroname{vanishcolors}.
+
+ There is no dedicated command for making a single color vanish. To achieve this, use
+ \commandapp{replacecolor}{\carg{color}\}\{\macroname{vanishcolor}}.
+ \end{description}
+
+
+ \subsection{Color Emphasis and Highlighting}\label{Sec:ColorOptions}
+ \code{texpower} offers some support for text emphasis and highlighting with colors (instead of, say, font
+ changes). These features are enabled by the following options:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{option: \code{coloremph}}]\indexpckopt{texpower}{coloremph}
+ Make \macroname{em} and \macroname{emph} switch colors instead of fonts.
+
+ \item[\present{option: \code{colormath}}]\indexpckopt{texpower}{colormath}
+ Color all mathematical formulae.
+
+ \item[\present{option: \code{colorhighlight}}]\indexpckopt{texpower}{colorhighlight}
+ Make new highlighting and emphasis commands defined by \code{texpower}
+ use colors.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \minisec{Things to pay attention to}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item You need the \code{color} package to use any of the color features.
+
+ \item To implement the options \code{coloremph} and \code{colormath}, it is neccessary to redefine some \LaTeX{}
+ internals. This can lead to problems and incompatibilities with other packages. Use with caution.
+
+ \item If the \code{colorhighlight} option is \emph{not} given, new highlighting and emphasis commands defined by
+ \code{texpower} are realized otherwise. Sometimes, however, there is no good alternative to colors, so different
+ emphasis commands can become disabled or indistinguishable.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item Because of font changes, emphasized or highlighted text can have different dimensions whether or not the options
+ \code{coloremph}, \code{colormath}, and \code{colorhighlight} are set. Prepare for different line and page breaks
+ when changing one of these options.
+
+ \item Color emphasis and highlighting makes use of the predefined standard colors described in section
+ \ref{Sec:Colors}. See sections \ref{Sec:StdCols} to \ref{Sec:ColBgdOpt} for further information on standard colors,
+ color sets, and customization.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{New commands for emphasis and highlighting elements}\label{Sec:Colorcommands}
+ Some things like setting the page or text color, making emphasised text or math colored are done automatically when
+ the respective options are set. There are some additional new commands for creating emphasis and highlighting
+ elements.
+
+ \minisec{Concerning math:}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{origmath}}]\indexmacro{origmath}
+ When the \code{colormath} option is given, \emph{everything} which appears in
+ math mode is colored accordingly. Sometimes, however, math mode is used for something besides mathematical formulae.
+ Some \LaTeX{} commands which internally use math mode (like \code{tabular} or \macroname{textsuperscript}) are
+ redefined accordingly when the \code{colormath} option is given (this is a potential source of trouble; beware of
+ problems\dots).
+
+ If you need to use math mode for something which is not to be colored (like a symbol for \code{itemize}), you can
+ use the \macroname{origmath} command which works exactly like \macroname{ensuremath} but doesn't color its argument.
+ If a nested use of math mode should occur in the argument of \macroname{origmath}, it will again be colored.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Documenting \TeX{} code:}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{code}}]\indexmacro{code}
+ Simple command for typesetting \code{code} (like shell commands).
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{macroname}}]\indexmacro{macroname}
+ For \macroname{macro names}. Like \macroname{code}, but with a \macroname{} in
+ front.
+
+ \item[\present{\commandapp[\carg{opt arg}]{commandapp}{\carg{command}\}\{\carg{arg}}}]
+ \indexmacro{commandapp} For \TeX{} commands. \carg{arg}
+ stands for the command argument, \carg{opt arg} for an optional argument.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{carg}}]\indexmacro{carg}
+ For \carg{macro arguments}.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \minisec{Additional emphasis commands:}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{underl}}]\indexmacro{underl}
+ Additional \underl{emphasis} command. Can be used like \macroname{emph}. Defaults
+ to \textbf{bold face} if the \code{colorhighlight} option is not given.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{concept}}]\indexmacro{concept}
+ Additional \concept{emphasis} command, especially for new concepts. Can be
+ augmented by things like automatic index entry creation. Also defaults to \textbf{bold face} if the
+ \code{colorhighlight} option is not given.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{inactive}}]\indexmacro{inactive}
+ Additional \inactive{emphasis} command, this time for `de-emphasising'. There is
+ no sensible default if the \code{colorhighlight} option is not given, as base \LaTeX{} doesn't offer an appropriate
+ font. In this case, \macroname{inactive} defaults to \macroname{monochromeinactive}, which does nothing.
+
+ You can (re-)define \macroname{monochromeinactive} to provide some sensible behaviour in the absence of colors, for
+ instance striking out if you're using the
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/soul.html}{\code{soul}} package.
+ \end{description}
+
+
+ \minisec{Color Highlighting:}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{present}}]\indexmacro{present}
+ Highlighting command which puts its argument into a \present{box with colored
+ background}. Defaults to an \fbox{\macroname{fbox}} if the \code{colorhighlight} option is not given.
+
+ See section \ref{Sec:displaycustom} for some further highlighting commands.
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Predefined standard colors}\label{Sec:Colors}
+ In previous subsections, it has been mentioned that \TeX Power predefines some standard colors which have appropriate
+ values in the predefined color sets \code{whitebg}, \code{lightbg}, \code{darkbg}, and \code{blackbg} (see sections
+ \ref{Sec:StdCols} to \ref{Sec:ColBgdOpt} for further information on standard colors, color sets, and customization).
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{color: \code{pagecolor}}]\indexcode{pagecolor}
+ Background color of the page. Is set automatically at the beginning of the
+ document if color management is active.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{textcolor}}]\indexcode{textcolor}
+ Color of normal text. Is set automatically at the beginning of the
+ document if color management is active.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{emcolor}}]\indexcode{emcolor}
+ Color used for \emph{emphasis} if the \code{coloremph} option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{altemcolor}}]\indexcode{altemcolor}
+ Color used \emph{for \emph{double} emphasis} if the \code{coloremph} option
+ is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{mathcolor}}]\indexcode{mathcolor}
+ Color used for math $a^2+b^2=c^2$ if the \code{colormath} option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{codecolor}}]\indexcode{codecolor}
+ Color used by the \macroname{code} command if the \code{colorhighlight}
+ option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{underlcolor}}]\indexcode{underlcolor}
+ Color used by the \underl{\macroname{underl} command} if the
+ \code{colorhighlight} option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{conceptcolor}}]\indexcode{conceptcolor}
+ Color used by the \concept{\macroname{concept} command} if the
+ \code{colorhighlight} option is set.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{inactivecolor}}]\indexcode{inactivecolor}
+ Color used by the \inactive{\macroname{inactive} command} if the
+ \code{colorhighlight} option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{presentcolor}}]\indexcode{presentcolor}
+ Color used as background color by the \present{\macroname{present}}
+ command if the \code{colorhighlight} option is set.
+
+ \item[\present{color: \code{highlightcolor}}]\indexcode{highlightcolor}
+ Color used as background color by the
+ \highlightboxed{\macroname{highlightboxed}} and \macroname{highlighttext} commands (see section
+ \ref{Sec:displaycustom}) if the \code{colorhighlight} option is set.
+ \end{description}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}
+{%
+ \newslide
+
+ \whitebackground
+
+ \minisec{Color tables}
+
+ \newlength{\widthfirstcol}
+ \settowidth{\widthfirstcol}{\textbf{\footnotesize white background}}
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{|p{\widthfirstcol}*{3}{|p{2cm}}|}
+ \cline{2-4}
+ \multicolumn{1}{l|}{\textbf{\footnotesize white background}}&standard&dimmed&enhanced\\\hline
+ \code{textcolor}&\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{emcolor}&\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{altemcolor}&\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{mathcolor}&\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{codecolor}&\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{underlcolor}&\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{conceptcolor}&\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{inactivecolor}&\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{presentcolor}&\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{highlightcolor}&\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \lightbackground
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{|p{\widthfirstcol}*{3}{|p{2cm}}|}
+ \cline{2-4}
+ \multicolumn{1}{l|}{\textbf{\footnotesize light background}}&standard&dimmed&enhanced\\\hline
+ \code{textcolor}&\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{emcolor}&\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{altemcolor}&\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{mathcolor}&\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{codecolor}&\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{underlcolor}&\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{conceptcolor}&\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{inactivecolor}&\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{presentcolor}&\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{highlightcolor}&\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \darkbackground
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{|p{\widthfirstcol}*{3}{|p{2cm}}|}
+ \cline{2-4}
+ \multicolumn{1}{l|}{\textbf{\footnotesize dark background}}&standard&dimmed&enhanced\\\hline
+ \code{textcolor}&\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{emcolor}&\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{altemcolor}&\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{mathcolor}&\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{codecolor}&\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{underlcolor}&\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{conceptcolor}&\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{inactivecolor}&\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{presentcolor}&\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{highlightcolor}&\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \blackbackground
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{|p{\widthfirstcol}*{3}{|p{2cm}}|}
+ \cline{2-4}
+ \multicolumn{1}{l|}{\textbf{\footnotesize black background}}&standard&dimmed&enhanced\\\hline
+ \code{textcolor}&\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{textcolor}\textcolor{textcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{emcolor}&\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{emcolor}\textcolor{emcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{altemcolor}&\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{altemcolor}\textcolor{altemcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{mathcolor}&\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{mathcolor}\textcolor{mathcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{codecolor}&\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{codecolor}\textcolor{codecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{underlcolor}&\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{underlcolor}\textcolor{underlcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{conceptcolor}&\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{conceptcolor}\textcolor{conceptcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{inactivecolor}&\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{inactivecolor}\textcolor{inactivecolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{presentcolor}&\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{presentcolor}\textcolor{presentcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \code{highlightcolor}&\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\dimcolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}&\enhancecolor{highlightcolor}\textcolor{highlightcolor}{\rule{2cm}{\heightof{l}}}\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+}{}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}{\lightbackground}{}
+
+ %-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ %
+ \section{Structured page backgrounds and panels}\label{Sec:PageBackPanel}
+ \subsection{Structured page backgrounds}
+
+ \present{\commandapp[\carg{options}]{backgroundstyle}{\carg{style}}}
+ \indexmacro{backgroundstyle}
+ is the central command for structured page backgrounds. It works like
+ \macroname{pagestyle} and other commands of this type. This means
+ \carg{style} is a symbolic name specifying the general method by which the
+ page background is constructed.
+
+ The detailed construction is influenced by parameters which can be set in
+ \carg{options}. If given, the optional parameter \carg{options} should
+ contain a list of settings in ``keyval'' manner. The keyval method
+ % (which is used by the \includegraphics command from the graphicx package,
+ %for instance)
+ is based on associating a symbolic name with every parameter. \carg{options}
+ is then a comma-separated list of parameter settings of the form
+ \carg{name}=\carg{value}, where \carg{name} is the symbolic name of the
+ parameter to be set and \carg{value} is the value it is to be set to.
+
+ Not every \carg{style} evaluates every parameter. In the following, a
+ description of all styles, together with lists of the parameters employed, is
+ given. It is followed by a list of all parameters. Note that some parameter
+ names internally access the same parameter. For instance, parameters
+ \code{startcolor} and \code{startcolordef} both set the start color of a color
+ gradient. In case of conflict, the last setting in the list \carg{options}
+ will prevail. It is noted in the list of parameters which other parameters
+ are overwritten.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \carg{style} may have one of the following values:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{none}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{none}%
+ No background. This means the page background is whatever it would be if
+ \macroname{backgroundstyle} wasn't used at all (for instance, a plain area
+ of color pagecolor if one of the color options has been given).
+
+ Parameters used: none.
+
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{plain}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{plain}%
+ Plain background. This means the page background is whatever it would be if
+ \macroname{backgroundstyle} wasn't used at all (as for no background). In
+ addition to background style \code{none}, the background style \code{plain}
+ does produce panel backgrounds. The colors and dimensions of a \code{top
+ panel}, \code{bottom panel}, \code{left panel}, and \code{right panel} can
+ be specified.
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Parameters used: \code{hpanels}, \code{autopanels}, \code{toppanelcolor},
+ \code{bottompanelcolor}, \code{leftpanelcolor}, \code{rightpanelcolor},
+ \code{toppanelcolordef}, \code{bottompanelcolordef}, \code{leftpanelcolordef},
+ \code{rightpanelcolordef}, \code{toppanelheight}, \code{bottompanelheight},
+ \code{leftpanelwidth}, \code{rightpanelwidth}.
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{vgradient}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{vgradient}%
+ Vertical gradient. The page background is constructed using the
+ \macroname{vgradrule}\indexmacro{vgradrule} command. In addition to the
+ usual parameters of gradient rules, the vgradient background style allows
+ to leave space for headers, footers, or panels. The colors and dimensions
+ of a \code{top panel}, \code{bottom panel}, \code{left panel}, and
+ \code{right panel} can be specified. The gradient rule fills the
+ rectangular space left between the specified panels.
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Parameters used: \code{stripes}, \code{firstgradprogression},
+ \code{startcolor}, \code{startcolordef}, \code{endcolor}, \code{endcolordef}
+ in addition to the parameters used for style \code{plain}.
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{hgradient}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{hgradient}%
+ Horizontal gradient. The page background is constructed using the
+ \macroname{hgradrule}\indexmacro{hgradrule} command. See the description of
+ \macroname{vgradient} concerning panels.
+
+ Parameters used: See list for style \code{vgradient}.
+
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{doublevgradient}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{doublevgradient}%
+ Double vertical gradient. The page background is constructed using the
+ \macroname{dblvgradrule}\indexmacro{dblvgradrule} command. See the
+ description of \macroname{vgradient} concerning panels.
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Parameters used: \code{gradmidpoint}, \code{secondgradprogression},
+ \code{midcolor}, \code{midcolordef} in addition to the parameters used for
+ style \code{vgradient} (and \code{plain}).
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ \item[\present{Style: \code{doublehgradient}}]
+ \indexmacroopt{backgroundstyle}{doublehgradient}%
+ Double horizontal gradient. The page background is constructed using the
+ \macroname{dblhgradrule}\indexmacro{dblhgradrule} command. See the description of
+ \macroname{vgradient} concerning panels.
+
+ Parameters used: See list for \code{doublevgradient}.
+
+ \end{description}
+ Now, a list of all parameters and their meaning. In the following,
+ \begin{itemize}\setlength{\itemsep}{0cm}
+ \item[\carg{n}] denotes a (calc expression for a) nonnegative integer
+ \item[\carg{i}] denotes a (calc expression for an) integer
+ \item[\carg{r}] denotes a fixed-point number
+ \item[\carg{l}] denotes a (calc expression for a) length
+ \item[\carg{c}] denotes the name of a defined color
+ \item[\carg{cm}] denotes a valid color model name (in the sense of the color
+ package)
+ \item[\carg{cd}] denotes a valid color definition (in the sense of the color
+ package) wrt a given \carg{cm} parameter
+ \item[\carg{t}] denotes a `truth value' in the sense of the ifthen package:
+ either true or false. As usual for keyval, if =\carg{t} is omitted, the
+ default true is assumed.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{stripes=}\carg{n}}] Set the \carg{stripes}
+ parameter of gradient rules to \carg{n}.\\
+ Default: \macroname{bgndstripes}. \\
+ Used by: \code{vgradient}, \code{hgradient}, \code{doublevgradient},
+ \code{doublehgradient}.
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{gradmidpoint=}\carg{r}}] Set the \carg{midpoint}
+ parameter of double gradient rules to \carg{r}.\\
+ Default: \macroname{bgndgradmidpoint}\\
+ Used by: doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{firstgradprogression=}\carg{i}}]
+ Set the first gradient progression of gradient rules to \carg{i}.\\
+ Default: \macroname{bgndfirstgradprogression}\\
+ Used by: vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{secondgradprogression=}\carg{i}}]
+ Set the second gradient progression of double gradient rules to \carg{i}.\\
+ Default: \macroname{bgndsecondgradprogression}\\
+ Used by: doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{startcolor=}\carg{c}}]
+ Set the \carg{startcolor} parameter of gradient rules to \carg{c}.\\
+ Default: If neither startcolor nor startcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndstartcolor is used as startcolor.\\
+ Used by: vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: startcolordef
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{startcolordef=\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}}]
+ Set the \carg{startcolor} parameter of gradient rules to color foo, which
+ is obtained by \macroname{definecolor\{foo\}\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}.
+ Note that the two pairs of curly braces are mandatory.\\
+ Default: If neither startcolor nor startcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndstartcolor is used as startcolor.\\
+ Used by: vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: startcolor
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{endcolor=}\carg{c}}]
+ Set the \carg{endcolor} parameter of gradient rules to \carg{c}.\\
+ Default: If neither endcolor nor endcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndendcolor is used as endcolor.\\
+ Used by: vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: endcolordef
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{endcolordef=\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}}]
+ Set the \carg{endcolor} parameter of gradient rules to color foo, which
+ is obtained by \macroname{definecolor\{foo\}\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}.
+ Note that the two pairs of curly braces are mandatory.\\
+ Default: If neither endcolor nor endcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndendcolor is used as endcolor.\\
+ Used by: vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: endcolor
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{midcolor=}\carg{c}}]
+ Set the \carg{midcolor} parameter of double gradient rules to \carg{c}.\\
+ Default: If neither midcolor nor midcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndmidcolor is used as midcolor.\\
+ Used by: doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: midcolordef
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{midcolordef=\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}}]
+ Set the \carg{midcolor} parameter of double gradient rules to color foo,
+ which is obtained by \macroname{definecolor\{foo\}\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}.
+ Note that the two pairs of curly braces are mandatory.\\
+ Default: If neither midcolor nor midcolordef is given, the color
+ bgndmidcolor is used as midcolor.\\
+ Used by: doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: midcolor
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{hpanels=}\carg{t}}]
+ Specifies the `direction' of panels produced. hpanels=true means the top
+ and bottom panel span the full width of the screen. In the space left in
+ the middle, the left panel, the background itself, and the right panel are
+ displayed. hpanels=false means the left and right panel span the full
+ height of the screen. In the space left in the middle, the top panel,
+ the background itself, and the bottom panel are
+ displayed.\\
+ Default: hpanels=true is the default for plain, hgradient and
+ doublehgradient. hpanels=false is the default for vgradient and
+ doublevgradient.\\
+ Used by: plain, vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{autopanels=}\carg{t}}]
+ Specifies whether the default values of the parameters toppanelheight,
+ bottompanelheight, leftpanelwidth, rightpanelwidth should be calculated
+ automatically from the contents of declared panels. The automatism used
+ is analogous to that of \macroname{DeclarePanel*}. Note that for panel
+ arrangement, both the width and the height of all declared panels are
+ overwritten. If you don't want this, calculate the panel parameters
+ yourself and set autopanels=false. In this case, the current panel
+ dimensions of declared panels are used as defaults for toppanelheight,
+ bottompanelheight, leftpanelwidth, rightpanelwidth.\\
+ Default: true.\\
+ Used by: plain, vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{\carg{pos}panelheight=}\carg{l}}]
+ Set the height/width of the space left for the top / bottom / left / right
+ panel to \carg{l}. Note that the remaining dimensions of panels, for
+ instance the width of the top panel, are always calculated automatically,
+ depending on the setting of the hpanels parameter.\\
+ Default: If a respective panel has been defined using
+ \macroname{DeclarePanel}, the default used depends on the setting of the
+ autopanels parameter. If autopanels=true, the correct dimension is
+ calculated from the contents of the panel. The respective one of
+ \macroname{toppanelheight}, \macroname{bottompanelheight},
+ \macroname{leftpanelwidth}, \macroname{rightpanelwidth} is overwritten
+ with the result. If autopanels=false, then the respective setting of
+ \macroname{toppanelheight}, \macroname{bottompanelheight},
+ \macroname{leftpanelwidth}, \macroname{rightpanelwidth} is taken as the
+ default. If a panel has not been declared, the appropriate one of
+ \macroname{bgndtoppanelheight}, \macroname{bgndbottompanelheight},
+ \macroname{bgndleftpanelwidth}, \macroname{bgndrightpanelwidth} is used
+ as default. \\
+ Used by: plain, vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{\carg{pos}panelcolor=}\carg{c}}]
+ Set the color of the space left for the top / bottom / left / right panel
+ to \carg{c}.\\
+ Default: The standard colors toppanelcolor, bottompanelcolor, leftpanelcolor,
+ rightpanelcolor are used as defaults.\\
+ Used by: plain, vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: toppanelcolordef bottompanelcolordef leftpanelcolordef
+ rightpanelcolordef
+
+ \item[\present{Option: \code{\carg{pos}panelcolordef=\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}}]
+ Set the color of the space left for the top / bottom / left / right panel
+ to color foo, which is obtained by
+ \macroname{definecolor\{foo\}\{\carg{cm}\}\{\carg{cd}\}}.
+ Note that the two pairs of curly braces are mandatory. \\
+ Default: See the description of top/bottom/left/rightpanelcolor.\\
+ Used by: plain, vgradient, hgradient, doublevgradient, doublehgradient\\
+ Overwrites: toppanelcolor bottompanelcolor leftpanelcolor rightpanelcolor
+
+ \end{description}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Panel-specific user level commands}
+ If you're using a package that has it own panel (as
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfscreen.html}%
+ {\code{pdfscreen}}) don't even consider using the following.
+
+ \present{\commandapp[\carg{name}]{DeclarePanel}{\carg{pos}\}\{\carg{contents}}}
+ \indexmacro{DeclarePanel}
+ declares the contents \carg{contents} of the panel at position \carg{pos}.
+ Afterwards, on every page the panel contents are set in a parbox of
+ dimensions and position specified by \carg{pos}panelwidth,
+ \carg{pos}panelheight, \macroname{panelmargin} and \carg{pos}panelshift for
+ top and bottom panels and \carg{pos}panelraise for left and right panels. The
+ parbox is constructed anew on every page, so all changes influencing panel
+ contents or parameters (like a \macroname{thepage} in the panel contents) are
+ respected.
+
+ The panel contents are set in color \carg{pos}paneltextcolor. There is
+ another standard color \carg{pos}panelcolor, which is however not activated by
+ \macroname{DeclarePanel} but by selecting an appropriate background style.
+
+ Note that \macroname{backgroundstyle} must be called after the panel
+ declaration.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ Pages are constructed as follows: first the page background, then
+ the panels, and then the page contents. \emph{Hence, panels overwrite the background
+ and the page contents overwrite the panels.} The user is supposed to make sure
+ themselves that there is enough space left on the page for the panels
+ (document class specific settings). The panel declaration is global. A panel
+ can be `undeclared' by using \macroname{DeclarePanel\{\carg{pos}\}\{\}}.
+
+ If the optional argument \carg{name} is given, the panel contents and
+ (calculated) size will also be stored under the given name, to be restored
+ later with \macroname{restorepanels}. This is nice for switching between
+ different sets of panels.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ For an example look at the files \code{simplepanel.tex} and \code{panelexample.tex}.
+ A very simple example follows:
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+\DeclarePanel{left}{%
+ \textsf{Your Name}
+
+ \vfill
+
+ \button{\Acrobatmenu{PrevPage}}{Back}
+ \button{\Acrobatmenu{NextPage}}{Next} }
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ \newslide
+
+ There is a starred version which will (try to) automatically calculate the
+ \indexmacro{DeclarePanel*} `flexible' dimension of each panel. For top and
+ bottom panels this is the height, for left and right panels this is the width.
+ Make sure the panel contents are `valid' at the time \macroname{DeclarePanel*}
+ is called so the calculation can be carried out in a meaningful way.
+
+ While the automatic calculation of the height of top and bottom panels is
+ trivial (using \macroname{settoheight}), there is a sophisticated procedure
+ for calculating a `good' width for the parbox containing the panel. Owing to
+ limitations set by TeX, there are certain limits to the sophistication of the
+ procedure.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ For instance, any `whatsits' (specials (like color changes), file
+ accesses (like \macroname{label}), or hyper anchors)
+ or rules which are inserted directly in the vertical list of the parbox
+ `block' the analysis, so the procedure can't `see' past them (starting at the
+ bottom of the box) when analysing the contents of the parbox.
+
+ The user should make sure such items are set in horizontal mode (by using
+ \macroname{leavevmode} or enclosing stuff in boxes). Furthermore, only
+ overfull and underfull hboxes which occur while setting the parbox are
+ considered when judging which width is `best'. This will reliably make the
+ width large enough to contain `wide' objects like tabulars, logos and buttons,
+ but might not give optimal results for justified text. vboxes occurring
+ directly in the vbox are ignored.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ Note further that hboxes with fixed width
+ (made by \macroname{hbox} to...) which occur directly in the vbox may disturb
+ the procedure, because the fixed width cannot be recovered. These hboxes will
+ be reformatted with the width of the vbox, generating an extremely large
+ badness, unsettling the calculation of maximum badness. To avoid this such
+ hboxes should be either contained in a vbox or set in horizontal mode with
+ appropriate glue at the end.
+
+ \newslide
+
+ \subsection{Navigation buttons}
+ The following provides only the very basics for navigation buttons. If you're
+ using a package that has it's own naviagtion buttons (as
+ \href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfscreen.html}%
+ {\code{pdfscreen}}) don't even consider using the following.
+
+ \present{\macroname{button\{\carg{navcommand}\}\{\carg{text}\}}}
+ \indexmacro{button}
+ creates a button labelled \carg{text} which executes \carg{navcommand} when
+ pressed. The command takes four optional arguments (left out above):
+ \carg{width}, \carg{height}, \carg{depth} and \carg{alignment} in that order.
+ \carg{navcommand} can be for instance \commandapp{Acrobatmenu}{\carg{command}} or
+ \commandapp{hyperlink}{\carg{target}} (note that \carg{navcommand} should take
+ one (more) argument specifying the sensitive area which is provided by
+ \macroname{button}). If given, the optional parameters \carg{width}, \carg{height}, and
+ \carg{depth} give the width, height and depth, respectively, of the framed
+ area comprising the button (excluding the shadow, but including the
+ frame). Default are the `real' width, height and depth, respectively, of
+ \carg{text}, plus allowance for the frame. If given, the optional parameter
+ \carg{alignment} (one of l,c,r) gives the alignment of \carg{text} inside the
+ button box (makes sense only if \carg{width} is given).
+
+ The button appearence is defined by some configurable button parameters:
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[\present{\macroname{buttonsep}}]
+ \indexmacro{buttonsep}
+ Space between button label and border. (Default: \macroname{fboxsep})
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{buttonrule}}]
+ \indexmacro{buttonrule}
+ Width of button frame. (Default: \code{0pt})
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{buttonshadowhshift}}]
+ \indexmacro{buttonshadowhshift}
+ Horizontal displacement of button shadow. (Default: 0.3\macroname{fboxsep})
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{buttonshadowvshift}}]
+ \indexmacro{buttonshadowvshift}
+ Vertical displacement of button shadow. (Default: 0.3\macroname{fboxsep})
+ \end{description}
+
+ A list of predefined buttons follows:
+ \begin{description}
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{backpagebutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{backpagebutton}
+ Last subpage of previous page.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{backstepbutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{backstepbutton}
+ Previous step.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{gobackbutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{gobackbutton}
+ `Undo action' (go back to whatever was before last action).
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{nextstepbutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{nextstepbutton}
+ Next step.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{nextpagebutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{nextpagebutton}
+ First subpage of next page.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{nextfullpagebutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{nextfullpagebutton}
+ Last subpage of next page.
+
+ \item[\present{\macroname{fullscreenbutton[\carg{width}]}}]
+ \indexmacro{fullscreenbutton}
+ Toggle fullscreen mode.
+
+ \end{description}
+
+\clearpage
+\printindex
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `manual.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/mathexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/mathexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..64a54d2d0a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/mathexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,246 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `mathexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `mathexample,mathexample-src,end')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{mathexample.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: mathexample.tex
+%
+% Math example for the package texpower.sty.
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be processed with
+%
+% dvips -Ppdf -j0 mathexample
+%
+% afterwards processing the resulting ps file with
+%
+% distill mathexample.ps
+%
+% (The syntax is for a unix system with tetex 1.0 and distiller 3. Modify appropriately for other configurations.)
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 19, 2000: Using \bstep instead of \boxedsteps.
+%
+% v0.0.3 Apr 27, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+% v0.0.4 May 24, 2000: texpower 0.0.8 now supports equation numbers in the argument of \stepwise, so align* was
+% changed to align.
+%
+
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Enable all color emphasis and highlighting options. Use white background and slifonts.
+
+\PassOptionsToPackage{coloremph,colormath,colorhighlight,whitebackground}{texpower}
+
+% Input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+
+\usepackage{tpslifonts}
+
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower math example}}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Packages and Preamble settings individual for this example.
+
+% We write some aligned equations.
+
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+% Make nested braces grow.
+\delimitershortfall-1sp
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: An Aligned Equation}\label{Sec:ExEq}
+% In the following, an aligned system of equations is built incrementally. We use the custom command \liststepwise to
+% avoid glitches in vertical spacing.
+%
+\liststepwise%
+{%
+ %
+ % This is just for compressing the equations so they can be squeezed on one slide.
+ %
+ \fontsize{7.8pt}{9pt}\selectfont
+ \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{0}%
+ \setlength{\arraycolsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\belowdisplayskip}{0pt}%
+ %
+ % \highlightboxed will be used for underlaying some formulas with color. To minimize overlap, the width of the outer
+ % frame is reduced.
+ \setlength{\highlightboxsep}{1pt}%
+ %
+ \begin{align}
+ \lefteqn
+ {%
+ \min
+ \left(
+ % The nested braces are filled `from outer to inner'. This means nesting a lot of steps inside each other...
+ % The outermost brace is displayed from the outset.
+ % The first step (which follows right here) displays the next inner brace (the first argument of \min), filled
+ % with an almost `empty' array (apart from one comma and some dots).
+ % \bstep is used to get appropriate white space when the step is not yet active.
+ \bstep
+ {\max
+ \left(
+ \begin{array}{l}
+ % The next two steps fill in the lines of the array.
+ \bstep{\min\left(F'(x),\min\left(F_1(x),G_1(y)\right)\right)},\\[-2ex]
+ \vdots\\
+ \bstep{\min\left(F'(x),\min\left(F_n(x),G_n(y)\right)\right)}
+ \end{array}
+ \right)
+ },
+ % After the first brace is filled, the next step provides the second argument of \min.
+ \bstep{\min\left(G_i(y),H_i(z)\right)}
+ \right)
+ }
+ &
+ % The next couple of steps will create the remaining lines of the aligned equations. These need to be
+ % insubstantial (as is the default for \liststepwise), because & can't go in a box.
+ % As a consequence, the horizontal alignment cannot kick in until the last step is performed. This would make the
+ % alignment `flicker' sidewise.
+ % So we have to bite the bullet and duplicate the widest entry here (invisibly), so that the horizontal alignment
+ % is constant during all steps. *sigh*
+ \phantom
+ {%
+ {}=
+ \min
+ \left(
+ F'(x),
+ \min
+ \left(
+ \max
+ \left(
+ \begin{array}{l}
+ \min\left(F_1(x),\min\left(G_1(y),G_i(y)\right)\right),\\[-1.5ex]
+ \vdots\\[-.5ex]
+ \min\left(F_n(x),\min\left(G_n(y),G_i(y)\right)\right)
+ \end{array}
+ \right),
+ H_i(z)
+ \right)
+ \right)
+ }
+ % The next step displays two lines at a time, but incompletely, i.e. some parts are missing (which are inside
+ % nested calls of \bstep).
+ % This way, it is demonstrated how the arguments of the nested \min's are reordered.
+ \step
+ {%
+ \\
+ &=
+ \max
+ \left(
+ % The macro \activatestep is used by \stepwise to `wrap' the argument of a \bstep command at the _first_ time
+ % it appears.
+ % Usually, it does nothing. Now, we redefine it to highlight its background, so it is easier to spot the
+ % places where the additional arguments were inserted.
+ \let\activatestep\highlightboxed
+ \begin{array}{l}
+ \min
+ \left(
+ % The inner \bstep's display the missing arguments, which are completely identical in both lines.
+ % It is intended that all the missing arguments appear at the same time, so \rebstep is used for the
+ % remaining arguments which have been left out.
+ \min\left(\bstep{F'(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{F_1(x),G_1(y)}\right)\right),\min\left(G_i(y),H_i(z)\right)
+ \right),\\[-2ex]
+ \vdots\\[-1ex]
+ \min
+ \left(
+ \min\left(\rebstep{F'(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{F_n(x),G_n(y)}\right)\right),\min\left(G_i(y),H_i(z)\right)
+ \right)
+ \end{array}
+ \right)
+ \\
+ &=
+ \max
+ \left(
+ \let\activatestep\highlightboxed
+ \begin{array}{l}
+ \min
+ \left(
+ \min\left(
+ % Here are the remaining arguments of \min which are all to be displayed in one step (together with
+ % those from the previous line).
+ \rebstep{F'(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{F_1(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{G_1(y)},G_i(y)\right)\right)
+ \right),
+ H_i(z)
+ \right),\\[-2.5ex]
+ \vdots\\[-1.5ex]
+ \min
+ \left(
+ \min\left(
+ \rebstep{F'(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{F_n(x)},\min\left(\rebstep{G_n(y)},G_i(y)\right)\right)
+ \right),
+ H_i(z)
+ \right)
+ \end{array}
+ \right)
+ }
+ \step
+ {%
+ \\
+ &=
+ \min
+ \left(
+ F'(x),
+ \min
+ \left(
+ \max
+ \left(
+ \begin{array}{l}
+ \min\left(F_1(x),\min\left(G_1(y),G_i(y)\right)\right),\\[-1.5ex]
+ \vdots\\[-.5ex]
+ \min\left(F_n(x),\min\left(G_n(y),G_i(y)\right)\right)
+ \end{array}
+ \right),
+ H_i(z)
+ \right)
+ \right)
+ }
+ \end{align}
+ }%
+ \newslide
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `mathexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/panelexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/panelexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..75a83b7e7a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/panelexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,313 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `panelexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `panelexample')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{panelexample.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: panelexample.tex
+%
+% Example for the panel facilities of TeXPower.
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When
+% using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be converted to pdf afterwards (using dvips+distill/ps2pdf or
+% dvipdf, for instance).
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with
+% Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Author: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.1 Nov 14, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.2 May 02, 2003: English version.
+%
+
+%------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Enable all color emphasis and highlighting options. Use white
+% background and slifonts.
+
+\PassOptionsToPackage{coloremph,colormath,colorhighlight,whitebackground}
+{texpower}
+
+% Input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+
+\usepackage{tpslifonts}
+
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower panel example}}
+
+%------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Settings individual for this example.
+
+\renewcommand{\buttonsep}{2pt}
+\renewcommand{\buttonshadowhshift}{1pt}
+\renewcommand{\buttonshadowvshift}{-1pt}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+% The mps extension isn't supported out-of-the-box for latex+dvips
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}{%
+\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.mps}}{}
+
+\newcounter{typed}
+
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\storehead}[3]
+{%
+ \global\let\@typed=\empty
+ \setcounter{typed}{0}%
+ \def\@typeto{#2}%
+ \let\type@next=\@typeit
+ \type@next#3\@nil
+ \global\let#1=\@typed
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@typeit}[1]
+{%
+ \ifx\@nil#1
+ \else
+ \stepcounter{typed}%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{typed}>\@typeto}
+ {\let\type@next=\@gobbletail}
+ {\g@addto@macro\@typed{#1}}%
+ \expandafter\type@next
+ \fi
+}
+
+\long\def\@gobbletail#1\@nil{}
+
+\newcounter{i}
+
+\newsavebox\logobox
+\newsavebox\hookbox
+
+\makeatother
+
+\mklength{\slidetopmargin}{\ht\logobox*\ratio{1cm}{\semcm}}
+
+\newlength{\buttonwidth}
+
+\newcommand{\mybutton}[2]
+{\raisebox{\depth}{\makebox[\buttonwidth][l]{\button[\buttonwidth]{#1}{#2}}}}
+
+\slidesonlyfalse\notestrue\noxcomment
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Because the Context Support Macros are loaded at BeginDocument
+\savebox\hookbox{\includegraphics[width=1cm]{fig-2}}
+\makeatletter
+\savebox\logobox{\includegraphics[width=\strip@pt\paperwidth truept]{fig-3}}
+\makeatother
+\savebox\logobox{\raisebox{0cm}[\height-2ex][0pt]{\rlap{\usebox{\logobox}}}}
+
+\pageDuration{0.01}
+
+\begingroup
+\loop
+ \ifnum\value{i}<76
+ \stepcounter{i}%
+ \storehead{\partialtext}{\value{i}}
+ {%
+ Panels\space automatically\space adapt\space to\space the\space
+ size\space of\space their\space contents.\par
+ They\space can\space be\space placed
+ }%
+ \DeclarePanel{left}
+ {%
+ \leavevmode\scriptsize
+ \mbox{\usebox{\logobox}}
+
+ {\bfseries Stephan Lehmke
+
+ Lehr\-stuhl Informatik~I}
+
+ \vfill
+
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \rule{\linewidth}{\fboxrule}
+
+ \nointerlineskip\kern1ex
+ \partialtext
+
+ \nointerlineskip\kern1ex
+ \rule{\linewidth}{\fboxrule}
+
+ \vfill
+
+ \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\linewidth>2cm}}
+ {\setlength{\buttonwidth}{.5\linewidth-.5ex}}
+ {\setlength{\buttonwidth}{\linewidth}}%
+ %
+ \lineskip1ex\relax
+ %
+ \mybutton{\Acrobatmenu{FirstPage}}{Start}\hfill
+ \mybutton{\Acrobatmenu{LastPage}}{End}\hfill
+ \mybutton{\Acrobatmenu{PrevPage}}{Prev}\hfill
+ \mybutton{\Acrobatmenu{NextPage}}{Next}
+
+ \mbox{\usebox{\hookbox}}
+ }%
+
+ \backgroundstyle{plain}
+
+ \mklength{\slideleftmargin}{\leftpanelwidth*\ratio{1cm}{\semcm}+.5cm}
+ \setlength{\slidewidth}{\paperwidth-\slideleftmargin-\sliderightmargin}
+
+ \begin{slide}
+ \makeslidetitle{\TeX Power Example: panels}
+ \end{slide}
+
+\repeat
+\endgroup
+
+\DeclarePanel*{left}{}
+\setcounter{i}{0}
+
+\setlength{\buttonwidth}{1.5cm}
+
+\DeclarePanel*{bottom}
+{%
+ \leavevmode\scriptsize\smash{\usebox{\hookbox}}\hfill%
+ \mybutton{\Acrobatmenu{FirstPage}}{Start}~%
+ \mybutton{\Acrobatmenu{LastPage}}{End}~%
+ \mybutton{\Acrobatmenu{PrevPage}}{Prev}~%
+ \mybutton{\Acrobatmenu{NextPage}}{Next}%
+}
+
+\mklength{\slidebottommargin}{\bottompanelheight*\ratio{1cm}{\semcm}+.5cm}
+
+\begingroup
+\loop
+ \ifnum\value{i}<24
+ \stepcounter{i}%
+ \storehead{\partialtext}{\value{i}}
+ {%
+ on\space any\space side\space of\space the\space page.
+ }%
+ \DeclarePanel{top}
+ {%
+ \leavevmode\scriptsize\parskip0pt\relax
+ \mbox{\usebox{\logobox}}
+
+ \medskip
+
+ \parbox[t]{\widthof{\bfseries Lehrstuhl Informatik~I}}
+ {\bfseries Stephan Lehmke\\ Lehrstuhl Informatik~I}\quad
+ \parbox[t]{\linewidth-\widthof{\bfseries Lehrstuhl Informatik~I}-3cm}
+ {%
+ Panels\space automatically\space adapt\space to\space the\space
+ size\space of\space their\space contents.\par
+ They\space can\space be\space placed
+ \partialtext
+ }
+ }%
+
+ \backgroundstyle{plain}
+
+ \mklength{\slidetopmargin}{\toppanelheight*\ratio{1cm}{\semcm}+.5cm}
+ \setlength{\slideheight}{\paperheight-\slidetopmargin-\slidebottommargin}
+
+ \begin{slide}
+ \small\makeslidetitle{\TeX Power Example: panels}
+ \end{slide}
+
+\repeat
+\endgroup
+
+\DeclarePanel*{top}{}
+\setlength{\slideheight}{\paperheight-\slidetopmargin-\slidebottommargin}
+
+\setcounter{i}{0}
+
+\makeatletter
+\savebox\logobox
+{%
+ \raisebox{0cm}[\height-1.5ex][0pt]
+ {\llap{\includegraphics[width=\strip@pt\paperwidth truept-1cm]{fig-3}}}%
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\mklength{\slidetopmargin}{\ht\logobox*\ratio{1cm}{\semcm}}
+
+\begingroup
+\loop
+ \ifnum\value{i}<146
+ \stepcounter{i}%
+ \storehead{\partialtext}{\value{i}}
+ {%
+ Normally,\space automatic\space line\space breaks\space are\space
+ not\space needed\space inside\space panels,\space but\space
+ it\space is\space nice\space that\space the\space size\space
+ automatically\space adapts\space to\space the\space size\space
+ of\space logos,\space buttons\space etc.
+ }%
+ \DeclarePanel{right}
+ {%
+ \leavevmode\scriptsize
+ \hspace*{\fill}\mbox{\usebox{\logobox}}\hspace*{-1.5ex}
+
+ \medskip
+
+ {\bfseries Stephan Lehmke
+
+ Lehr\-stuhl Informatik~I}
+
+ \vfill
+
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \rule{\linewidth}{\fboxrule}
+
+ \nointerlineskip\kern1ex
+ Panels\space automatically\space adapt\space to\space the\space
+ size\space of\space their\space contents.\par
+ They\space can\space be\space placed on\space any\space side\space
+ of\space the\space page.
+
+ \partialtext
+ }%
+
+ \backgroundstyle[hpanels=false]{plain}
+
+ \mklength{\sliderightmargin}{\rightpanelwidth*\ratio{1cm}{\semcm}+.5cm}
+ \setlength{\slidewidth}{\paperwidth-\slideleftmargin-\sliderightmargin}
+
+ \begin{slide}
+ \makeslidetitle{\TeX Power Example: panels}
+ \end{slide}
+
+\repeat
+\endgroup
+
+\hypersetup{pdfpageduration={}}
+
+
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `panelexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/parexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/parexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bbdbf49134f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/parexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `parexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `parexample,parexample-src,end')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{parexample.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: parexample.tex
+%
+% Paragraph example for the package texpower.sty.
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be processed with
+%
+% dvips -Ppdf -j0 parexample
+%
+% afterwards processing the resulting ps file with
+%
+% distill parexample.ps
+%
+% (The syntax is for a unix system with tetex 1.0 and distiller 3. Modify appropriately for other configurations.)
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 27, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+% v0.0.3 May 26, 2000: Added an example for \hidetext.
+%
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Use slifonts.
+
+\RequirePackage{tpslifonts}
+
+% Input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower paragraph example}}
+
+\usepackage{soul}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: Inside A Paragraph}\label{Sec:ExPar}
+
+%
+% We show that \stepwise can be used for highlighting words within a paragraph.
+% Furthermore, it is demonstrated how the order in which \step's are executed can be changed.
+%
+% We define a `placeholder' which will mark the place of missing words (instead of \displayphantom).
+%
+\newcommand{\placeholder}[1]{\leavevmode\phantom{#1}\llap{\rule{\widthof{\phantom{#1}}}{\fboxrule}}}%
+ %
+ % We use the custom command \parstepwise which not only wraps the whole argument of \stepwise into a minipage (because
+ % otherwise vertical spacing goes haywire, don't ask me why), but also gives substance to steps.
+ %
+ % All variants of \stepwise take an optional argument the contents of which are executed inside a group before the
+ % inner loop of starts. It can be used to set parameters locally.
+ % Here, we redefine \activatestep (which has been explained in the equation example) to highlight the first
+ % appearance of any word.
+ % \hidestepcontents is used as a `wrapper' for those arguments of \step which should not appear yet. It either
+ % displays nothing (this is the default for \stepwise and \liststepwise) or puts its argument into a \phantom
+ % (the default for \parstepwise); this behaviour is also toggled by \boxedsteps and \nonboxedsteps.
+ % Here, we redefine it to use our selfdefined \placeholder to mark `missing' words.
+ %
+ \parstepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\placeholder\let\activatestep=\highlightboxed]%
+ {%
+ \begin{quote}
+ \Huge We can \step{create} a \step{fill-in-the-blanks}
+ %
+ % \step takes an optional argument with which it can be specified _when_ its argument is to appear. This is
+ % expressed in \ifthenelse syntax (see the documentation of the ifthen package).
+ % Here, we refer to the counter step which is advanced by \stepwise and contains the number of the current step.
+ % This way, steps can be made to appear in any order.
+ \step[\value{step}=5]{text} which is then
+ \step[\value{step}=4]{filled} in in
+ \step[\value{step}=3]{\textbf{any}} order!
+ \end{quote}
+ }%
+
+ \newslide
+
+ % The \hidetext command hides its argument while respecting automatic line breaks and such. The command needs the soul
+ % package to work. Read the documentation of soul for restrictions as to what can go in the argument of \hidetext.
+
+ \stepwise[\let\hidestepcontents=\hidetext\let\activatestep=\highlighttext]
+ {%
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \begin{quote}
+ \Huge We can step through a \step{paragraph} of \step{free text}
+ \step{without disturbing} line breaks!
+ \end{quote}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \vspace*{\fill}\vspace*{\fill}
+ }
+ \newslide
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `parexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pdfscrdemo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pdfscrdemo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..58758d639d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pdfscrdemo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `pdfscrdemo.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `pdfscrdemo')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{pdfscrdemo.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: pdfscrdemo.tex
+%
+% Simple examples the for combining the pdfscreen package with the dynamic features provided by the package
+% texpower.sty.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 May 25, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Jul 31, 2000: Slightly updated for PDFScreen v.1.5.
+%
+
+\documentclass[12pt]{article}
+
+\usepackage[screen,panelright,sectionbreak]{pdfscreen}
+
+\margins{2ex}{2ex}{2ex}{2ex}
+\screensize{6.25in}{8in}
+
+\emblema{fig-2}
+\urlid{http://texpower.sourceforge.net/}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The texpower package is loaded.
+% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled.
+% We use the tpslifonts package for better readability.
+%
+\usepackage[display]{texpower}
+\usepackage{tpslifonts}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\{\normalfont \texttt{pdfscreen} Demo}}
+\author{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{A list environment}
+
+% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which
+% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages
+% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation
+% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to
+% the next page.
+
+\pause
+
+% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For
+% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step
+% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the
+% \step commands appear ``one by one''.
+
+\stepwise
+{%
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[foo.] \step{bar.}
+ \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.}
+ \end{description}
+ }
+
+
+
+\section{An aligned equation}
+
+\pause
+
+% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb
+% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step.
+% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the
+% proper amount of white space.
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only
+ % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation
+ % numbers `appear'.
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ %
+ % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As
+ % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the
+ % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command.
+ %
+ \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep
+ {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the
+ % order of appearance, independent of nesting.
+ % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on
+ % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'.
+ % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be
+ % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed.
+ \switch
+ {%
+ \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
+ }
+ {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ }
+ \\
+ %
+ % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by
+ % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator.
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\section{An array}
+
+\stepwise
+{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths.
+ %
+ % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that
+ % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step,
+ % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning.
+ %
+ % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the
+ % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the
+ % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by
+ % a) using only p cells,
+ % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If
+ % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into
+ % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth.
+ %
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \begin{array}{rrrrr}
+ \step
+ {%
+ n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\
+ \hline%
+ }%
+ \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}%
+ \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}%
+ \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}%
+ \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}%
+ \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}%
+ \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }%
+ \end{array}
+ \end{displaymath}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\section{A picture}
+
+\pause
+
+\begin{center}%
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.1cm}%
+ \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces
+ \begin{picture}(14,2)
+ \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}}
+ \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}}
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ %
+ % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step.
+ % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of
+ % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for
+ % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces.
+ %
+ \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}}
+ }
+ \end{picture}%
+ }%
+\end{center}%
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `pdfscrdemo.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pdfslidemo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pdfslidemo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..be9d71974cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pdfslidemo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `pdfslidemo.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `pdfslidemo')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{pdfslidemo.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: pdfslidemo.tex
+%
+% Simple examples the for combining the pdfslide package with the dynamic features provided by the package texpower.sty.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 May 25, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\usepackage{pdfslide}
+
+\hypersetup{linkcolor=red}
+
+\overlay{bg.jpg}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The texpower package is loaded.
+% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled.
+% The overlay forces a black background, so we select the blackbackground option of texpower.
+%
+\usepackage[display,blackbackground]{texpower}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\{\normalfont \texttt{pdfslide} Demo}}
+\author{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{A list environment}
+
+% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which
+% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages
+% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation
+% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to
+% the next page.
+
+\pause
+
+% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For
+% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step
+% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the
+% \step commands appear ``one by one''.
+
+\stepwise
+{%
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[foo.] \step{bar.}
+ \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.}
+ \end{description}
+ }
+
+
+
+\section{An aligned equation}
+
+\pause
+
+% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb
+% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step.
+% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the
+% proper amount of white space.
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only
+ % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation
+ % numbers `appear'.
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ %
+ % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As
+ % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the
+ % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command.
+ %
+ \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep
+ {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the
+ % order of appearance, independent of nesting.
+ % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on
+ % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'.
+ % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be
+ % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed.
+ \switch
+ {%
+ \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
+ }
+ {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ }
+ \\
+ %
+ % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by
+ % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator.
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\section{An array}
+
+\stepwise
+{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths.
+ %
+ % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that
+ % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step,
+ % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning.
+ %
+ % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the
+ % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the
+ % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by
+ % a) using only p cells,
+ % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If
+ % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into
+ % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth.
+ %
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \begin{array}{rrrrr}
+ \step
+ {%
+ n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\
+ \hline%
+ }%
+ \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}%
+ \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}%
+ \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}%
+ \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}%
+ \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}%
+ \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }%
+ \end{array}
+ \end{displaymath}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\section{A picture}
+
+\pause
+
+\begin{center}%
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.2cm}%
+ \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces
+ \begin{picture}(14,2)
+ \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}}
+ \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}}
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ %
+ % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step.
+ % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of
+ % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for
+ % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces.
+ %
+ \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}}
+ }
+ \end{picture}%
+ }%
+\end{center}%
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `pdfslidemo.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b9ba79b0a34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `picexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `picexample,picexample-src,end')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{picexample.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: picexample.tex
+%
+% Picture example for the package texpower.sty.
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be processed with
+%
+% dvips -Ppdf -j0 picexample
+%
+% afterwards processing the resulting ps file with
+%
+% distill picexample.ps
+%
+% (The syntax is for a unix system with tetex 1.0 and distiller 3. Modify appropriately for other configurations.)
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+% Note that different pictures are produced with pdflatex and latex, because pdflatex does not support PSTricks.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 27, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Use slifonts and a dark background.
+
+\PassOptionsToPackage{colormath,colorhighlight,darkbackground}{texpower}
+\RequirePackage{tpslifonts}
+
+% Input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower picture example}}
+
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}% Can we use PSTricks?
+{% Yes.
+ % PsTricks (sic) is used for creating the picture example.
+
+ \usepackage{pstcol}
+ \usepackage{pst-node}
+
+ \psset{unit=\unitlength}
+ }
+{% No. We'll make do without.
+ }
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: A Picture}\label{Sec:ExPic}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{psspecialsallowed}}% Can we use PSTricks?
+{\input{picpsexample}}{\input{picltxexample}}
+\newslide
+\pageTransitionReplace
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `picexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picltxexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picltxexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2fb84de4cde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picltxexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `picltxexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `picltxexample')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+% Code for the LaTeX picture example for the package texpower.sty.
+%
+% This file is input by others. Don't compile it separately.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 21, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 19, 2000: Using \bstep instead of \boxedsteps.
+%
+% v0.0.3 Apr 28, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+
+ %
+ % This has nothing to do with \stepwise, just setting up the picture...
+ %
+ \newcommand{\leftm}{\left\{\!\!\left\{}
+ \newcommand{\rightm}{\right\}\!\!\right\}}
+ \newcommand{\cls}[3]{\left[#1,#2,#3\right]}
+ \newcommand{\WT}[2]{\fbox{${#1}#2$}}
+ \newcommand{\GEQ}[1]{\WT{\geq}{#1}}
+
+ %
+ % In the following picture, picture items are built incrementally.
+ %
+ % \stepwise generates a sequence of slides, all alike. The only difference ist that on every slide, one more of the
+ % \step commands occurring in the argument of \stepwise are `activated'. This way the stuff inside the argument of
+ % \stepwise is gone through `step by step'.
+ %
+ {%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.35\semcm}%
+ \footnotesize%
+ \setlength{\fboxsep}{1.5pt}%
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{picture}(12,13)(-7,-16)
+ \put(-3,-3.5){\makebox(0,0){$\cls{\leftm p_1, p_2\rightm}{1}{\GEQ{0.2}}$}}
+ \put(3,-3.5){\makebox(0,0){$\cls{\leftm \neg p_2,p_1\rightm}{1}{\GEQ{0.1}}$}}
+ %
+ % In the following, we see the very first occurrence of the \step command. Its effect is to `hide' its
+ % argument on the first slide of the sequence generated by \stepwise and display it on all other slides of
+ % this sequence. The second \step command starts displaying on the third slide and so on...
+ %
+ \step{%
+ % We use \afterstep{\pageTransitionDissolve} to make this first step of the diagram appear with a fancy page
+ % transition. We have to use \afterstep because the page transition setting would be undone by the group
+ % closing contained in \end{picture}.
+ \afterstep{\pageTransitionDissolve}%
+ \put(-3,-4){\line(3,-1){3}}
+ \put(3,-4){\line(-3,-1){3}}
+ \put(0,-4.5){\makebox(0,0){(ass.)}}
+ \put(0,-5.5){%
+ \makebox(0,0){%
+ %
+ % Here, one use of \step is nested inside the other.
+ %
+ % Usually `hiding' means ignoring altogehter. For the following application however, the `hidden' objects
+ % are nested inside a brace. This means that instead of ignoring its argument, it's better if
+ % \step displays an appropriate amount of blank space. This behaviour (create blank space) is exhibited by
+ % the custom command \bstep (for `boxed' step).
+ %
+ % The command \rebstep allows both boxes to appear simultaneously.
+ %
+ % \afterstep is used again to reset the page transition to Replace for the building of the formula.
+ %
+ % Setting \activatestep to \highlightboxed makes the additional formulae `stick out' when they are filled
+ % in.
+ %
+ \let\activatestep=\highlightboxed
+ $
+ \cls
+ {\leftm p_1, \bstep{\afterstep{\pageTransitionReplace}p_1}, p_2,\rebstep{\neg p_2}\rightm}
+ {2.2}
+ {\rebstep{\GEQ{0.1}}}%
+ $%
+ }%
+ }
+ }
+ \step{%
+ \afterstep{\pageTransitionDissolve}%
+ \put(0,-6){\line(0,-1){1}}
+ \put(0.2,-6.5){\makebox(0,0)[l]{(removing)}}
+ \put(0,-7.5){\makebox(0,0){$\cls{\leftm p_1, p_1\rightm}{1.2}{\GEQ{0.1}}$}}
+ }
+ \step{%
+ \put(-8,-7.5){\makebox(0,0){$\left[\neg p_1,\GEQ{0.4}\right]$}}
+ \put(-8,-8){\line(5,-1){5}}
+ \put(0,-8){\line(-3,-1){3}}
+ \put(-3,-8.5){\makebox(0,0){(ass.)}}
+ \put(-3,-9.5){\makebox(0,0){$\cls{\leftm p_1, p_1,\neg p_1\rightm}{1.6}{\GEQ{0.1}}$}}
+ \put(-3,-10){\line(0,-1){1}}
+ \put(-2.8,-10.5){\makebox(0,0)[l]{(removing)}}
+ \put(-3,-11.5){\makebox(0,0){$\cls{\leftm p_1\rightm}{0.6}{\GEQ{0.1}}$}}
+ }
+ \step{%
+ \put(-8,-8){\line(0,-1){4}}
+ \put(-8,-12){\line(5,-1){5}}
+ \put(-3,-12){\line(0,-1){1}}
+ \put(-2.8,-12.5){\makebox(0,0)[l]{(assembling)}}
+ \put(-3,-13.5){\makebox(0,0){$\cls{\leftm p_1,\neg p_1\rightm}{1.0}{\GEQ{0.1}}$}}
+ \put(-3,-14){\line(0,-1){1}}
+ \put(-2.8,-14.5){\makebox(0,0)[l]{(removing)}}
+ \put(-3,-15.5){\makebox(0,0){$\left[\fbox{\phantom{x}},\GEQ{0.1}\right]$}}
+ }
+ \end{picture}%
+ \end{center}
+ }%
+ }
+
+ % The whole execution of \stepwise is encapsuled in a group to make all changes local. This affects also the setting
+ % of the page transition to dissolve in the last but one step. We set it again explicitly to make the last step appear
+ % with this page transition as well.
+
+ \pageTransitionDissolve
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `picltxexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picpsexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picpsexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9408ce07a3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/picpsexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `picpsexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `picpsexample')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+%
+% Code for the PSTricks picture example for the package texpower.sty.
+%
+% This file is input by others. Don't compile it separately.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 21, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 19, 2000: Using \bstep instead of \boxedsteps.
+%
+% v0.0.3 Apr 28, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% This has nothing to do with \stepwise, just setting up the picture...
+%
+\newcommand{\Block}[1]
+{%
+ \begin{pspicture}(-4,-2)(4,2)
+ \pspolygon(-4,0)(-2,2)(2,2)(4,0)(2,-2)(-2,-2)
+ \rput(0,0){#1}
+ \end{pspicture}%
+ }%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPcolor}}
+{\psset{unit=3mm,fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=highlightcolor,linecolor=textcolor}}%
+{\psset{unit=3mm}}%
+%
+% In the following picture, picture items are built incrementally.
+%
+% \stepwise generates a sequence of slides, all alike. The only difference ist that on every slide, one more of the
+% \step commands occurring in the argument of \stepwise are `activated'. This way the stuff inside the argument of
+% \stepwise is gone through `step by step'.
+%
+\stepwise
+{%
+ \begin{center}
+ \large
+ \begin{pspicture}(-1,-13)(33,9)
+ \rput(0,0){\rnode{x}{\fboxrule0pt\fbox{$x[t]$}}}
+ \rput(32,0){\rnode{y}{\fboxrule0pt\fbox{$y(t)$}}}
+ {%
+ % The effect of the \step command is to `hide' its argument on the first slide of the sequence generated by
+ % \stepwise and display it on all other slides of this sequence. The second \step command starts displaying on
+ % the third slide and so on...
+ %
+ % Usually `hiding' means ignoring altogehter. For the following application however, the box displayed by
+ % \step is used as an node in the picture. This means that instead of ignoring its argument, it's better if
+ % \step displays an appropriate amount of blank space.
+ % This behaviour (create blank space) is exhibited by the command \bstep.
+ \rput(4,0){\rnode{V}{\bstep{\psframebox{\Large$V$}}}}
+ \ncline{->}{x}{V}
+ %
+ % The command \rebstep allows both boxes to appear simultaneously.
+ %
+ \rput(28,0){\rnode{plus}{\rebstep{\psframebox{\Large$+$}}}}
+ }%
+ \ncline{->}{plus}{y}
+ % By using \restep again, the two boxes defining the operators appear at the same time as the first block of the
+ % diagram, which is produced by the following commands.
+ \restep
+ {%
+ % We use \afterstep{\pageTransitionDissolve} to make this first step of the diagram appear with a fancy page
+ % transition. We have to use \afterstep because the page transition setting would be undone by the group
+ % closing contained in \end{pspicture}.
+ \afterstep{\pageTransitionDissolve}%
+ \rput(16,0){\rnode{IBlk}{\Block{I-Block}}}
+ \ncline{->}{V}{IBlk}
+ \Aput{$x[t]$}
+ \ncline{->}{IBlk}{plus}
+ \Aput
+ {%
+ %
+ % Here, one use of \step is nested inside the other.
+ $%
+ % Note how the math spacing is corrected manually by adding {} after \cdot. Otherwise, \cdot wouldn't be
+ % aware that something is following and act as a postfix (instead of infix) operator.
+ % \afterstep is used again to reset the page transition to Replace for the building of the formula.
+ \bstep{\afterstep{\pageTransitionReplace}{}b\cdot{}}%
+ \bstep{\int\limits^t_0 x(\tau)\,d\tau}%
+ $%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \step
+ {%
+ \afterstep{\pageTransitionDissolve}%
+ \rput(16,6){\rnode{PBlk}{\Block{P-Block}}}
+ \ncangle[angleA=90,angleB=180,fillstyle=none]{->}{V}{PBlk}
+ \Aput{$x(t)$}
+ \ncangle[angleB=90,fillstyle=none]{->}{PBlk}{plus}
+ \aput(.5){$a\cdot x(t)$}
+ }%
+ \step
+ {%
+ \rput(16,-6){\rnode{DBlk}{\Block{D-Block}}}
+ \ncangle[angleA=-90,angleB=180,fillstyle=none]{->}{V}{DBlk}
+ \Aput{$x(t)$}
+ \ncangle[angleB=-90,fillstyle=none]{->}{DBlk}{plus}
+ \aput(.5){$\displaystyle c\cdot \left(\frac{dx}{d\tau}\right)(t)$}
+ }
+ \end{pspicture}%
+ \end{center}
+ }%
+
+% The whole execution of \stepwise is encapsuled in a group to make all changes local. This affects also the setting
+% of the page transition to dissolve in the last but one step. We set it again explicitly to make the last step appear
+% with this page transition as well.
+
+\pageTransitionDissolve
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `picpsexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pp4sldemo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pp4sldemo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f7a3aeed61a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/pp4sldemo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,227 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `pp4sldemo.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `pp4sldemo')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{pp4sldemo.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: pp4sldemo.tex
+%
+% Simple examples the for combining the foils class with the pp4slide package and the dynamic features provided by the
+% package texpower.sty.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 May 25, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+
+\documentclass[landscape]{foils}
+
+\usepackage{pp4slide}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The texpower package is loaded.
+% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled.
+% As pp4slide sets some colors designed for dark backgrounds, we give the darkbackground option, and colormath to make
+% formulae colored.
+%
+\usepackage[display,darkbackground,colormath]{texpower}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\{\normalfont \texttt{pp4slide} Demo}}
+\author{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+\maketitle
+
+
+\foilhead{A list environment}
+
+% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which
+% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages
+% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation
+% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to
+% the next page.
+
+\pause
+
+% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For
+% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step
+% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the
+% \step commands appear ``one by one''.
+
+\stepwise
+{%
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[foo.] \step{bar.}
+ \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.}
+ \end{description}
+ }
+
+
+
+\foilhead{An aligned equation}
+
+\pause
+
+% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb
+% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step.
+% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the
+% proper amount of white space.
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only
+ % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation
+ % numbers `appear'.
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ %
+ % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As
+ % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the
+ % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command.
+ %
+ \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep
+ {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the
+ % order of appearance, independent of nesting.
+ % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on
+ % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'.
+ % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be
+ % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed.
+ \switch
+ {%
+ \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
+ }
+ {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ }
+ \\
+ %
+ % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by
+ % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator.
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\foilhead{An array}
+
+\stepwise
+{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths.
+ %
+ % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that
+ % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step,
+ % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning.
+ %
+ % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the
+ % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the
+ % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by
+ % a) using only p cells,
+ % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If
+ % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into
+ % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth.
+ %
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \begin{array}{rrrrr}
+ \step
+ {%
+ n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\
+ \hline%
+ }%
+ \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}%
+ \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}%
+ \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}%
+ \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}%
+ \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}%
+ \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }%
+ \end{array}
+ \end{displaymath}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\foilhead{A picture}
+
+\pause
+
+\begin{center}%
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.6cm}%
+ \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces
+ \begin{picture}(14,2)
+ \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}}
+ \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}}
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ %
+ % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step.
+ % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of
+ % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for
+ % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces.
+ %
+ \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}}
+ }
+ \end{picture}%
+ }%
+\end{center}%
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `pp4sldemo.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/prosperdemo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/prosperdemo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..734cb6638ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/prosperdemo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `prosperdemo.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `prosperdemo')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{prosperdemo.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: prosperdemo.tex
+%
+\documentclass[pdf,colorBG,slideColor,whitecross]{prosper}
+\usepackage[display]{texpower}
+\begin{document}
+\ifpdf
+ No way to compile a prosper document with pdftex!
+ \else
+\stepwise[\boxedsteps]
+{%
+\begin{slide}{An aligned equation}
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ \step{\sum_{i=1}^{n} i} & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep
+ {%
+ \switch
+ {%
+ \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
+ }
+ {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ }
+ \\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+\end{slide}
+}
+\fi
+
+
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `prosperdemo.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/seminardemo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/seminardemo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7175bc19593
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/seminardemo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `seminardemo.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `seminardemo')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{seminardemo.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: seminardemo.tex
+%
+% Simple examples the for combining the seminar class with the dynamic features provided by the package texpower.sty.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Jun 02, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 May 26, 2003: Slightly adapted to new version of fixseminar.
+%
+
+\documentclass[portrait,semrot]{seminar}
+
+% We need fixseminar for setting the page size correctly.
+
+\usepackage{fixseminar}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The texpower package is loaded.
+% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled.
+%
+\usepackage[display]{texpower}
+
+\rotateheaderstrue
+
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+
+\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\{\normalfont \texttt{seminar} Demo}}
+\author{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+\maketitle
+
+\newslide
+
+\tableofcontents
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}
+\centerslidesfalse
+\section{A list environment}
+
+% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which
+% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages
+% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation
+% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to
+% the next page.
+
+\pause
+
+% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For
+% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step
+% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the
+% \step commands appear ``one by one''.
+
+\stepwise
+{%
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[foo.] \step{bar.}
+ \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.}
+ \end{description}
+ }
+
+
+
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}
+\centerslidesfalse
+\section{An aligned equation}
+
+\pause
+
+% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb
+% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step.
+% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the
+% proper amount of white space.
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only
+ % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation
+ % numbers `appear'.
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ %
+ % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As
+ % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the
+ % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command.
+ %
+ \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep
+ {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the
+ % order of appearance, independent of nesting.
+ % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on
+ % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'.
+ % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be
+ % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed.
+ \switch
+ {%
+ \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
+ }
+ {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ }
+ \\
+ %
+ % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by
+ % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator.
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}
+\centerslidesfalse
+\section{An array}
+
+\stepwise
+{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths.
+ %
+ % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that
+ % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step,
+ % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning.
+ %
+ % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the
+ % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the
+ % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by
+ % a) using only p cells,
+ % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If
+ % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into
+ % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth.
+ %
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \begin{array}{rrrrr}
+ \step
+ {%
+ n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\
+ \hline%
+ }%
+ \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}%
+ \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}%
+ \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}%
+ \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}%
+ \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}%
+ \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }%
+ \end{array}
+ \end{displaymath}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}
+\centerslidesfalse
+\section{A picture}
+
+\pause
+
+\begin{center}%
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.5\semcm}%
+ \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces
+ \begin{picture}(14,2)
+ \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}}
+ \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}}
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ %
+ % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step.
+ % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of
+ % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for
+ % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces.
+ %
+ \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\footnotesize $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}}
+ }
+ \end{picture}%
+ }%
+\end{center}%
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `seminardemo.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/simpledemo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/simpledemo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c31ea9adf87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/simpledemo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `simpledemo.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `simpledemo')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{simpledemo.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: simpledemo.tex
+%
+% Simple examples the for the dynamic features provided by the package texpower.sty.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Apr 17, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 May 24, 2000: texpower 0.0.8 now supports equation numbers in the argument of \stepwise, so eqnarray* was
+% changed to eqnarray.
+%
+
+\documentclass[12pt]{article}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The texpower package is loaded.
+% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled.
+%
+\usepackage[display]{texpower}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\{\normalfont Simple Demo}}
+\author{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+\maketitle
+
+% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which
+% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages
+% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation
+% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to
+% the next page.
+
+\pause
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\pause
+
+\section{A list environment}
+
+\pause
+
+% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For
+% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step
+% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the
+% \step commands appear ``one by one''.
+
+\stepwise
+{%
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[foo.] \step{bar.}
+ \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.}
+ \end{description}
+ }
+
+\newpage
+
+\section{An aligned equation}
+
+\pause
+
+% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb
+% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step.
+% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the
+% proper amount of white space.
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only
+ % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation
+ % numbers `appear'.
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ %
+ % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As
+ % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the
+ % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command.
+ %
+ \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep
+ {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the
+ % order of appearance, independent of nesting.
+ % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on
+ % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'.
+ % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be
+ % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is displayed.
+ \switch
+ {%
+ \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
+ }
+ {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ }
+ \\
+ %
+ % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by
+ % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator.
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+}
+
+\pause
+
+\section{An array}
+
+\stepwise
+{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths.
+ %
+ % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that
+ % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step,
+ % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning.
+ %
+ % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the
+ % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the
+ % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by
+ % a) using only p cells,
+ % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If
+ % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into
+ % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth.
+ %
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \begin{array}{rrrrr}
+ \step{ n & \log n & n\log n & n^2 & 2^n \\\hline}%
+ \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}%
+ \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}%
+ \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}%
+ \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}%
+ \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}%
+ \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }%
+ \end{array}
+ \end{displaymath}
+}
+
+\pause
+
+\section{A picture}
+
+\pause
+
+\begin{center}%
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{.95cm}%
+ \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces
+ \begin{picture}(14,2)
+ \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}}
+ \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}}
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ %
+ % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step.
+ % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of
+ % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for
+ % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces.
+ %
+ \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}}
+ }
+ \end{picture}%
+ }%
+\end{center}%
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `simpledemo.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/slidesdemo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/slidesdemo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9fae433e3c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/slidesdemo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,243 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `slidesdemo.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `slidesdemo')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{slidesdemo.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: slidesdemo.tex
+%
+% Simple examples the for combining the slides class with the dynamic features provided by the package texpower.sty.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 May 25, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+
+\documentclass[landscape]{slides}
+
+% slides understands the landscape option, but to get it through to pdflatex, we need to set \pdfpageheight etc. The
+% package fixseminar does this.
+
+\usepackage{fixseminar}
+
+% We need to set this page style globally so all dynamically built slides have the right headers.
+
+\pagestyle{slide}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The texpower package is loaded.
+% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled.
+%
+\usepackage[display]{texpower}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{slide}
+ \title{The \code{texpower} Package\\{\normalfont \texttt{slides} Demo}}
+ \author{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+ \maketitle
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}
+ \begin{center}
+ \textbf{A list environment}
+ \end{center}
+
+% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which
+% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages
+% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation
+% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to
+% the next page.
+
+\pause
+
+% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For
+% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step
+% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the
+% \step commands appear ``one by one''.
+
+\stepwise
+{%
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[foo.] \step{bar.}
+ \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.}
+ \end{description}
+ }
+
+\end{slide}
+
+
+\begin{slide}
+ \begin{center}
+ \textbf{An aligned equation}
+ \end{center}
+
+\pause
+
+% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb
+% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step.
+% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the
+% proper amount of white space.
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only
+ % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation
+ % numbers `appear'.
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ %
+ % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As
+ % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the
+ % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command.
+ %
+ \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep
+ {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the
+ % order of appearance, independent of nesting.
+ % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on
+ % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'.
+ % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be
+ % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed.
+ \switch
+ {%
+ \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
+ }
+ {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ }
+ \\
+ %
+ % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by
+ % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator.
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+}
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}
+ \begin{center}
+ \textbf{An array}
+ \end{center}
+
+\stepwise
+{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths.
+ %
+ % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that
+ % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step,
+ % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning.
+ %
+ % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the
+ % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the
+ % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by
+ % a) using only p cells,
+ % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If
+ % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into
+ % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth.
+ %
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \begin{array}{rrrrr}
+ \step
+ {%
+ n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\
+ \hline%
+ }%
+ \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}%
+ \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}%
+ \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}%
+ \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}%
+ \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}%
+ \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }%
+ \end{array}
+ \end{displaymath}
+}
+\end{slide}
+
+\begin{slide}
+ \begin{center}
+ \textbf{A picture}
+ \end{center}
+
+\pause
+
+\begin{center}%
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.6cm}%
+ \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces
+ \begin{picture}(14,2)
+ \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}}
+ \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}}
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ %
+ % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step.
+ % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of
+ % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for
+ % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces.
+ %
+ \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}}
+ }
+ \end{picture}%
+ }%
+\end{center}%
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `slidesdemo.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/spanelexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/spanelexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f1dfa1aa839
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/spanelexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `spanelexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `spanelexample')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{spanelexample.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: spanelexample.tex
+%
+% Very simple panel example - compare with panelexample.tex
+
+\documentclass[calcdimensions,landscape,letterpaper,KOMA]{powersem}
+
+\usepackage[colorlinks,pdfpagemode=FullScreen,plainpages=false]{hyperref}
+
+\usepackage[lightbackground,display]{texpower}
+\renewcommand{\currentpagevalue}{\value{slide}}
+\usepackage{tpslifonts}
+
+\newlength{\buttonwidth}
+\renewcommand{\buttonsep}{0.2\fboxsep}
+\renewcommand{\buttonshadowhshift}{0.1\fboxsep}
+\renewcommand{\buttonshadowvshift}{-0.1\fboxsep}
+
+\DeclarePanel{left}
+{%
+ \textsf{\textbf{\footnotesize
+ \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}}
+ Your Logo\\
+ Your Name\\
+ Your Company\\
+ \end{tabular}%
+ }}%
+ \vfill
+
+ \setlength{\buttonwidth}{.5\linewidth-.5ex}
+ \button[\buttonwidth]{\Acrobatmenu{FirstPage}}{Start}
+ \button[\buttonwidth]{\Acrobatmenu{LastPage}}{End}
+ \button[\buttonwidth]{\Acrobatmenu{PrevPage}}{Back}
+ \button[\buttonwidth]{\Acrobatmenu{NextPage}}{Next}
+}%
+
+\newcommand{\MyHeader}{}
+
+\newcommand{\myheader}[1]{\renewcommand{\MyHeader}{#1}}
+
+\DeclarePanel{top}{\Large\strut\MyHeader}
+
+\backgroundstyle{vgradient}
+
+\slideframe{none}
+\centerslidesfalse
+\pagestyle{empty}
+
+\mklength{\slideleftmargin}{\leftpanelwidth*\ratio{1cm}{\semcm}+.5cm}
+\renewcommand{\sliderightmargin}{.5cm}
+\mklength{\slidetopmargin}{\toppanelheight*\ratio{1cm}{\semcm}+.5cm}
+\renewcommand{\slidebottommargin}{.5cm}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{slide}
+
+\myheader{Just some info about panels}
+
+If you're using a package that has it's own panel and/or naviagtion buttons (as
+\href{ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pdfscreen.html}%
+{\code{pdfscreen}}) don't even consider using the preliminary support for this
+in \concept{\TeX Power}.
+
+Using it for \code{seminar} / \code{powersem} as we are doing here is OK \dots
+
+Things to remember:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item If you want to declare your own panels, you have to call
+\macroname{backgroundstyle} after the panel declaration.
+\item The font color used in the panels are controlled by \code{\carg{pos}paneltextcolor}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\newslide
+
+\myheader{Some examples for \macroname{pause}}
+
+\pageTransitionDissolve
+With dissolve page transition
+\begin{itemize}
+\item foo\pause
+\item bar\pause
+\end{itemize}
+\pageTransitionReplace
+and with plain replace page transition
+\begin{itemize}
+\item foo\pause
+\item bar\pause
+\end{itemize}
+
+\end{slide}
+
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `spanelexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tabexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tabexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cd19ecf54ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tabexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `tabexample.tex',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% texpower-doc.dtx (with options: `tabexample,tabexample-src,end')
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+%% Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the TeXPower bundle is
+%% given in the file `00readme.txt'.
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{tabexample.tex}%
+ [2004/07/27 TeXPower example file]
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: tabexample.tex
+%
+% Tabular example for the package texpower.sty.
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be processed with
+%
+% dvips -Ppdf -j0 tabexample
+%
+% afterwards processing the resulting ps file with
+%
+% distill tabexample.ps
+%
+% (The syntax is for a unix system with tetex 1.0 and distiller 3. Modify appropriately for other configurations.)
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Mar 20, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.0.2 Apr 27, 2000: Some small changes in preparation of the update to TeXpower v0.0.7.
+%
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Use slifonts.
+
+\RequirePackage{tpslifonts}
+
+% Input the generic preamble.
+
+\input{__TPpreamble}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower tabular example}}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\macroname{stepwise} Example: A Tabular}
+
+% In the following, a tabular object is built incrementally.
+% Observe how & and \\ are placed inside the following step to avoid `opening' empty cells.
+% The macro \tabend is redefined to `replace' the final \hline by \cline's when a line is not yet complete.
+%
+ \newcommand{\tabend}{\\\hline}%
+
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \hrule height 0pt\relax% This is neccessary to avoid a glitch in vertical spacing. Don't ask me why. I'll try to get
+ % this right until the first alpha version.
+ \begin{center}
+ \step
+ {%
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
+ \hline
+ They can & be built & line by line%
+ \step{\\\hline or cell\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\cline{1-1}}}%
+ \step{& by\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\cline{1-2}}}%
+ \step{& cell\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\hline}}%
+ \step
+ {%
+ \\\hline
+ %
+ % Again, \step's are nested inside each other...
+ %
+ \step{or}&\step{like}&\step{this.}%
+ }%
+ \step{\\\hline But\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\cline{1-1}}}%
+ \step{& beware\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\cline{1-2}}}%
+ \step{& of cells growing horizontally!\renewcommand{\tabend}{\\\hline}}%
+ \tabend
+ \end{tabular}%
+ }%
+ \end{center}%
+ }%
+ \newslide
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `tabexample.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/00readme.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/00readme.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6d46258caa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/00readme.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+======================================================================
+
+ Package tpslifonts
+ Configure presentation fonts
+
+ alpha version (v0.6)
+ This readme file last changed on July 27, 2004
+
+ Author: Stephan Lehmke <mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+ Lehrstuhl Informatik I
+ Universität Dortmund
+ Dortmund, Germany
+
+======================================================================
+
+Contents:
+=========
+
+00readme.txt
+ This file.
+
+01install.txt
+ Installation instructions.
+
+Makefile
+ Builds documentation and unpacks dtx-file.
+ (Only useful on Unix-like systems.)
+
+tpslifonts.dtx
+ Documented TeX source for the tpslifonts package.
+
+tpslifonts.ins
+ Docstrip batchfile that generates the tpslifonts package.
+
+slifontsexample.tex
+ An documented example.
+
+Overview:
+=========
+
+Beamer and overhead presentations are often viewed under peculiar
+circumstances. Especially for presentations which are projected
+directly `out of the computer', low power of the beamer, low
+resolution and an abundance of colors can lead to severe readability
+problems.
+
+It is therefore of utmost importance to optimize font selection as
+much as possible towards readability.
+
+The package tpslifonts offers a couple of `harmonising' combinations
+of text and math fonts from the (distant) relatives of computer modern
+fonts, with a couple of extras for optimising readability.
+
+The package offers the following features:
+
+ 1) Text fonts from computer modern roman, computer modern sans serif,
+ SliTeX computer modern sans serif, computer modern bright, or
+ concrete roman.
+
+ 2) Support for OT1 and T1 font encoding.
+
+ 3) Math fonts from computer modern math, computer modern bright math,
+ or Euler fonts.
+
+ 4) Support of additional symbol fonts like AMS symbols or
+ doublestroke.
+
+ 5) All fonts configured for `smooth scaling' (like in the type1cm
+ package).
+
+ 6) Avoiding fonts not freely available in Type 1 format.
+
+ 7) Careful design size selection for optimum readability.
+
+For some of the options to yield satisfying results, it is neccessary
+to install additional (free) Type1 fonts on your system.
+
+There's no intention to support other font families like the typical
+``psnfss'' PostScript fonts, as they usually don't come in different
+design sizes, making the effort of tuning them for viewing futile. If
+you wish to use such a font, load it with the usual packages.
+
+tpslifonts is part of the TeXPower bundle, residing at
+
+http://texpower.sourceforge.net/
+
+but is completely independent and can be used without texpower without
+problems. The example document slifontsexample.tex can also be
+compiled without TeXPower installed.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/01install.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/01install.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..733f860738e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/01install.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+======================================================================
+
+ Package tpslifonts
+ Configure presentation fonts
+
+ alpha version (v0.6)
+ Installation Instructions
+
+ This file last changed on July 27, 2004
+
+ Author: Stephan Lehmke <mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+ Lehrstuhl Informatik I
+ Universität Dortmund
+ Dortmund, Germany
+
+======================================================================
+
+Installation of tpslifonts.sty:
+-------------------------------
+
+If you have installed the current TeXPower bundle, then tpslifonts has
+been installed as part of it, so there's nothing to do.
+
+If you want to install tpslifonts without TeXPower, do:
+
+1) Run "latex tpslifonts.ins" to generate
+ - tpslifonts.sty
+
+2) Produce the documentation by running
+ latex tpslifonts.dtx
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o tpslifonts.gls tpslifonts.glo
+ makeindex -s gind.ist -o tpslifonts.ind tpslifonts.idx
+ latex tpslifonts.dtx
+
+3) Move the file tpslifonts.sty to a place where latex can find it. On a
+ TDS-compliant system, a nice place would be
+
+ <path to a texmf tree>/tex/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/
+
+ Then, on systems using a filename database, don't forget to refresh
+ the database!
+
+On a Unix-like system 1) and 2) can be done easily using "make".
+
+Compiling the example document:
+-------------------------------
+
+After installing tpslifonts, you can compile the document
+
+ slifontsexample
+
+using pdflatex or latex, to see whether everything works as expected.
+
+If you get an error message, most likely you're missing a package used
+therein. Don't worry, if you don't want to install a new package, just
+open the file slifontsexample.tex and comment out the offending
+\usepackage command, the document will adapt by leaving out the
+corresponding parts.
+
+If you've not used pdflatex, please do whatever neccessary on your
+system to convert the document to pdf, then open in acrobat reader.
+
+Read the file slifontsexample.tex carefully; there are a lot
+of configuration alternatives to try out.
+
+If the document should look ugly on screen, most likely you're missing
+Type1 (PostScript outline) versions of some fonts used.
+
+Either you use a configuration alternative for which you possess the
+fonts, or you install the respective PostScript fonts.
+
+Some candidates which may not be present even in an up-to-date
+distributuion:
+
+cm-super CTAN:/fonts/ps-type1/cm-super/
+
+hfbright CTAN:/fonts/ps-type1/hfbright/
+
+doublestroke CTAN:/fonts/doublestroke/
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..625328b2520
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+RM=rm -f
+SHELL=sh
+VERSION=0.1
+JUNKS=*.aux *.toc *.idx *.glo *.dvi *.log *.lof *.ist *.ilg *.ind *.gls *.out *.tmp *~
+
+help:
+ @echo '**********************************************'
+ @echo ' The following targets exist: '
+ @echo ' - all: All targets below '
+ @echo ' - unpack: Unpacks the tpslifonts package '
+ @echo ' - pack: Packs the package '
+ @echo ' - doc: Builds tpslifonts documentation '
+ @echo ' - clean: Remove all generate/junk files '
+ @echo '**********************************************'
+
+unpack:
+ latex tpslifonts.ins
+ @echo '**********************************************'
+ @echo ' To make tpslifonts package documentation '
+ @echo ' % make doc '
+ @echo '**********************************************'
+
+all: unpack doc
+
+doc: tpslifonts.dtx
+ latex tpslifonts.dtx
+ latex tpslifonts.dtx
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o tpslifonts.gls tpslifonts.glo
+ makeindex -s gind.ist -o tpslifonts.ind tpslifonts.idx
+ latex tpslifonts.dtx
+
+pack: clean
+ -(cd ..; cp -r tpslifonts tpslifonts-$(VERSION); \
+ tar cvfz tpslifonts-$(VERSION).tgz tpslifonts-$(VERSION))
+
+clean:
+ @$(RM) $(JUNKS) tpslifonts.sty
+ @echo The current directory has been cleaned up.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/slifontsexample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/slifontsexample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7b921489431
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/slifontsexample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1600 @@
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: slifontsexample.tex
+%
+% Example for the package tpslifonts.sty.
+%
+% This file can be compiled with pdfLaTeX or (standard) LaTeX. When using standard LaTeX, the dvi file produced should
+% be converted to pdf afterwards (using dvips+distill/ps2pdf or dvipdf, for instance).
+%
+% The resulting pdf file is meant for presenting `interactively' with Adobe Acrobat Reader.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Author: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.1 Nov 14, 2002: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+% v0.2 Jan 07, 2003: Adapted to tpslifonts v0.4 (added support for cmbright).
+%
+% v0.3 Mar 28, 2003: Adapted to tpslifonts v0.5 (added support for T1 encoding).
+%
+% v0.4 May 28, 2003: Adapted to tpslifonts v0.6.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Please go to USER CONFIGURATION AREA below to find configuration options for experimenting with font settings.
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\newif\ifTPaware
+\IfFileExists{texpower.sty}{\TPawaretrue}{\TPawarefalse}
+
+\ifTPaware
+\documentclass[letterpaper,landscape,KOMA,smallheadings,calcdimensions,display]{powersem}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Set slide margins rather small for maximum use of space. This is a demo, remember.
+\renewcommand{\slidetopmargin}{5mm}
+\renewcommand{\slidebottommargin}{5mm}
+\renewcommand{\slideleftmargin}{5mm}
+\renewcommand{\sliderightmargin}{5mm}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Some setup for more reasonable spacing.
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}%
+ {-1.5ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.5ex}%
+ {.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\raggedsection\normalfont\size@section\sectfont}}
+\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+ {-1.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\raggedsection\normalfont\size@subsection\sectfont}}
+\def\slideitemsep{.5ex plus .3ex minus .2ex}
+\makeatother
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% We need some more packages...
+\usepackage{url}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% One more Text emphasis command...
+\let\name=\textsc
+\else % NOT TPaware
+% Make a `poor man's presentation mode.
+\documentclass{article}
+\setlength{\paperwidth}{13cm}
+\setlength{\paperheight}{10cm}
+\usepackage[left=3mm,right=3mm,top=3mm,bottom=3mm]{geometry}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\setlength{\parskip}{1ex plus .5ex minus .5ex}
+\linespread{1.3}
+\usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{calc}
+\raggedbottom
+\fi % END TPaware
+
+%=================================================================================================================
+% begin USER CONFIGURATION AREA.
+% In the following, you can configure this demo by changing settings made below (until the ``end USER CONFIGURATION
+% AREA mark).
+% Note in particular the part below labelled ``Configuration scenarios''.
+%=================================================================================================================
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Packages and Preamble settings individual for this example.
+
+% We use a lot of fonts for demonstration. You can comment out any of the following \usepackage calls to emulate your
+% own working environment. Note, however, that some of the examples will vanish then because of lacking commands.
+
+\usepackage{amssymb}
+\usepackage{latexsym}
+\usepackage{wasysym}
+\usepackage{stmaryrd}
+\usepackage{mathrsfs}
+\usepackage{dsfont}
+
+\usepackage[override]{cmtt}
+
+% Make nested braces grow.
+\delimitershortfall-1sp\relax
+
+% The following packages are needed only for the examples. If you're lacking any of them, just comment out the
+% \usepackage call. Note, however, that some of the examples will vanish then because of lacking commands.
+
+% Both amsmath and wasysym insist on defining \iint and \iiint.
+\makeatletter\let\iint\@undefined\let\iiint\@undefined\makeatother
+\usepackage[leqno]{amsmath}
+
+\usepackage{amscd}
+
+\usepackage{array}
+
+\IfFileExists{easymat.sty}{\usepackage{easymat}}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% TeXPower configuration.
+
+\PassOptionsToPackage{lightbackground,colorhighlight}{texpower}
+
+% Comment out to avoid coloring math formulae.
+\PassOptionsToPackage{colormath}{texpower}
+
+\usepackage{ifthen}[2001/05/26]
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Configuration scenarios
+
+% In the following, we give several `configuration scenarios' for presentation font selection with tpslifonts. Each
+% hopefully represents a nice and readable selection of tpslifonts options and parameters. For some scenarios, you might
+% need to have some Type1 fonts installed which are not part of every TeX distribution, otherwise bitmap versions will
+% be used which look `blurred' in acroread.
+% Of course taste varies, so after testing each scenario in turn and making yourself acquainted with the possibilities,
+% you might start experimenting further by removing some options or parameters from a scenario or by adding parameters
+% used in other scenarios.
+% For selecting a scenario, just uncomment its code lines. Remember to comment out all other scenarios, otherwise there
+% might be conflicts.
+
+% Configuration scenario 1:
+% Slifonts with cm italic math.
+% -----------------------------
+% This is a `standard' setting. The text fonts come from the lcmss family, Typewriter from cmtt and math from cmmi. Size
+% differences are remedied by using `scaleup' options. The `textops' option causes operator names and digits to be taken
+% from the text font lcmss. The `scale7pt' will hopefully make math look a little `bolder'.
+% Type 1 versions of all fonts used by this scenario (apart from certain math fonts like dsrom) should be part of every
+% moderately modern TeX distribution.
+
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{scaleupmath,scaleuptt,textops,scale7pt}{tpslifonts}
+
+% If you find the typewriter characters to be too `bold', try uncommenting the following line:
+
+% \def\TPSFttscale{1.13}
+
+
+% Configuration scenario 2:
+% Slifonts with euler math.
+% -------------------------
+% Combining lcmss with euler math might look strange at first, but the euler math fonts are definitely extremely well
+% readable on screen. The text fonts come from the lcmss family, Typewriter from cmtt and math from euler roman. Size
+% differences are remedied by using `scaleup' options.
+% Type 1 versions of all fonts used by this scenario (apart from certain math fonts like dsrom) should be part of every
+% moderately modern TeX distribution.
+
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{eulermath,scaleupmath,scaleuptt}{tpslifonts}
+
+% If you uncomment the following option, digits are also taken from Euler math.
+
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{eulerdigits}{tpslifonts}
+
+% If you find the typewriter characters to be too `bold', try uncommenting the following line:
+
+% \def\TPSFttscale{1.13}
+
+% Configuration scenario 3:
+% Slifonts with cmbright math.
+% ----------------------------
+% The cmbright family is the only existing source for a complete set of sans serif math fonts which fit the computer
+% modern grand family. Although being slightly different from cmss, it fits well with lcmss . The text fonts come from
+% the lcmss family, Typewriter from cmtt and math from cm bright. Size differences are remedied by using `scaleup'
+% options. The `textops' option causes operator names and digits to be taken from the text font lcmss.
+% Even with a modern TeX distribution, you might need to install Type1 versions of the cmbright fonts, for instance from
+% the ``hfbright'' bundle by Harald Harders.
+
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{cmbrightmath,scaleupmath,scaleuptt,textops}{tpslifonts}
+
+% If you find the typewriter characters to be too `bold', try uncommenting the following line:
+
+% \def\TPSFttscale{1.1}
+
+% Configuration scenario 4:
+% cmss fonts with cm italic math.
+% -------------------------------
+% The text fonts come from the cmss family, Typewriter from cmtt and math from cmmi. The `textops' option causes
+% operator names and digits to be taken from the text font cmss. The `scale7pt' option makes characters look a little
+% `bolder', enhancing readability.
+% Type 1 versions of all fonts used by this scenario (apart from certain math fonts like dsrom) should be part of every
+% moderately modern TeX distribution.
+
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{cmss,textops,scale7pt}{tpslifonts}
+
+% Configuration scenario 5:
+% cmss fonts with euler math.
+% ---------------------------
+% Combining cmss with euler math might look strange at first, but the euler math fonts are definitely extremely well
+% readable on screen. The text fonts come from the cmss family, Typewriter from cmtt and math from euler roman.
+% Type 1 versions of all fonts used by this scenario (apart from certain math fonts like dsrom) should be part of every
+% moderately modern TeX distribution.
+
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{cmss,eulermath}{tpslifonts}
+
+% If you uncomment the following option, digits are also taken from Euler math.
+
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{eulerdigits}{tpslifonts}
+
+% Configuration scenario 6:
+% cmss fonts with cmbright math.
+% ------------------------------
+% The cmbright family is the only existing source for a complete set of sans serif math fonts which fit the computer
+% modern grand family. Although being slightly different from cmss, it fits well with cmss. The text fonts come from
+% the cmss family, Typewriter from cmtt and math from cm bright. The `textops' option causes operator names and digits
+% to be taken from the text font cmss.
+% Even with a modern TeX distribution, you might need to install Type1 versions of the cmbright fonts, for instance from
+% the ``hfbright'' bundle by Harald Harders.
+
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{cmss,cmbrightmath,textops}{tpslifonts}
+
+% Configuration scenario 7:
+% cmr fonts.
+% -------------------------
+% In this case, all fonts are the TeX standard computer modern roman. The text fonts come from the cmr family,
+% Typewriter from cmtt and math from cmmi. The `scale7pt' option makes characters look a little `bolder', enhancing
+% readability.
+% Type 1 versions of all fonts used by this scenario (apart from certain math fonts like dsrom) should be part of every
+% moderately modern TeX distribution.
+
+\PassOptionsToPackage{cmr,scale7pt}{tpslifonts}
+
+% Configuration scenario 8:
+% cmbright fonts.
+% -------------------------
+% In this case, all fonts are taken from the cmbright family. The text fonts come from the cmbr family,
+% Typewriter from cmtl and math from cmbrm.
+% Even with a modern TeX distribution, you might need to install Type1 versions of the cmbright fonts, for instance from
+% the ``hfbright'' bundle by Harald Harders.
+
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{cmbright,cmbrightmath}{tpslifonts}
+
+% Configuration scenario 9:
+% concrete fonts with Euler math.
+% -------------------------------
+% In this case, text fonts are taken from the concrete family. The text fonts come from the ccr family,
+% Typewriter from cmtt and math from Euler.
+% Unfortunately, it seems there are no Type1 versions of OT1 encoded ccr fonts. Hence, to use this setup (at this
+% moment) it is neccessary to select T1 fontencoding (see below) and install some Type1 collection of ``ec'' fonts like
+% the cm-super fonts. Even then, there's no Type1 version of ccm math fonts, so for this scenario, (the matching) Euler
+% math fonts are selected.
+
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{concrete,eulermath}{tpslifonts}
+
+% With this scenario, T1 fontencoding is neccessary because (to the authors knowledge) there exists no OT1 encoded Type1
+% version of ccr.
+
+% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Other tpslifonts settings.
+
+% Use T1 font encoding. This will lead to using EC fonts instead of CM.
+
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+% tpslifonts allows to define independent scaling factors for different groups of fonts. Selecting one of the
+% scaleup... options will define a default value supposed to match ``SliTeX'' fonts, but you can set any scaling factor
+% by just defining (any of) the respective macros:
+
+% Typewriter fonts.
+
+% \def\TPSFttscale{1.1}
+
+% Math fonts related to cm math.
+
+% \def\TPSFmathscale{1.1}
+
+% Euler math fonts.
+
+% \def\TPSFeulerscale{1.05}
+
+% cmbright math fonts.
+
+% \def\TPSFcmbrscale{1.05}
+
+
+%=================================================================================================================
+% end USER CONFIGURATION AREA.
+%=================================================================================================================
+
+
+\RequirePackage{tpslifonts}
+
+\makeatletter
+\ifTPaware
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% We load hyperref and fixseminar which fixes some problems with seminar.
+\usepackage[plainpages=false,bookmarksopen,colorlinks,urlcolor=red,pdfpagemode=FullScreen]{hyperref}
+\usepackage{fixseminar}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, the texpower package is loaded.
+\usepackage{texpower}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Some more parameters...
+\slidesmag{5}
+\slideframe{none}
+\pagestyle{empty}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+\renewcommand{\currentpagevalue}{\value{slide}}
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% The following command produces a title page for every example and documentation file.
+\newcommand{\makeslidetitle}[1]
+{%
+ \title{The \TeX Power bundle\\[2ex]{\normalfont #1}}
+ \author
+ {%
+ Stephan Lehmke\\
+ \mdseries
+ University of Dortmund\\
+ \mdseries
+ Department of Computer Science I\\
+ \url{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@udo.edu}%
+ }
+ {\centerslidestrue
+ \maketitle
+ \newslide}
+ \setcounter{firststep}{1}% This way, the first step of all examples is displayed.
+}
+\hypersetup{pdftitle={texpower tpslifonts example}}
+\slidesmag{4}
+\else % NOT TPaware
+% Load everything manually.
+\pagestyle{empty}
+\newcommand{\makeslidetitle}[1]
+{%
+ \begin{center}
+ {\leavevmode\Large\sffamily
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+
+ \textbf{The \TeX Power bundle\\{\normalfont #1}}
+ \par}
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+
+ Stephan Lehmke\\
+ University of Dortmund\\
+ Department of Computer Science I\\
+ \url{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@udo.edu}%
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \today
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+
+ \vspace*{\fill}
+ \end{center}
+ \newpage
+}
+
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}%
+ {-1.5ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.5ex}%
+ {.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries}}
+
+\let\code\texttt
+\let\concept\textbf
+\let\underl\textbf
+\let\name\textsc
+\newcommand{\macroname}[1]{\code{\textbackslash##1}}
+
+\newenvironment{slide}{\raggedright}{}
+
+\newenvironment{presentbox}{\par\begin{minipage}[t]{\linewidth}}{\end{minipage}\par}
+
+\let\present=\fbox
+\fi % END TPaware
+
+\newboolean{TPSFamsfonts}
+\@ifpackageloaded{amsfonts}{\setboolean{TPSFamsfonts}{true}}{}
+\newboolean{TPSFlasy}
+\@ifpackageloaded{latexsym}{\setboolean{TPSFlasy}{true}}{}
+\newboolean{TPSFwasysym}
+\@ifpackageloaded{wasysym}{\setboolean{TPSFwasysym}{true}}{}
+\newboolean{TPSFstmaryrd}
+\@ifpackageloaded{stmaryrd}{\setboolean{TPSFstmaryrd}{true}}{}
+\newboolean{TPSFrsfs}
+\@ifpackageloaded{mathrsfs}{\setboolean{TPSFrsfs}{true}}{}
+\newboolean{TPSFdstroke}
+\@ifpackageloaded{dsfont}{\setboolean{TPSFdstroke}{true}}{}
+\makeatother
+
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Finally, everything is set up. Here we go...
+%
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% Body of slifonts example.
+%
+
+\newcommand{\textbfsl}[1]{\textbf{\textsl{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\textbfit}[1]{\textbf{\textit{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\textbfsc}[1]{\textbf{\textsc{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\textcsl}[1]{\textc{\textsl{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\textsbsl}[1]{\textsb{\textsl{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\textsbc}[1]{{\fontseries{sbc}\selectfont#1}}
+\newcommand{\textb}[1]{{\fontseries{b}\selectfont#1}}
+\newcommand{\textsb}[1]{{\fontseries{sb}\selectfont#1}}
+\newcommand{\textc}[1]{{\fontseries{c}\selectfont#1}}
+\newcommand{\textui}[1]{{\fontshape{ui}\selectfont#1}}
+\newcommand{\textff}[1]{{\fontfamily{cmfr}\selectfont#1}}
+\newcommand{\textffi}[1]{{\fontfamily{cmfr}\textit{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\textdh}[1]{{\fontfamily{cmdh}\selectfont#1}}
+\newcommand{\textfib}[1]{{\fontfamily{cmfib}\selectfont#1}}
+\newcommand{\textfibsl}[1]{{\fontfamily{cmfib}\selectfont\textsl{#1}}}
+
+\makeatletter
+\@namedef{TextFontNamelcmssOT1}{SliTeX Sans Serif (\code{lcmss})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameShortlcmssOT1}{\code{lcmss}}
+
+\@namedef{TextItFontNamelcmssOT1}{SliTeX Sans-Serif Slanted (\code{lcmssi})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontslcmssOT1}%
+{%
+ {SliTeX Sans Serif (\code{lcmss})}\textnormal,%
+ {SliTeX Sans-Serif Slanted (\code{lcmssi})}\textsl,%
+ {SliTeX Sans-Serif bold (\code{lcmssb})}\textbf%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNamelcmssT1}{European Computer Modern Sans Serif Quotation (\code{eclq})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameShortlcmssT1}{\code{eclq}}
+
+\@namedef{TextItFontNamelcmssT1}{European Computer Modern Sans Serif Quotation Inclined (\code{ecli})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontslcmssT1}%
+{%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif Quotation (\code{eclq})}\textnormal,%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif Quotation Inclined (\code{ecli})}\textsl,%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif Quotation Bold (\code{eclb})}\textbf,%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif Quotation Bold Oblique (\code{eclo})}\textbfsl%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNamecmrOT1}{Computer Modern Roman (\code{cmr})}
+\expandafter\let\csname TextFontNamecmrmOT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TextFontNamecmrOT1\endcsname
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameShortcmrOT1}{\code{cmr}}
+\expandafter\let\csname TextFontNameShortcmrmOT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TextFontNameShortcmrOT1\endcsname
+
+\@namedef{TextItFontNamecmrOT1}{Computer Modern Text Italic (\code{cmti})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontscmrOT1}%
+{%
+ {Computer Modern Roman (\code{cmr})}\textnormal,%
+ {Computer Modern Slanted Roman (\code{cmsl})}\textsl,%
+ {Computer Modern Text Italic (\code{cmti})}\textit,%
+ {Computer Modern Roman Caps and Small Caps (\code{cmcsc})}\textsc,%
+ {Computer Modern Unslanted Italic (\code{cmu})}\textui,%
+ {Computer Modern Bold Roman (\code{cmb})}\textb,%
+ {Computer Modern Bold Extended Roman (\code{cmbx})}\textbf,%
+ {Computer Modern Bold Extended Slanted Roman (\code{cmbxsl})}\textbfsl,%
+ {Computer Modern Bold Extended Text Italic (\code{cmbxti})}\textbfit,%
+ {Computer Modern Funny Roman (\code{cmff})}\textff,%
+ {Computer Modern Funny Italic (\code{cmfi})}\textffi,%
+ {Computer Modern Dunhill Roman (\code{cmdunh})}\textdh,%
+ {Computer Modern Roman Fibonacci Font (\code{cmfib})}\textfib%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNamecmrT1}{European Computer Modern Roman Medium (\code{ecrm})}
+\expandafter\let\csname TextFontNamecmrmT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TextFontNamecmrT1\endcsname
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameShortcmrT1}{\code{ecrm}}
+\expandafter\let\csname TextFontNameShortcmrmT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TextFontNameShortcmrT1\endcsname
+
+\@namedef{TextItFontNamecmrT1}{European Computer Modern Text Italic (\code{ecti})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontscmrT1}%
+{%
+ {European Computer Modern Roman Medium (\code{ecrm})}\textnormal,%
+ {European Computer Modern Roman Slanted (\code{ecsl})}\textsl,%
+ {European Computer Modern Text Italic (\code{ecti})}\textit,%
+ {European Computer Modern Caps and Small Caps (\code{eccc})}\textsc,%
+ {European Computer Modern Bold Extend Roman (\code{ecbx})}\textbf,%
+ {European Computer Modern Roman Bold (Non-Extended) (\code{ecrb})}\textb,%
+ {European Computer Modern Bold Extended Text Italic (\code{ecbi})}\textbfit,%
+ {European Computer Modern Bold Extended Slanted Roman (\code{ecbl})}\textbfsl,%
+ {European Computer Modern Bold Extended Caps and Small Caps (\code{ecxc})}\textbfsc,%
+ {European Computer Modern Unslanted Italic (\code{ecui})}\textui,%
+% {European Computer Modern Funny Roman (\code{ecff})}\textff,% unable to make tfm ?!?
+% {European Computer Modern Funny Italic (\code{ecfi})}\textffi,%
+ {European Computer Modern Dunhill Roman (\code{ecdh})}\textdh,%
+ {European Computer Modern Fibonacci Font (\code{ecfb})}\textfib,%
+ {European Computer Modern Fibonacci Slanted Font (\code{ecfs})}\textfibsl%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNamecmssOT1}{Computer Modern Sans Serif (\code{cmss})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameShortcmssOT1}{\code{cmss}}
+
+\@namedef{TextItFontNamecmssOT1}{Computer Modern Slanted Sans Serif (\code{cmssi})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontscmssOT1}%
+{%
+ {Computer Modern Sans Serif (\code{cmss})}\textnormal,%
+ {Computer Modern Slanted Sans Serif (\code{cmssi})}\textsl,%
+ {Computer Modern Sans Serif Demibold Condensed (\code{cmssdc})}\textsbc,%
+ {Computer Modern Sans Serif Bold Extended (\code{cmssbx})}\textbf%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNamecmssT1}{European Computer Modern Sans Serif (\code{ecss})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameShortcmssT1}{\code{ecss}}
+
+\@namedef{TextItFontNamecmssT1}{European Computer Modern Sans Serif Inclined (\code{ecsi})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontscmssT1}%
+{%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif (\code{ecss})}\textnormal,%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif Inclined (\code{ecsi})}\textsl,%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif Bold Extended (\code{ecsx})}\textbf,%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif Bold Extended Oblique (\code{ecso})}\textbfsl,%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif Demi Condensed (\code{ecssdc})}\textsbc%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNamecmbrOT1}{Computer Modern Bright (\code{cmbr})}
+\expandafter\let\csname TextFontNamecmbrmtOT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TextFontNamecmbrOT1\endcsname
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameShortcmbrOT1}{\code{cmbr}}
+\expandafter\let\csname TextFontNameShortcmbrmtOT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TextFontNameShortcmbrOT1\endcsname
+
+\@namedef{TextItFontNamecmbrOT1}{Computer Modern Bright Slanted (\code{cmbrsl})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontscmbrOT1}%
+{%
+ {Computer Modern Bright (\code{cmbr})}\textnormal,%
+ {Computer Modern Bright Slanted (\code{cmbrsl})}\textsl,%
+ {Computer Modern Bright Bold Extended (\code{cmbrbx})}\textbf%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNamecmbrT1}{European Computer Modern Bright medium regular (\code{ebmr})}
+\expandafter\let\csname TextFontNamecmbrmtT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TextFontNamecmbrT1\endcsname
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameShortcmbrT1}{\code{ebmr}}
+\expandafter\let\csname TextFontNameShortcmbrmtT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TextFontNameShortcmbrT1\endcsname
+
+\@namedef{TextItFontNamecmbrT1}{European Computer Modern Bright medium oblique (\code{ebmo})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontscmbrT1}%
+{%
+ {European Computer Modern Bright medium regular (\code{ebmr})}\textnormal,%
+ {European Computer Modern Bright medium oblique (\code{ebmo})}\textsl,%
+ {European Computer Modern Bright semibold regular (\code{ebsr})}\textsb,%
+ {European Computer Modern Bright semibold oblique (\code{ebso})}\textsbsl%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameccrOT1}{Concrete Roman (\code{ccr})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameShortccrOT1}{\code{ccr}}
+
+\@namedef{TextItFontNameccrOT1}{Concrete Text Italic (\code{ccti})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontsccrOT1}%
+{%
+ {Concrete Roman (\code{ccr})}\textnormal,%
+ {Concrete Slanted Roman (\code{ccsl})}\textsl,%
+ {Concrete Text Italic (\code{ccti})}\textit,%
+ {Concrete Roman Caps and Small Caps (\code{cccsc})}\textsc,%
+ {Concrete Slanted Condensed Roman (\code{ccslc})}\textcsl,%
+ {Computer Modern Sans Serif Bold Extended (\code{cmssbx}) as a replacement for `bold' ccr}\textbf%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameccrT1}{European Concrete Roman (\code{eorm})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontNameShortccrT1}{\code{eorm}}
+
+\@namedef{TextItFontNameccrT1}{European Computer Concrete Text Italic (\code{eoti})}
+
+\@namedef{TextFontsccrT1}%
+{%
+ {European Concrete Roman (\code{eorm})}\textnormal,%
+ {European Computer Concrete Slanted (\code{eosl})}\textsl,%
+ {European Computer Concrete Text Italic (\code{eoti})}\textit,%
+ {European Concrete Roman Caps and Small Caps (\code{eocc})}\textsc,%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif Bold Extended (\code{ecsx}) as a replacement for `bold' ccr}\textbf,%
+ {European Computer Modern Sans Serif Bold Extended Oblique (\code{ecso}) as a replacement for `bold slanted' ccr}%
+ \textbfsl%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontNamelcmssOT1}{Computer Modern Typewriter Text (\code{cmtt})}
+
+\@namedef{TTItFontNamelcmssOT1}{Computer Modern Italic Typewriter Text (\code{cmitt})}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontslcmssOT1}%
+{%
+ {Computer Modern Typewriter Text (\code{cmtt})}\textnormal,%
+ {Computer Modern Italic Typewriter Text (\code{cmitt})}\textit,%
+ {Computer Modern Slanted Typewriter Text (\code{cmsltt})}\textsl,%
+ {Computer Modern Typewriter Caps and Small Caps (\code{cmtcsc})}\textsc%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontNamelcmssT1}{European Computer Modern LaTeX Typewriter (\code{ecltt})}
+
+\@namedef{TTItFontNamelcmssT1}{European Computer Modern Italic Typewriter Text (\code{ecit})}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontslcmssT1}%
+{%
+ {European Computer Modern LaTeX Typewriter (\code{ecltt})}\textnormal,%
+ {European Computer Modern Italic Typewriter Text (\code{ecit})}\textit,%
+ {European Computer Modern Slanted Typewriter Text (\code{ecst})}\textsl,%
+ {European Computer Modern Typewritr Caps and Small Caps (\code{ectc})}\textsc%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontNamecmrOT1}{Computer Modern Typewriter Text (\code{cmtt})}
+
+\@namedef{TTItFontNamecmrOT1}{Computer Modern Italic Typewriter Text (\code{cmitt})}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontscmrOT1}%
+{%
+ {Computer Modern Typewriter Text (\code{cmtt})}\textnormal,%
+ {Computer Modern Italic Typewriter Text (\code{cmitt})}\textit,%
+ {Computer Modern Slanted Typewriter Text (\code{cmsltt})}\textsl,%
+ {Computer Modern Typewriter Caps and Small Caps (\code{cmtcsc})}\textsc%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontNamecmrT1}{European Computer Modern Typewriter (\code{ectt})}
+
+\@namedef{TTItFontNamecmrT1}{European Computer Modern Italic Typewriter Text (\code{ecit})}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontscmrT1}%
+{%
+ {European Computer Modern Typewriter (\code{ectt})}\textnormal,%
+ {European Computer Modern Italic Typewriter Text (\code{ecit})}\textit,%
+ {European Computer Modern Slanted Typewriter Text (\code{ecst})}\textsl,%
+ {European Computer Modern Typewritr Caps and Small Caps (\code{ectc})}\textsc%
+}
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTFontscmssOT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTFontscmrOT1\endcsname
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTFontscmssT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTFontscmrT1\endcsname
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTFontNamecmssOT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTFontNamecmrOT1\endcsname
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTFontNamecmssT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTFontNamecmrT1\endcsname
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTItFontNamecmssOT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTItFontNamecmrOT1\endcsname
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTItFontNamecmssT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTItFontNamecmrT1\endcsname
+
+\@namedef{TTFontNamecmbrOT1}{CM Typewriter Light (\code{cmtl})}
+
+\@namedef{TTItFontNamecmbrOT1}{CM Typewriter Light Slanted (\code{cmsltl})}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontscmbrOT1}%
+{%
+ {CM Typewriter Light (\code{cmtl})}\textnormal,%
+ {CM Typewriter Light Slanted (\code{cmsltl})}\textsl%
+}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontNamecmbrT1}{EC Typewriter Light (\code{ebtl})}
+
+\@namedef{TTItFontNamecmbrT1}{EC Typewriter Light oblique (\code{ebto})}
+
+\@namedef{TTFontscmbrT1}%
+{%
+ {EC Typewriter Light (\code{ebtl})}\textnormal,%
+ {EC Typewriter Light oblique (\code{ebto})}\textsl%
+}
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTFontsccrOT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTFontscmrOT1\endcsname
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTFontsccrT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTFontscmrT1\endcsname
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTFontNameccrOT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTFontNamecmrOT1\endcsname
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTFontNameccrT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTFontNamecmrT1\endcsname
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTItFontNameccrOT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTItFontNamecmrOT1\endcsname
+
+\expandafter\let\csname TTItFontNameccrT1\expandafter\endcsname\csname TTItFontNamecmrT1\endcsname
+
+\@namedef{MathFontNamecmm}{Computer Modern Math}
+
+\@namedef{MathFontNameccm}{Concrete Math}
+
+\@namedef{MathFontNameeuler}{Euler}
+
+\@namedef{MathFontNamecmbrm}{Computer Modern Bright Math}
+
+\@namedef{MathLetterFontNamecmm}{Computer Modern Math Italic (\code{cmmi})}
+
+\@namedef{MathLetterFontNameccm}{Concrete Math Italic (\code{xccmi})}
+
+\@namedef{MathLetterFontNameeuler}{Euler Roman Medium (\code{eurm})}
+
+\@namedef{MathLetterFontNamecmbrm}{Computer Modern Bright Math Slanted (\code{cmbrmi})}
+
+\@namedef{MathSymbolFontNamecmm}{Computer Modern Math Symbols (\code{cmsy})}
+
+\@namedef{MathSymbolFontNameccm}{Concrete Math Symbols (\code{xccsy})}
+
+\@namedef{MathSymbolFontNameeuler}{Euler Script Medium (\code{eusm})}
+
+\@namedef{MathSymbolFontNamecmbrm}{Computer Modern Bright Math Symbols (\code{cmbrmi})}
+
+\@namedef{MathExtensionFontNamecmm}{Computer Modern Math Extension (\code{cmex})}
+
+\@namedef{MathExtensionFontNameccm}{Concrete Math Extension (\code{xccex})}
+
+\@namedef{MathExtensionFontNameeuler}{Euler Extension (\code{euex})}
+
+\expandafter\let\csname MathExtensionFontNamecmbrm\expandafter\endcsname\csname MathExtensionFontNamecmm\endcsname
+
+\newcommand{\listdescriptions}[1]
+{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@listdescriptions\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ {\csname#1\endcsname}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\@listdescriptions}[1]{\@for\temp := #1 \do {\expandafter\mkdescription\temp}}
+
+\newcommand{\mkdescription}[2]{}
+
+\newcommand{\TextFontName}{\@nameuse{TextFontName\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}}
+
+\newcommand{\TextFontNameShort}{\@nameuse{TextFontNameShort\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}}
+
+\let\nameuse\@nameuse
+\makeatother
+
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+\makeslidetitle{\TeX Power Example: Package \code{tpslifonts}}\label{Sec:tpslifonts}
+
+This is the demonstration document for \code{tpslifonts}, \TeX Power's slide fonts configuration package.
+
+Beamer and overhead presentations are often viewed under peculiar circumstances. Especially for presentations which are
+projected directly `out of the computer', low power of the beamer, low resolution and an abundance of colors can lead to
+severe readability problems.
+
+It is therefore of utmost importance to optimize font selection as much as possible towards \emph{readability}.
+
+The package \code{tpslifonts} offers a couple of `harmonising' combinations of text and math fonts from the (distant)
+relatives of \concept{computer modern} fonts, with a couple of extras for optimising readability.
+
+\newpage
+
+The package offers the following features:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Text fonts from \concept{computer modern roman}, \concept{computer modern sans serif}, \concept{Sli\TeX{} computer
+ modern sans serif}, \concept{computer modern bright}, or \concept{concrete roman}.
+\item Math fonts from \concept{computer modern math}, \concept{computer modern bright math}, or \concept{Euler fonts}.
+\item Support of additional symbol fonts like \concept{AMS symbols} or \concept{doublestroke}.
+\item All fonts configured for `smooth scaling' (like in the \code{type1cm} package).
+\item Avoiding fonts not freely available in \concept{Type 1} format.
+\item Careful \concept{design size} selection for optimum readability.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\newpage
+
+In the following, the fonts configured by this package are listed, augmented by font samples and some larger examples
+which hopefully allow to review the configuration parameters.
+
+Note that there are a couple of options and parameter settings in the preamble of \code{slifontsexample.tex} which allow
+to try different configuration variants.
+
+This document has been typeset using \encodingdefault{} font encoding.
+
+\section{Text Fonts}
+
+Package \code{tpslifonts} has configured the following \concept{text fonts}:
+
+\renewcommand{\mkdescription}[2]
+{%
+
+ \medskip\pagebreak[3]
+
+ \hrule
+
+ #1:\\ #2{The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.}
+
+}%
+\listdescriptions{TextFonts\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}
+
+\medskip
+
+\hrule
+
+\medskip
+
+\section{Typewriter Fonts}
+
+\ifthenelse{\isundefined{\TPSFttscale}}{}
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFTextfont}{lcmss}}
+ {For harmonising better with \ifthenelse{\equal{\encodingdefault}{OT1}}{\code{lcmss}}{\code{eclq}}, t}
+ {T}%
+ ypewriter fonts are scaled up by a factor of $\TPSFttscale$.
+}%
+
+Package \code{tpslifonts} has configured the following \concept{typewriter fonts}:
+
+\renewcommand{\mkdescription}[2]
+{%
+
+ \medskip\pagebreak[3]
+
+ \hrule
+
+ #1:\\ #2{\texttt{The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.}}
+
+}%
+\listdescriptions{TTFonts\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}
+
+\medskip
+
+\hrule
+
+\medskip
+
+\section{Math Fonts}
+
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}
+{%
+ The main math fonts are derived from the \concept{\MathFontNameeuler} fonts. Operators%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFeulerdigits}}{}{ and digits} are taken from \TextFontName.
+}%
+{%
+ The main math fonts are derived from the \concept{\nameuse{MathFontName\TPSFMathfont}} fonts.
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFtextops}}%
+ {Operators, digits, and upper case greek letters are taken from \TextFontName.}
+ {}%
+}
+
+\ifthenelse{\isundefined{\TPSFmathscale}}{}
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFTextfont}{lcmss}}
+ {For harmonising better with \ifthenelse{\equal{\encodingdefault}{OT1}}{\code{lcmss}}{\code{eclq}}, m}
+ {M}%
+ ath fonts are scaled up by a factor of $\TPSFmathscale$. %
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}} {Euler fonts are scaled up by a factor of $\TPSFeulerscale$. }
+ {}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{cmbrm}}
+ {The cmbright math fonts are scaled up by a factor of $\TPSFcmbrscale$. }
+ {}%
+}%
+
+\medskip\pagebreak[3]
+
+\hrule\nopagebreak
+
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}
+{%
+ Operators\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFeulerdigits}}{}{ and digits} are taken from \TextFontName:\\
+ $\min \max \sup \lim \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFeulerdigits}}{}{1 2 3 4 5}$
+
+ \medskip
+
+ \hrule
+
+ Latin and greek letters\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFeulerdigits}}{, digits,}{} and some symbols are taken from (virtual)
+ Euler Roman (\code{zeur}):\\
+ $abcd ABCD>/<\alpha \beta \gamma \delta\Phi \Pi \Gamma \Theta\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFeulerdigits}}{1 2 3 4 5}{}$
+
+ \medskip
+
+ \begin{samepage}
+ \hrule\nopagebreak
+
+ Symbols and calligraphic letters are taken from (virtual) Euler Script (\code{zeus}):\\
+ $ \mathcal{ABC} -*+ = \div\equiv \leq \forall \cap \cup \nabla \neq$
+ \par
+ \end{samepage}
+
+ \medskip
+
+ \hrule
+
+ \parbox{\linewidth-\widthof{$\displaystyle\left(\sum^{\left\{\bigcup\limits^\bigoplus\right\}}_{\left[\prod\limits_\biguplus\right]}\right)$}-1ex}
+ {%
+ Large and growing symbols are taken from (virtual) Euler Extension (\code{zeuex}).
+ }\hfill
+ $\displaystyle\left(\sum^{\left\{\bigcup\limits^\bigoplus\right\}}_{\left[\prod\limits_\biguplus\right]}\right)$
+}
+{%
+ Operators, digits, some symbols and upper case greek letters are taken from
+ \nameuse{TextFontName\TPSFOperatorfont OT1}%
+ :\\
+ $\min \max \sup \lim 1 2 3 4 5 + = \Phi \Pi \Gamma \Theta$
+
+ \medskip
+
+ \hrule
+
+ Latin and lower case greek letters and some symbols are taken from \nameuse{MathLetterFontName\TPSFMathfont}%
+ :\\
+ $abcd ABCD >/< \alpha \beta \gamma \delta$
+
+ \medskip
+
+\begin{samepage}
+ \hrule\nopagebreak
+
+ Symbols and calligraphic letters are taken from \nameuse{MathSymbolFontName\TPSFMathfont}%
+ :\\
+ $\mathcal{ABC} -*\div\equiv \leq \forall \cap \cup \nabla \neq$
+ \par
+\end{samepage}
+
+\medskip
+
+\begin{samepage}
+ \hrule\nopagebreak
+
+\parbox{\linewidth-\widthof{$\displaystyle\left(\sum^{\left\{\bigcup\limits^\bigoplus\right\}}_{\left[\prod\limits_\biguplus\right]}\right)$}-1ex}
+{%
+ Large and growing symbols are taken from \nameuse{MathExtensionFontName\TPSFMathfont}.
+}\hfill
+$\displaystyle\left(\sum^{\left\{\bigcup\limits^\bigoplus\right\}}_{\left[\prod\limits_\biguplus\right]}\right)$
+\par
+\end{samepage}
+}
+
+\medskip
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFamsfonts}}
+{%
+ \begin{samepage}
+ \hrule\nopagebreak
+
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{cmbrm}}
+ {%
+ Fraktur letters are taken from Euler Fraktur (\code{eufm}):\\
+ $\mathfrak{abcdABCD}$
+ \par
+ \end{samepage}
+
+ \medskip
+
+ \begin{samepage}
+ \hrule\nopagebreak
+
+ Blackboard bold letters and a lot of additional math symbols are taken from the cmbright AMS math fonts
+ (\code{cmbras}, \code{cmbrbs}):\\
+ $\mathbb{NZQR} \Cap \boxtimes \succapprox \subseteqq \nsubseteq \curvearrowright \complement \varnothing$
+ }
+ {%
+ Fraktur letters, blackboard bold letters, and a lot of additional math symbols are taken from the AMS math fonts
+ (\code{msam}, \code{msbm}, \code{eufm}):\\
+ $\mathfrak{abcdABCD}\mathbb{NZQR} \Cap \boxtimes \succapprox \subseteqq \nsubseteq \curvearrowright \complement
+ \varnothing$
+ }
+ \par
+ \end{samepage}
+
+ \medskip
+}%
+{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFlasy}\and\not\boolean{TPSFwasysym}}
+{%
+ \begin{samepage}
+ \hrule\nopagebreak
+
+ A couple of additional math symbols are taken from the \LaTeX{} symbol font (\code{lasy}):\\
+ $\mho\Join\Box\leadsto\Diamond\sqsubset\sqsupset$
+ \par
+ \end{samepage}
+
+ \medskip
+}%
+{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFstmaryrd}}
+{%
+ \begin{samepage}
+ \hrule\nopagebreak
+
+ Additional math symbols are taken from St Mary's Road symbol font (\code{stmary}):\\
+ $\boxast \merge \nplus \varolessthan \subsetpluseq \lightning$
+ \par
+ \end{samepage}
+
+ \medskip
+}%
+{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFwasysym}}
+{%
+ \begin{samepage}
+ \hrule\nopagebreak
+
+ Additional symbols are taken from Waldis symbol font (\code{wasy}):\\
+ $\oiint$\space \permil\space \phone\space \diameter\space \smiley\space \venus\space \mars
+ \par
+ \end{samepage}
+
+ \medskip
+}%
+{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFrsfs}}
+{%
+ \begin{samepage}
+ \hrule\nopagebreak
+
+ Upper case script letters are taken from Ralph Smith Formal Script (\code{rsfs}):\\
+ $\mathscr{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ}$
+ \par
+ \end{samepage}
+
+ \medskip
+}%
+{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFdstroke}}
+{%
+ \begin{samepage}
+ \hrule\nopagebreak
+
+ Double stroke letters are taken from Doublestroke Font
+ (\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFOperatorfont}{cmr}}{\code{dsrom}}{\code{dsss}}):\\
+ $\mathds{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1hk}$
+ \par
+ \end{samepage}
+
+ \medskip
+}%
+{}
+
+\hrule
+
+\newpage
+\subsection{Math Examples}
+Next, some examples of math formulae so you can see how the fonts work together (translations from german done by me).
+
+\ifthenelse{\isundefined{\align}}{}
+{%
+\medskip
+
+\hrule
+
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \underl{From The Book.}
+ \begin{presentbox}
+ \setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{.3\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \textbf{(D)}\quad The functions $f$ and $g$ fulfil the same functional equation:
+ $f\left(\frac{x}{2}\right)+f\left(\frac{x+1}{2}\right)=2f(x)$ and
+ $g\left(\frac{x}{2}\right)+g\left(\frac{x+1}{2}\right)=2g(x)$.
+
+ For $f(x)$, we obtain this from the addition formulas for the sine and cosine:
+ \begin{align*}
+ f\left(\textstyle\frac{x}{2}\right)+f\left(\textstyle\frac{x+1}{2}\right)
+ &=\pi
+ \left[\frac{\cos\frac{\pi x}{2}}{\sin\frac{\pi x}{2}}-\frac{\sin\frac{\pi x}{2}}{\cos\frac{\pi x}{2}}\right]
+ \\[1ex]
+ &=2\pi\frac{\cos\left(\frac{\pi x}{2}+\frac{\pi x}{2}\right)}{\sin\left(\frac{\pi x}{2}+\frac{\pi x}{2}\right)}
+ =2f(x)\text{.}
+ \end{align*}
+
+ The functional equation for $g$ follows from
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ g_N\left(\textstyle\frac{x}{2}\right)+g_N\left(\textstyle\frac{x+1}{2}\right)
+ =2g_{2N}(x)+\frac{2}{x+2N+1}\text{.}
+ \end{displaymath}
+ \end{presentbox}
+\end{minipage}%
+}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFdstroke}\and\not\isundefined{\align}}
+{%
+\newpage
+
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \underl{From an undergrad book on calculus.}
+ \begin{presentbox}
+ \begin{align*}
+ c_k&=\frac{1}{2\pi}\int_{0}^{2\pi} f(x) e^{-\mathrm{i}kx}\,\mathrm{d}x
+ =\frac{1}{2\pi}\sum_{j=1}^{r}\int_{t_{j-1}}^{t_j} f(x) e^{-\mathrm{i}kx}\,\mathrm{d}x\\
+ &=\frac{-\mathrm{i}}{2\pi k}\int_{0}^{2\pi} \varphi(x) e^{-\mathrm{i}kx}\,\mathrm{d}x
+ =\frac{-\mathrm{i}\gamma_k}{k}\text{.}
+ \end{align*}
+ As for all $\alpha,\beta\in\mathds{C}$,
+ $\left|\alpha\beta\right|\leq\frac{1}{2}\left(\left|\alpha\right|^2+\left|\beta\right|^2\right)$, it holds that
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \left|c_k\right|\leq\frac{1}{2}\left(\frac{1}{\left|k\right|^2}+\left|\gamma_k\right|^2\right)\text{.}
+ \end{displaymath}
+ From the convergence of $\sum\limits_{k=1}^{\infty}\frac{1}{k^2}$ and
+ $\sum\limits_{k=-\infty}^{\infty}\left|\gamma_k\right|^2$, it follows that
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \sum_{k=-\infty}^{\infty}\left|c_k\right|<\infty\text{.}
+ \end{displaymath}
+ \end{presentbox}
+\end{minipage}%
+}
+{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\isundefined{\align}\or\isundefined{\extrarowheight}}{}
+{%
+\newpage
+
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \underl{From an undergrad book on calculus (2nd volume).}
+ \begin{presentbox}
+ \small
+ By \name{Fubini}'s theorem,
+ \setcounter{equation}{8}%
+ \begin{equation}
+ \label{eq:GaussLemma1}
+ \int\limits_{Z_\varepsilon}\operatorname{div} F \,\mathrm{d}x
+ = \sum_{k=1}^{n}\,
+ \underbrace
+ {%
+ \int\limits_{Q'}
+ \left(
+ \int\limits^{h\left(x'\right)-\varepsilon}_{-\infty}\partial_kF_k\left(x',x_n\right)\,\mathrm{d}x_n
+ \right)
+ \,\mathrm{d}x'
+ }_{{}\mathrel{=:} I_k}
+ \text{.}
+ \end{equation}
+ Evaluation of $I_k$: Obviously,
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ I_n=\int\limits_{Q'}F_n\left(x',h(x'-\varepsilon)\right)\,\mathrm{d}x'\text{.}
+ \end{displaymath}
+ In the case $1\leq k \leq n-1$, we employ the identity
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \partial_k
+ \left(
+ \int\limits^{h\left(x'\right)-\varepsilon}_{-\infty}\!\!\!\!\!\!F_k\left(x',x_n\right)\,\mathrm{d}x_n
+ \right)
+ =
+ \begin{array}[t]{@{}>{\displaystyle}l@{}}
+ \int\limits^{h\left(x'\right)-\varepsilon}_{-\infty}
+ \!\!\!\!\!\!\partial_kF_k\left(x',x_n\right)\,\mathrm{d}x_n\\
+ {}+F_k\left(x',h(x'-\varepsilon)\right)\cdot\partial_k h\left(x'\right)\text{.}
+ \end{array}
+ \end{displaymath}
+ \end{presentbox}
+\end{minipage}%
+}
+
+\newpage
+
+\ifthenelse{\isundefined{\align}\or\isundefined{\CD}}{}
+{%
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \underl{From a book on functional analysis.}
+ \begin{presentbox}
+ \textbf{Definition 25}\quad Let $\mathcal{C}$ and $\mathcal{D}$ be categories and $\mathcal{F}, \mathcal{G}$
+ functors from $\mathcal{C}$ into $\mathcal{D}$. A mapping
+ $\eta:\operatorname{Ob}\mathcal{C}\to\operatorname{Mor}\mathcal{D}$ is called a \concept{natural transformation
+ between $\mathcal{F}$ and $\mathcal{G}$} if
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item[(i)] $\forall
+ A\in\operatorname{Ob}\mathcal{C}:
+ \eta(A)\in\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathcal{D}}\left(\mathcal{F}(A),\mathcal{G}(A)\right)$
+ \item[(ii)] $\forall A,B\in\operatorname{Ob}\mathcal{C}\;\forall f\in\operatorname{Mor}_{\mathcal{C}}(A,B):$
+ \begin{align*}
+ \begin{CD}
+ \mathcal{F}(A)@>{\mathcal{F}(f)}>>\mathcal{F}(B)\\
+ @V{\eta(A)}VV @VV{\eta(B)}V\\
+ \mathcal{G}(A)@>>{\mathcal{G}(f)}>\mathcal{G}(B)\\
+ \end{CD}
+ &&\text{or}&&
+ \begin{CD}
+ \mathcal{F}(A)@<{\mathcal{F}(f)}<<\mathcal{F}(B)\\
+ @V{\eta(A)}VV @VV{\eta(B)}V\\
+ \mathcal{G}(A)@<<{\mathcal{G}(f)}<\mathcal{G}(B)\\
+ \end{CD}
+ \end{align*}
+ respectively, commute, if $\mathcal{F}, \mathcal{G}$ are covariant or contravariant, respectively.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ This is denoted as $\eta:\mathcal{F}\to \mathcal{G}$. Such a natural transformation is called a \concept{natural
+ equivalence between $\mathcal{F}$ and $\mathcal{G}$} if $\eta(A)$ is an isomorphism for every
+ $A\in\operatorname{Ob}\mathcal{C}$.
+ \end{presentbox}
+\end{minipage}%
+}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFamsfonts}\and\not\isundefined{\align}\and\not\isundefined{\MAT}}
+{%
+\newpage
+
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \underl{From an undergrad book on linear algebra.}
+ \begin{presentbox}
+ \textit{Step 2.}\quad Determine an eigenvector $v_2$ for an eigenvalue $\lambda_2$ of $F_2$ ($\lambda_2$ is also
+ an eigenvalue of $F_1$). Next, determine a $j_2\in\{1,\dots,n\}$ such that
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \mathfrak{B}_3 := (v_1,v_2,w_1,\dots,\widehat{w_{j_1}},\dots,\widehat{w_{j_2}},\dots,w_n)
+ \end{displaymath}
+ is a base of $V$.
+
+ Next, calculate
+ \vspace*{-\baselineskip}
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ M_{\mathfrak{B}_3}(F)=
+ \left(
+ \begin{MAT}(b){ccccccc}
+ \lambda_1&\cdot&\cdot&\cdot&\cdot&\cdot&\cdot\\
+ 0&\lambda_2&\cdot&\cdot&\cdot&\cdot&\cdot\\
+ \cdot&0&&&&&\\
+ \cdot&\cdot&&&&&\\
+ \cdot&\cdot&&&A_3&&\\
+ \cdot&\cdot&&&&&\\
+ 0&0&&&&&
+ \addpath{(2,0,0)rrrrruuuuulllllddddd}\\
+ \end{MAT}
+ \right)\text{.}
+ \end{displaymath}
+ If $W_3:=\operatorname{Span}(w_1,\dots,\widehat{w_{j_1}},\dots,\widehat{w_{j_2}},\dots,w_n)$, then $A_3$
+ determines a linear mapping $F_3:W_3\to W_3$.
+ \end{presentbox}
+\end{minipage}%
+}
+{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\isundefined{\align}}{}
+{%
+\newpage
+
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \underl{From an undergrad book on linear algebra (2nd volume).}
+ \begin{presentbox}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\with}{\;\vline\;}%
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\Set}[2]{\left\{#1\with#2\right\}}%
+ \setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{.5\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength{\belowdisplayskip}{.5\belowdisplayskip}%
+ \textit{Remark.}\quad If $\left(Y_i\right)_{i\in I}$ is a family of affine subspaces $Y_i$ of an affine space $X$,
+ then
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ Y := \bigcup_{i\in I} Y_i\subset X
+ \end{displaymath}
+ is again an affine subspace. If $Y\neq\emptyset$, then
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ T(Y)=\bigcup_{i\in I} T\left(Y_i\right)\text{.}
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+ \textit{Proof.}\quad For $Y=\emptyset$, nothing is to be proved. Otherwise, there is a fixed point $p_0\in Y$ such
+ that
+ \begin{align*}
+ T(Y)&=\Set{\overrightarrow{p_0q}\in T(X)}{q\in\bigcup_{i\in I} Y_i} \\
+ &= \bigcup_{i\in I}\Set{\overrightarrow{p_0q}\in T(X)}{q\in Y_i}=\bigcup_{i\in I} T\left(Y_i\right)\text{.}
+ \end{align*}
+ From this, both claims follow.
+ \end{presentbox}
+\end{minipage}
+}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFrsfs}\and\not\isundefined{\align}}
+{%
+\newpage
+
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \underl{From a book on measure theory.}
+ \begin{presentbox}
+ Analogously, the general \concept{associativity} of $\sigma$-Algebra products is shown, that is
+ \begin{equation}
+ \tag{23.12}
+ \left(\bigotimes_{i=1}^{m}\mathscr{A}_i\right)\otimes\left(\bigotimes_{i=m+1}^{n}\mathscr{A}_i\right)
+ =\bigotimes_{i=1}^{n}\mathscr{A}_i
+ \makebox[0pt][l]{\normalcolor\quad($1\leq m<n$).}
+ \qquad\qquad\qquad\quad
+ \end{equation}
+ Statement (23.11) allows to prove the existence of the product measure for all $n\geq 2$ by induction.
+
+ \medskip
+
+ \textbf{23.9 Theorem}\quad\textit{For $\sigma$-finite measures $\mu_1,\dots,\mu_n$ on
+ $\mathscr{A}_1,\dots,\mathscr{A}_n$, there exists exactly one measure $\pi$ on
+ $\mathscr{A}_1\otimes\dots\otimes\mathscr{A}_n$ such that
+ \begin{equation}
+ \tag{23.13}
+ \pi\left(A_1\times\dots\times A_n\right)=\mu_1(A_1)\cdot\dots\cdot\mu_n(A_n)
+ \end{equation}
+ for all $A_i\in\mathscr{A}_i$ ($i=1,\dots,n$). Here, $\pi$ is also $\sigma$-finite.}
+ \end{presentbox}
+\end{minipage}%
+}
+{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFrsfs}\and\boolean{TPSFdstroke}\and\not\isundefined{\align}}
+{%
+\newpage
+
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \underl{From a book on probability theory.}
+ \begin{presentbox}
+ \textbf{17.3 Lemma}\quad\textit{If\/ $T$ takes values exclusively from $\mathds{N}$, then $X_T$ is an
+ $\mathscr{F}_T$-measurable random variable with values in $\left(\Omega',\mathscr{A}'\right)$. If only
+ $P\left\{T<+\infty\right\}=1$ holds, then up to $P$-almost certain equality there exists exactly one
+ $\mathscr{F}_T$-measurable random variable $X^*$ with values in $\left(\Omega',\mathscr{A}'\right)$ which
+ fulfils the condition
+ \begin{equation}
+ \tag{17.7}
+ X^*(\omega)=X_{T(\omega)}(\omega)
+ \makebox[0pt][l]{\normalcolor\quad for all $\omega\in\{T<\infty\}$.}
+ \qquad\qquad
+ \end{equation}
+ }%
+
+ \smallskip
+
+ \textit{Proof.}\quad It suffices to treat the second case and provide an $\mathscr{F}_T$-measurable random
+ variable fulfilling the given condition. To this end, choose an arbitrary $\omega'\in\Omega'$. We set
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ X^*(\omega) :=
+ \begin{cases}
+ X_{T(\omega)}(\omega),&\omega\in\{T<\infty\}\text{,}\\
+ \omega',&\omega\in\{T=\infty\}\text{.}
+ \end{cases}
+ \end{displaymath}
+ For every $A'\in\mathscr{A}'$, it is to be proved that $A := \left\{X^*\in A'\right\}$ is an element of
+ $\mathscr{F}_T$.
+ \end{presentbox}
+\end{minipage}%
+}
+{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\isundefined{\align}\or\isundefined{\extrarowheight}}{}
+{%
+\newpage
+
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \underl{From my MSc Thesis.}
+ \begin{presentbox}
+ \newcommand{\PV}{\operatorname{PV}}%
+ If we expand equations (4.102) and (4.103), we get
+ \begin{align*}
+ \lefteqn{\left(\sum_{q\in\PV}\max\left(M(q),M(\neg q)\right)\right)-\delta}\quad&\\[1ex]
+ &=
+ \begin{array}[t]{@{}>{\displaystyle}l@{}}
+ \sum_{\substack{q\in\PV\\q\neq p}}
+ \max
+ \left(
+ \begin{array}{@{}l@{}}
+ \frac{m}{M_{{>}s}'\left(\neg p\right)}\cdot M_{{>}s}'(q)
+ +\frac{m}{M_{s}'\left(p\right)}\cdot M_{s}'(q),\\[2ex]
+ \frac{m}{M_{{>}s}'\left(\neg p\right)}\cdot M_{{>}s}'(\neg q)
+ +\frac{m}{M_{s}'\left(p\right)}\cdot M_{s}'(\neg q)
+ \end{array}
+ \right)\\[6ex]
+ {}-\frac{m}{M_{{>}s}'\left(\neg p\right)}\cdot\delta_{{>}s}'
+ -\frac{m}{M_{s}'\left(p\right)}\cdot\delta_{s}'\\[3ex]
+ {}-\left(\frac{m}{M_{{>}s}'\left(\neg p\right)}-1\right)\cdot r_1
+ -\left(\frac{m}{M_{s}'\left(p\right)}-1\right)\cdot r_2\\[3ex]
+ {}-\max(r_1,r_2)+m
+ \end{array}
+ \end{align*}
+ \end{presentbox}
+\end{minipage}%
+}
+
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFamsfonts}\and\not\isundefined{\align}}
+{%
+\newpage
+
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \underl{From my PhD Thesis.}
+ \begin{presentbox}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\Lcap}{\ensuremath{\sqcap}}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\FPcapIcup}{\ensuremath{\uplus}}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\pFl}[1]{\ensuremath{\overline{#1}}}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\Lprimecup}{\ensuremath{\curlyvee}}
+ \def\FpFl(#1,#2)%
+ {%
+ \ensuremath{\mathord
+ {%
+ \mathchoice
+ {\sideset{^{#1}}{^{\,}}{\mathop{\displaystyle\pFl{#2}}}}%
+ {\sideset{^{#1}}{^{\,}}{\mathop{\pFl{#2}}}}%
+ {\sideset{^{\scriptscriptstyle#1}}{^{\,}}{\mathop{\scriptstyle\pFl{#2}}}}%
+ {\sideset{^{\scriptscriptstyle#1}}{^{\,}}{\mathop{\scriptscriptstyle\pFl{#2}}}}%
+ }}%
+ }
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\Lprimesub}{\ensuremath{\preccurlyeq}}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\Lsub}{\ensuremath{\sqsubseteq}}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\FIsub}{\ensuremath{\subseteqq}}
+ By Lemma 2.2.7,
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \FpFl(d,a)\FPcapIcup\FpFl(d',b)
+ =\FpFl({\left(d\Lprimecup \delta\left(\FpFl(d',b)\right)\right)},{a\Lcap \alpha\left(\FpFl(d',b)\right)}).
+ \end{displaymath}
+ Furthermore,
+ \begin{align*}
+ d&\Lprimesub d\Lprimecup \delta\left(\FpFl(d',b)\right),\\
+ a\Lcap \alpha\left(\FpFl(d',b)\right)&\Lsub a.
+ \end{align*}
+ From this,
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \FpFl(d,a)\FIsub\FpFl(d,a)\FPcapIcup\FpFl(d',b)
+ \end{displaymath}
+ follows by (2.3).
+ \end{presentbox}
+\end{minipage}%
+}
+{}
+
+\newcounter{char}%
+\newcounter{symcnt}%
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\charlist}[4]
+{%
+ \begingroup
+ \setcounter{char}{#1}
+ \whiledo{\value{char}<#2}
+ {%
+ \medskip
+ \hrule
+ \hbox{\@for\charht := #3\do{\fontsize{\charht}{\charht}\selectfont#4}}%
+ \stepcounter{char}%
+ \hrule
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\newcommand{\mksymline}[2]
+{%
+ \begingroup
+ \medskip
+ \hrule
+ \hbox
+ {%
+ \@for\charht := #2\do
+ {%
+ \fontsize{\charht}{\charht}\selectfont
+ \setcounter{symcnt}{0}%
+ $%
+ \@for\thesymbol := #1\do
+ {%
+ \ifcase\value{symcnt}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{{\thesymbol}}{}%
+ \or\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{\,\vrule\,{\thesymbol}}{}%
+ \or\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{}{{\thesymbol}}%
+ \or\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{}{\,\vrule\,{\thesymbol}}%
+ \or\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{}{\,\vrule\,{\thesymbol}}%
+ \or\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFamsfonts}}{\,\vrule\,{\thesymbol}}{}%
+ \or\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFlasy}\and\not\boolean{TPSFwasysym}}{\,\vrule\,{\thesymbol}}{}%
+ \or\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFstmaryrd}}{\,\vrule\,{\thesymbol}}{}%
+ \or\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFwasysym}}{\,\vrule\,{\thesymbol}}{}%
+ \fi
+ \stepcounter{symcnt}%
+ }%
+ \;\vrule width1ex\;%
+ $%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \hrule
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\makeatother
+
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFTextfont}{lcmss}}
+{%
+\newpage
+
+\section{Comparison of Characters}
+As mentioned before, \code{tpslifonts} does a little scaling and fiddling with design sizes to make the fonts harmonize
+as much as possible.
+
+The following scaling factors are used in this document:
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{lll}
+ Name&Purpose&Value\\\hline
+ \macroname{TPSFttscale}&Typewriter fonts&\TPSFttscale\\\hline
+ \macroname{TPSFmathscale}&Math fonts related to cm math&\TPSFmathscale\\\hline
+ \macroname{TPSFeulerscale}&Euler math fonts&\TPSFeulerscale\\\hline
+ \macroname{TPSFcmbrscale}&Cmbright math fonts&\TPSFcmbrscale\\\hline
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+Unfortunately, the base font \TextFontName{} is quite excentric wrt the height ratio of upper case and lower case
+letters; compare \TextFontNameShort{} \present{a\,A} with \nameuse{TextFontNameShortcmss\encodingdefault}
+\present{\fontfamily{cmss}\selectfont a\,A}.
+
+For this reason, no amount of scaling can make \TextFontNameShort{} harmonise completely with `normal' fonts.
+
+In this section, you will see lists of similar characters from different fonts, arranged such that you can check how
+good the sizes match. You then have to set your priorities and decide the respective scaling factors accordingly. See
+the comments in the preamble of \code{slifontsexample.tex} for instructions on how to experiment with scaling.
+
+To account for different design sizes, the character samples are shown in several sizes.
+
+\subsection{Digits}
+
+Digits from \TextFontName, \nameuse{TTFontName\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFeulerdigits}}{, Euler Roman (\code{zeur})}{}%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFOperatorfont}{\TPSFTextfont}}{}{, \nameuse{TextFontName\TPSFOperatorfont OT1}},
+\nameuse{TextItFontName\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}, and \nameuse{TTItFontName\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault} are
+listed in sizes 5pt, 6pt, 7pt, 8pt, 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, and 17pt.
+
+\charlist{48}{58}{5,6,7,8,9,10,11,17}
+{%
+ \char\value{char}\texttt{\char\value{char}}%
+ \ifthenelse
+ {%
+ \boolean{TPSFeulerdigits}\OR\not\equal{\TPSFOperatorfont}{\TPSFTextfont}%
+ }%
+ {$\char\value{char}$}{}%
+ \,\textit{\char\value{char}}\textit{\texttt{\char\value{char}}}
+}
+
+\subsection{Upper Case Letters}
+
+Upper Case Letters from \TextFontName, \nameuse{TTFontName\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{, Euler Roman (\code{zeur})}{}%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFOperatorfont}{\TPSFTextfont}}{}{, \nameuse{TextFontName\TPSFOperatorfont OT1}}%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{, Euler Script (\code{zeus}; for calligraphic letters)}{}%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFamsfonts}}
+{%
+ , Euler Fraktur (\code{eufm})%
+ , \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{cmbrm}}{cmbright AMS math (\code{cmbrbs}}{AMS math (\code{msbm}}%
+ ; for blackboard bold)%
+}{}%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFdstroke}}
+{, Doublestroke Font (\ifthenelse{\equal{cmr}{\TPSFTextfont}}{\code{dsrom}}{\code{dsss}})}{}%
+, \nameuse{TextItFontName\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}, \nameuse{TTItFontName\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{}{, \nameuse{MathLetterFontName\TPSFMathfont}}%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{}{, \nameuse{MathSymbolFontName\TPSFMathfont} for calligraphic letters}%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFrsfs}}{, Ralph Smith Formal Script (\code{rsfs})}{}
+are listed in sizes 5pt, 7pt, and 10pt.
+
+\charlist{65}{91}{5,6,7,10}
+{%
+ \char\value{char}\texttt{\char\value{char}}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{$\char\value{char}$}{}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFOperatorfont}{\TPSFTextfont}}{}
+ {$\operatorname{\char\value{char}}$}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{$\mathcal{\char\value{char}}$}{}%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFamsfonts}}{$\mathfrak{\char\value{char}}\mathbb{\char\value{char}}$}{}%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFdstroke}}{$\mathds{\char\value{char}}$}{}%
+ \,\textit{\char\value{char}}\textit{\texttt{\char\value{char}}}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{}{$\char\value{char}$}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{}{$\mathcal{\char\value{char}}$}%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFrsfs}}{$\mathscr{\char\value{char}}$}{}%
+ ~
+}
+
+\subsection{Lower Case Letters}
+
+Lower Case Letters from \TextFontName, \nameuse{TTFontName\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{, Euler Roman (\code{zeur})}{}%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFOperatorfont}{\TPSFTextfont}}{}{, \nameuse{TextFontName\TPSFOperatorfont OT1}}%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFamsfonts}}{, Euler Fraktur (\code{eufm})}{}%
+, \nameuse{TextItFontName\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}, \nameuse{TTItFontName\TPSFTextfont\encodingdefault}%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{}{, \nameuse{MathLetterFontName\TPSFMathfont}}
+are listed in sizes 5pt, 7pt, 10pt, 12pt, and 14pt.
+
+\charlist{97}{123}{5,7,10,12,14}
+{%
+ \char\value{char}\texttt{\char\value{char}}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{$\char\value{char}$}{}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFOperatorfont}{\TPSFTextfont}}{}
+ {$\operatorname{\char\value{char}}$}%
+ \ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFamsfonts}}{$\mathfrak{\char\value{char}}$}{}%
+ \,\textit{\char\value{char}}\textit{\texttt{\char\value{char}}}%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}{}{$\char\value{char}$}%
+ ~
+}
+
+\newpage
+
+\subsection{Math Symbols}
+
+The different math fonts define symbols of similar shape, which should look equally large. Symbols from
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}
+{Euler Roman (\code{zeur}), Euler Symbol (\code{zeus})}
+{%
+ \nameuse{TextFontName\TPSFOperatorfont OT1}, \nameuse{MathLetterFontName\TPSFMathfont},
+ \nameuse{MathSymbolFontName\TPSFMathfont}%
+}%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFamsfonts}}{, \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{cmbrm}}{cmbright }{}AMS math fonts}{}%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFlasy}\and\not\boolean{TPSFwasysym}}{, \LaTeX{} symbol font (\code{lasy})}{}%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFstmaryrd}}{, St Mary's Road symbol font (\code{stmary})}{}%
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFwasysym}}{, Waldis symbol font (\code{wasy})}{}
+are listed in sizes 5pt, 7pt, 10pt, and 12pt.
+
+To make clear which characters stem from which font, they are separated by vertical bars.
+
+\mksymline{\star,+,+,\star,\times,\divideontimes,,\moo,}{5,7,10,12}
+
+\mksymline{,\cup,,,\cup,\Cup,,\nplus,}{5,7,10,12}
+
+\mksymline{,\oplus,,,\oplus,\circledast,,\olessthan,\ocircle}{5,7,10,12}
+
+\mksymline{,\vdash,,,\vdash,\Vdash,,,}{5,7,10,12}
+
+\mksymline{,=,=,,\equiv,\doteqdot,,,}{5,7,10,12}
+
+\mksymline{<,\leq,,<,\leq,\leqslant,\sqsubset,\trianglelefteqslant,\apprle}{5,7,10,12}
+
+\mksymline{\leftharpoondown,\leftarrow,,\leftharpoondown,\leftarrow,\twoheadleftarrow,\leadsto,\leftarrowtriangle,\leadsto}{5,7,10,12}
+}
+{}
+
+\end{slide}
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a549c2dcc40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1621 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% --------------------------------------------------------------
+% Package tpslifonts - part of TeXPower bundle - configure
+% presentation fonts. Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%
+% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%
+% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+% GNU General Public License for more details.
+% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% tpslifonts.dtx,v 1.2 2004/07/27 11:30:39 hansfn Exp
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%
+%<*driver>
+\ProvidesFile{tpslifonts.dtx}
+%</driver>
+%<tpslifonts>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<tpslifonts>\ProvidesPackage{tpslifonts}
+%<*tpslifonts>
+ [2004/07/27 v0.6d Configure presentation fonts.]
+%</tpslifonts>
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\RecordChanges
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{tpslifonts.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{1030}
+%
+% \CharacterTable
+% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{tpslifonts.dtx}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\newenvironment}
+%
+% \title{The \textsf{tpslifonts} package\thanks{This document
+% corresponds to \textsf{tpslifonts}~\fileversion, dated \filedate.}}
+% \author{ Stephan Lehmke \\ \texttt{Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% Presentations to be displayed `online' with a video beamer have special needs
+% concerning font configuration owing to low `screen' resolution and bad
+% contrast caused by possibly bad light conditions combined with color
+% highlighting.
+%
+% This package tries to cater to these needs by offering a holistic
+% configuration of all document fonts, including text, typewriter, and math
+% fonts. Special features are `smooth scaling' of Type1 fonts and careful design
+% size selection for optimal readability.
+%
+% The default is to use ``lcmss'', also called ``slifonts'' for text and the
+% usual cmtt and cmm for typewriter and math. There's a large variety of
+% options and parameters for choosing different text and math fonts, all from
+% the large ``cm'' family of fonts, which has the advantage that readability can
+% be enhanced by scaling small design sizes.
+% A couple of additional math fonts like ams and doublestroke fonts are
+% supported.
+%
+% For some of the options to yield satisfying results, it is neccessary to
+% install additional (free) Type1 fonts on your system.
+% There's no intention to support other font families like the typical
+% ``psnfss'' PostScript fonts, as they usually don't come in different design
+% sizes, making the effort of tuning them for viewing futile. If you wish to use
+% such a font, load it with the usual packages.
+%
+% This package is part of the TeXPower bundle, to be found at\\ |http://texpower.sourceforge.net/|
+%
+% \section{User interface}
+%
+% The package doesn't define any user-level commands; the font
+% configuration is done entirely by package options.
+%
+% Furthermore, the accompanying example document slifontsexample gives a
+% lot of information about the fonts configured and some examples of
+% math typesetting. Please read the comments in slifontsexample.tex
+% carefully and try out some of the configuration variants described
+% therein.
+%
+% \section{Description of package options}
+%
+% \subsection{Text font options}
+%
+% The default is to use \SliTeX\ computer modern sans serif, an eminently
+% readable font and my personal favourite.\\
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\hspace{1cm}}l}
+% Option & Meaning\\ \hline
+% cmr & Set computer modern roman text fonts.\\
+% cmfib & Set computer modern roman Fibonacci text fonts.\\
+% cmss & Set computer modern sans serif text fonts.\\
+% cmbright & Set computer modern bright text fonts.\\
+% concrete & Set concrete text fonts.
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% \subsection{Design size bounding}
+%
+% Usually design sizes are `bounded' by 8pt, that is, if an 8pt (or
+% % lower) design size of a font exists, it will be scaled to larger sizes
+% even if larger design sizes exist, because large design sizes tend to
+% be less readable at low resolutions. For sizes below 8pt, smaller
+% design sizes are used if available.
+%
+% The limit of 8pt is adjustable (downwards) by options. \\
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\hspace{1cm}}l}
+% Option & Meaning\\ \hline
+% scale7pt & Use 7pt as a bound.\\
+% scale6pt & Use 6pt as a bound.\\
+% scale5pt & Use 5pt as a bound.
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% \subsection{Font scaling}
+%
+% The default lcmss text fonts have very high `small letters', making
+% normal-size fonts look small and difficult to read. There are options
+% for scaling up math and typewriter fonts slightly so they harmonize a
+% little more with text fonts.\\
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\hspace{1cm}}l}
+% Option & Meaning\\ \hline
+% scaleupmath & scale up math fonts\\
+% scaleuptt & scale up typewriter fonts
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% \subsection{Math fonts}
+%
+% Because the availability of different fonts in different encodings is
+% not really homogenous, we differentiate between the font used for
+% operator names (plus upper case greek, digits and some symbols) and
+% the font used for other symbols. In some cases (math extension font),
+% the choices are quite limited anyway.
+%
+% The default is to use cmr for operators and such and the standard cmm
+% and relatives for symbols. The concrete option for concrete text fonts
+% selects concrete math fonts by default, but as these don't seem to
+% exist in Type1 format currently, it's recommended to combine concrete
+% text with Euler math.\\
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\hspace{1cm}}p{0.6\textwidth}}
+% Option & Meaning \\ \hline
+% eulermath & Use Euler math fonts. This implies the option textops
+% (see below). \\
+% eulerdigits & Take digits also from the Euler fonts (default: the
+% text font used). Can be used only in conjunction with
+% the eulermath option. \\
+% cmbrightmath & Use cmbright math fonts. \\
+% textops & Take operator names, upper case greek, digits and some
+% symbols from the text font rather than from some font
+% matching the math font (default for Euler math).
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges\PrintIndex}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%
+% \changes{v0.1}{2001/08/10}{First version for the pre-alpha release of
+% texpower.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.2}{2001/11/17}{Added support for stmaryrd fonts.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.3}{2002/10/18}{Rewritten to go without .fd files. Euler package
+% dependence changed to eulervm. Added support for ams, lasy, wasysym, rsfs,
+% dstroke fonts.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.4}{2003/03/25}{Added support for cmbright math.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.5}{2003/03/26}{Added support for T1 encoding.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.6}{2003/05/29}{Change of attitude: I found out how desolate the
+% situation of most presentation packages is wrt fonts. Hence, instead of
+% trying to be as minimally invasive as possible, tpslifonts will try to hijack
+% every single font which might possibly be used in a presentation and replace
+% it by something sensible. No `private' ``lcmr'' to replace ``cmr'' any more
+% - cmr is redefined no matter what. Now configures (almost) all fonts type1cm
+% and type1ec do, plus concrete, cmbright, and euler fonts. Added options
+% ``scale5pt'', ``scale6pt'', ``scale7pt'' to bound the design sizes of fonts
+% used. Added options ``cmr'', ``cmss'', ``cmbright'' and ``concrete'' to
+% choose text fonts different from lcmss. Improved handling of option
+% incompatibilities.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.6a}{2003/06/02}{Removed some font warnings by selecting `silent'
+% forms of declaration. }
+%
+% \changes{v0.6b}{2003/07/19}{A small change making `cmbright' AMS fonts
+% useable before \cs{begin\{document\}}. }
+%
+% \changes{v0.6c}{2003/09/23}{Added the option ``cmfib''.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.6d}{2004/07/27}{Moved to dtx format. No other code changes.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Options and general setup}
+%
+% Text fonts. The default is to use ``slifonts'' (lcmss).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\TPSFTextfont}{lcmss}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option cmr sets ``computer modern roman'' text fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{cmr}{\renewcommand{\TPSFTextfont}{cmr}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option cmfib sets ``computer modern roman Fibonacci'' text fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{cmfib}{\renewcommand{\TPSFTextfont}{cmfib}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option cmss sets ``computer modern roman sans serif'' text fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{cmss}{\renewcommand{\TPSFTextfont}{cmss}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option cmbright sets ``computer modern bright'' text fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{cmbright}{\renewcommand{\TPSFTextfont}{cmbr}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option concrete sets ``concrete'' text fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{concrete}
+{%
+ \renewcommand{\TPSFTextfont}{ccr}%
+ \renewcommand{\TPSFMathfont}{ccm}%
+ \renewcommand{\TPSFOperatorfont}{ccr}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Design size selection}
+%
+% Usually design sizes are `bounded' by 8pt, that is, if
+% an 8pt (or lower) design size of a font exists, it will be scaled to larger
+% sizes even if larger design sizes exist, to enhance readability at low
+% resolutions. For sizes below 8pt, smaller design sizes are used if available.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\TPSFMaxDesignSize}{8}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option scale5pt causes scaled 5pt design sizes to be used wherever
+% possible.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{scale5pt}{\renewcommand{\TPSFMaxDesignSize}{5}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option scale6pt causes scaled 6pt design sizes to be used wherever
+% possible (for font sizes above 6pt).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{scale6pt}{\renewcommand{\TPSFMaxDesignSize}{6}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option scale7pt causes scaled 7pt design sizes to be used wherever
+% possible (for font sizes above 7pt).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{scale7pt}{\renewcommand{\TPSFMaxDesignSize}{7}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% lcmss text fonts have very high `small letters', making normal-size fonts look
+% small and difficult to read.
+% The option scaleupmath (scaleuptt) will scale up math (typewriter) fonts
+% slightly so they harmonize a little more with text fonts.
+% These options do not make much sense with other text fonts, hence a warning
+% (but no error message) is generated to remind the user they might have
+% overlooked something.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newboolean{TPSFscaleup}
+\DeclareOption{scaleupmath}
+{%
+ \providecommand\TPSFmathscale{1.15}%
+ \providecommand\TPSFeulerscale{1.1}%
+ \providecommand\TPSFcmbrscale{1.1}%
+ \setboolean{TPSFscaleup}{true}%
+}
+
+\DeclareOption{scaleuptt}
+{\providecommand\TPSFttscale{1.2}\setboolean{TPSFscaleup}{true}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Math fonts}
+%
+% Because the availability of different fonts in different encodings is not
+% really homogenous, we differentiate between the font used for Operators (plus
+% upper case greek, digits and some symbols) and the font used for other
+% symbols. In some cases (math extension font), the choices are quite limited
+% anyway.
+%
+% The default is to use cmr for operators and such and the standard cmm and
+% relatives for symbols.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\TPSFMathfont}{cmm}
+
+\newcommand{\TPSFOpF@cmm}{cmrm}
+
+\newcommand{\TPSFOpF@ccm}{ccr}
+
+\newcommand{\TPSFOperatorfont}{cmr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option textops makes the operator font follow the text font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newboolean{TPSFtextops}
+\DeclareOption{textops}{\setboolean{TPSFtextops}{true}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option eulermath sets euler math fonts (slightly adapted from the eulervm
+% package to match lcmss better).
+% When using this option, the operator font automatically follows the text
+% font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{eulermath}
+{\renewcommand{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}\setboolean{TPSFtextops}{true}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option eulerdigits works only in conjunction with eulermath and sets the
+% euler-digits option of the eulervm package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newboolean{TPSFeulerdigits}
+\DeclareOption{eulerdigits}
+{%
+ \setboolean{TPSFeulerdigits}{true}%
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{euler-digits}{eulervm}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The option cmbrightmath sets cmbright math fonts (slightly adapted from the
+% cmbright package to match lcmss better).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{cmbrightmath}{\renewcommand{\TPSFMathfont}{cmbrm}}
+
+\newcommand{\TPSFOpF@cmbrm}{cmbrmt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+%
+% \subsubsection{Process options}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Option postprocessing.
+%
+% Parameters |\TPSFmathscale| and such can be (re)defined from outside the
+% tpslifonts package to adjust scaling. If any of these scaling parameters is
+% defined before the tpslifonts package is loaded, there is no need to give the
+% respective option.
+% Here, we test whether the parameters have been provided (either by defining
+% them independently or by giving one of the ``scaleup...'' options), and define
+% the `real' scaling parameter for font definition accordingly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{TPSFmathscale}
+{\let\TPSFmathscale\@undefined\let\mathscale@TPSF\empty}
+{\def\mathscale@TPSF{[\TPSFmathscale]}}
+
+\@ifundefined{TPSFeulerscale}
+{\let\TPSFeulerscale\@undefined\let\eulerscale@TPSF\empty}
+{\def\eulerscale@TPSF{[\TPSFeulerscale]}}
+
+\@ifundefined{TPSFcmbrscale}
+{\let\TPSFcmbrscale\@undefined\let\cmbrscale@TPSF\empty}
+{\def\cmbrscale@TPSF{[\TPSFcmbrscale]}}
+
+\@ifundefined{TPSFttscale}
+{\let\TPSFttscale\@undefined\let\ttscale@TPSF\empty}
+{\def\ttscale@TPSF{[\TPSFttscale]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% As mentioned above, the ``scaleup...'' options make sense really only if lcmss
+% text fonts are used. Otherwise, we give a warning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFscaleup}\and\not\equal{\TPSFTextfont}{lcmss}}
+{%
+ \PackageWarning{tpslifonts}
+ {Using the ``scaleup'' Options makes sense only\MessageBreak
+ when lcmss text fonts are used.\MessageBreak
+ Watch closely whether the results of scaling math\MessageBreak
+ and/or typewriter fonts together with ``\TPSFTextfont''\MessageBreak
+ text fonts is what you intended to achieve.%
+ }%
+}
+{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We need to set the math operator font corresponing to the settings of the
+% TPSFtextops switch, the text and math fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifthenelse{\boolean{TPSFtextops}}
+{\let\TPSFOperatorfont\TPSFTextfont}
+{%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\TPSFOperatorfont
+ \csname TPSFOpF@\TPSFMathfont\endcsname
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The cmbright package also sets text fonts, so if cmbright math is requested,
+% we load the cmbright package first and later overwrite the text font settings
+% (if no cmbright text fonts were requested).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{cmbrm}}
+{%
+ \RequirePackage[standard-baselineskips]{cmbright}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Font shape configuration}
+
+% We need a couple of macros to help in configuring fonts.
+% To increase readability in presentations, design size selection is
+% restricted. Without any options, the largest design size used is 8pt. The
+% options scale5pt ... scale7pt impose further constraints.
+% Another restriction is caused by the availability of design sizes. Not all
+% fonts exist in all design sizes. If no design size exists at all in the
+% requested range (i.e. the font exists only in size 10), then the smallest
+% available size has to be chosen no matter what.
+
+% |\FilterSizes@TPSF<name>{<list>}| filters out all sizes (represented as
+% nonnegative integer numbers) from the comma-separated <list> which are above
+% the threshold in |\TPSFMaxDesignSize| and stores the result in the macro
+% <name>. To avoid inconsistencies if all sizes exceed |\TPSFMaxDesignSize|, the
+% first size is always passed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\FilterSizes@TPSF}[2]{\expandafter\@FilterSizes@TPSF#2,\@nil#1}
+
+\def\@FilterSizes@TPSF#1,#2\@nil#3%
+{%
+ \def#3{#1}%
+ \ifx\empty#2\empty\else\@@FilterSizes@TPSF#2\@nil#3\fi
+}
+
+\def\@@FilterSizes@TPSF#1,#2\@nil#3%
+{%
+ \ifnum#1>\TPSFMaxDesignSize\relax
+ \else
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter#3\expandafter{#3,#1}%
+ \ifx\empty#2\empty\else\@@FilterSizes@TPSF#2\@nil#3\fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareFontShape@TPSF}
+% |\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[<scale>]|\\
+% | {<enc>}{<fam>}{<ser>}{<shp>}{<name>}{<sizes>}|
+% declares a font with presentation-friendly design size selection (which
+% means all design sizes above |\TPSFMaxDesignSize| are filtered out. The actually
+% existing design sizes have to be provided in |<sizes>| as a comma-separated list
+% of numbers. If |<s>| is one of the sizes, it is expected that the corresponding
+% font name can be constructed as |<name><s>|.
+% If the optional argument |<scale>| is given, it has to be of the form
+% |[<factor>]|, where |<factor>| specifies the scaling of the font (see the
+% options ``scaleupmath'' and ``scaleuptt'' above).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\DeclareFontShape@TPSF}[7][]
+{%
+ \FilterSizes@TPSF\sizes@TPSF{#7}%
+ \let\sizedecl@TPSF\empty
+ \def\fontname@TPSF{#6}%
+ \def\scale@TPSF{#1}%
+ \expandafter\parsesizes@TPSF\sizes@TPSF,,\@nil
+ \DeclareFontShape{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{\sizedecl@TPSF}{}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+
+\def\parsesizes@TPSF#1,#2\@nil
+{%
+ \let\prevsize@TPSF\empty
+ \def\currsize@TPSF{#1}%
+ \@parsesizes@TPSF#2\@nil
+}
+
+\def\@parsesizes@TPSF#1,#2\@nil
+{%
+ \edef\sizedecl@TPSF{\sizedecl@TPSF\space<\prevsize@TPSF-#1>s*\scale@TPSF \fontname@TPSF\currsize@TPSF}%
+ \def\currsize@TPSF{#1}%
+ \let\prevsize@TPSF\currsize@TPSF
+ \ifx\currsize@TPSF\empty\else\@parsesizes@TPSF#2\@nil\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Declaration of font shapes}
+%
+% The following is copied more or less verbatim from type1cm.sty,
+% type1ec.sty, and other sources of font definitions for e.g. cmbright fonts.
+% For fonts following the usual naming conventions, we use
+% |\DeclareFontShape@TPSF| instead of |\DeclareFontShape| to implement design size
+% bounding.
+% For T1 ec fonts, the same is achieved by appropriate redefinition of
+% |\EC@family|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\nfss@catcodes
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Text fonts for OT1 encoding}
+%
+% computer modern roman.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font=45}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{cmr}{5,6,7,8,9,10,12,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{cmsl}{8,9,10,12}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmr}{m}{it}{cmti}{7,8,9,10,12}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sc}{cmcsc}{9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmr}{m}{ui}{cmu}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmr}{b}{n}{cmb}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n}{cmbx}{5,6,7,8,9,10,12}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{sl}{cmbxsl}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{it}{cmbxti}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/m/ui}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmfr}{\hyphenchar\font=45}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfr}{m}{n}{%
+ <->s* cmff10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfr}{m}{it}{
+ <->s* cmfi10
+ }{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmdh}{\hyphenchar\font=45}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmdh}{m}{n}{
+ <->s* cmdunh10
+ }{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmfib}{\hyphenchar\font=45}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{m}{n}{
+ <->s* cmfib8
+ }{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{m}{sl}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/m/sl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{m}{it}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{m}{sc}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/m/sc}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{m}{ui}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/m/ui}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{b}{n}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/b/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{bx}{n}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/bx/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{bx}{sl}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/bx/sl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{bx}{it}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/bx/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/m/ui}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% computer modern sans serif.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font=45}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n}{cmss}{8,9,10,12,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{it}
+ {<->sub*cmss/m/sl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmss}{m}{sl}{cmssi}{8,9,10,12,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{sc}
+ {<->sub*cmr/m/sc}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{ui}
+ {<->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmss}{sbc}{n}{cmssdc}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmss}{bx}{n}{cmssbx}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->sub*cmr/bx/ui}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% slide computer modern sans serif.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{lcmss}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{n}{lcmss}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{In}{ilcmss}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{lcmssi}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{Isl}{ilcmssi}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{it}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/m/sl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{Iit}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/m/Isl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{lcmss}{b}{n}{lcmssb}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{lcmss}{b}{In}{ilcmssb}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/b/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{In}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/b/In}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{ui}{%
+ <->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{ui}{%
+ <->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% computer modern bright
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmbr}{\hyphenchar\font45}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmbr}{m}{n}{cmbr}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmbr}{m}{sl}{cmbrsl}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmbr}{m}{it}{%
+<->ssub*cmbr/m/sl%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmbr}{b}{n}{%
+<->ssub*cmbr/bx/n%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{cmbr}{bx}{n}{cmbrbx}{10}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% concrete roman
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{ccr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{ccr}{m}{n}{ccr}{5,6,7,8,9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{ccr}{m}{sl}{ccsl}{9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{ccr}{m}{it}{ccti}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{ccr}{m}{sc}{cccsc}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{bx}{n} {<-> ssub * cmss/bx/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{bx}{sl}{<-> ssub * cmss/bx/sl}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{bx}{it}{<-> ssub * cmss/bx/it}{}
+% \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{bx}{n} {<-> ssub * cmr/bx/n}{}
+% \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{bx}{sl}{<-> ssub * cmr/bx/sl}{}
+% \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{bx}{it}{<-> ssub * cmr/bx/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{sbc}{n} {<-> ssub * cmss/sbc/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{sbc}{sl}{<-> ssub * cmss/sbc/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{sbc}{it}{<-> ssub * cmss/sbc/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{OT1}{ccr}{c}{sl}{ccslc}{9}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Text fonts for T1 encoding}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ecscale@TPSF\empty
+
+\ifcase\TPSFMaxDesignSize
+ \or\or\or\or\or
+ \providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <->s*\ecscale@TPSF#50500%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-6>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50500%
+ <6->s*\ecscale@TPSF#50600%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-6>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50500%
+ <6-7>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50600%
+ <7->s*\ecscale@TPSF#50700%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-6>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50500%
+ <6-7>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50600%
+ <7-8>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50700%
+ <8->s*\ecscale@TPSF#50800%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-6>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50500%
+ <6-7>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50600%
+ <7-8>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50700%
+ <8-9>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50800%
+ <9->s*\ecscale@TPSF#50900%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-6>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50500%
+ <6-7>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50600%
+ <7-8>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50700%
+ <8-9>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50800%
+ <9-10>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50900%
+ <10->s*\ecscale@TPSF#51000%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-6>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50500%
+ <6-7>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50600%
+ <7-8>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50700%
+ <8-9>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50800%
+ <9-10>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50900%
+ <10-10.95>s*\ecscale@TPSF#51000%
+ <10.95->s*\ecscale@TPSF#51095%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-6>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50500%
+ <6-7>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50600%
+ <7-8>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50700%
+ <8-9>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50800%
+ <9-10>s*\ecscale@TPSF#50900%
+ <10-10.95>s*\ecscale@TPSF#51000%
+ <10.95-12>s*\ecscale@TPSF#51095%
+ <12->s*\ecscale@TPSF#51200%
+ }{}}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% european computer modern roman.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\input{t1cmr.fd}
+
+\input{t1cmfr.fd}
+
+\input{t1cmdh.fd}
+
+\input{t1cmfib.fd}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfib}{m}{it}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfib}{m}{sc}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/m/sc}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfib}{m}{ui}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/m/ui}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfib}{b}{n}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/b/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfib}{bx}{n}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/bx/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfib}{bx}{sl}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/bx/sl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfib}{bx}{it}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/bx/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfib}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->ssub * cmr/m/ui}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% european computer modern roman sans serif.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\input{t1cmss.fd}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{cmss}{sbc}{n}{ecssdc}{10}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% european slide computer modern sans serif.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{lcmss}{}
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{lcmss}{m}{n}{eclq}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{lcmss}{m}{In}{ieclq}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{ecli}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{lcmss}{m}{Isl}{iecli}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{m}{it}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/m/sl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{m}{Iit}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/m/Isl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{eclb}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{In}{ieclb}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{eclo}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{Isl}{ieclo}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{it}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/bx/sl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{Iit}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/bx/Isl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{b}{n}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/bx/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{m}{ui}{%
+ <->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{ui}{%
+ <->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% european computer modern bright
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmbr}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{cmbr}{m}{n}{ebmr}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{cmbr}{m}{sl}{ebmo}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmbr}{m}{it}{%
+<->ssub*cmbr/m/sl%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{cmbr}{sb}{n}{ebsr}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{cmbr}{sb}{sl}{ebso}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmbr}{sb}{it}{%
+<->ssub*cmbr/sb/sl%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmbr}{b}{n}{%
+<->ssub*cmbr/bx/n%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmbr}{bx}{n}{%
+<->sub*cmbr/sb/n%
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% european concrete roman
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{ccr}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{ccr}{m}{n}{eorm}{5,6,7,8,9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{ccr}{m}{sl}{eosl}{5,6,7,8,9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{ccr}{m}{it}{eoti}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF{T1}{ccr}{m}{sc}{eocc}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{bx}{n}{%
+<->ssub*cmss/bx/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{bx}{sl}{%
+<->ssub*cmss/bx/sl}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{bx}{it}{%
+<->ssub*cmss/bx/it}{}
+
+% \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{bx}{n}{%
+% <->ssub*cmr/bx/n}{}
+
+% \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{bx}{sl}{%
+% <->ssub*cmr/bx/sl}{}
+
+% \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{bx}{it}{%
+% <->ssub*cmr/bx/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{sbc}{n}{%
+ <->ssubf*ecssdc10}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Typewriter fonts for OT1 encoding}
+%
+% computer modern typewriter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n}{cmtt}{8,9,10,12}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{it}{cmitt}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{sl}{cmsltt}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{sc}{cmtcsc}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{ui}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% `Slides' computer modern typewriter exists only for compatibility with T1
+% encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{lcmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{OT1}{lcmtt}{m}{n}{cmtt}{8,9,10,12}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{OT1}{lcmtt}{m}{it}{cmitt}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{OT1}{lcmtt}{m}{sl}{cmsltt}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{OT1}{lcmtt}{m}{sc}{cmtcsc}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmtt}{m}{ui}
+ {<->sub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmtt}{bx}{n}
+ {<->sub * lcmtt/m/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmtt}{bx}{it}
+ {<->sub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmtt}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->sub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% computer modern typewriter light.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmtl}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtl}{m}{n}{%
+<->s*\ttscale@TPSF cmtl10%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtl}{m}{sl}{%
+<->s*\ttscale@TPSF cmsltl10%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtl}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmtl/m/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Typewriter fonts for T1 encoding}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifcase\TPSFMaxDesignSize
+ \or\or\or\or\or
+ \providecommand{\EC@ttfamily}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF#50800%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@ttfamily}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF#50800%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@ttfamily}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF#50800%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@ttfamily}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF#50800%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@ttfamily}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-9>s*\ttscale@TPSF#50800%
+ <9->s*\ttscale@TPSF#50900%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@ttfamily}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-9>s*\ttscale@TPSF#50800%
+ <9-10>s*\ttscale@TPSF#50900%
+ <10->s*\ttscale@TPSF#51000%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@ttfamily}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-9>s*\ttscale@TPSF#50800%
+ <9-10>s*\ttscale@TPSF#50900%
+ <10-10.95>s*\ttscale@TPSF#51000%
+ <10.95->s*\ttscale@TPSF#51095%
+ }{}}
+ \or
+ \providecommand{\EC@ttfamily}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{%
+ <-9>s*\ttscale@TPSF#50800%
+ <9-10>s*\ttscale@TPSF#50900%
+ <10-10.95>s*\ttscale@TPSF#51000%
+ <10.95-12>s*\ttscale@TPSF#51095%
+ <12->s*\ttscale@TPSF#51200%
+ }{}}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% european computer modern typewriter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\input{t1cmtt.fd}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% european `Slides' computer modern typewriter. There exists \textbf{one} dedicated
+% font ``ecltt8'' for this setup.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{lcmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{m}{n}{%
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF ecltt8%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{m}{In}{%
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF iecltt8%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{m}{it}{%
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF ecit0800%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{m}{sl}{
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF ecst0800
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{m}{sc}{
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF ectc0800
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{m}{ui}
+{<->sub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{bx}{n}
+{<->sub * lcmtt/m/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{bx}{it}
+{<->sub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{bx}{ui}
+{<->sub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% european computer modern typewriter light.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmtl}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtl}{m}{n}{%
+<->s*\ttscale@TPSF ebtl10%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtl}{m}{sl}{%
+<->s*\ttscale@TPSF ebto10%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtl}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmtl/m/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Typewriter fonts for mTT encoding}
+%
+% Used by cmtt.sty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{T@mTT}{}
+{%
+ \DeclareFontFamily{mTT}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{mTT}{cmtt}{m}{n}{cmtt}{8,9,10,12}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{mTT}{cmtt}{m}{it}{cmitt}{10}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{mTT}{cmtt}{m}{sl}{cmsltt}{10}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{mTT}{cmtt}{m}{sc}{cmtcsc}{10}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{cmtt}{m}{ui}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/n}{}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{cmtt}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
+
+ \DeclareFontFamily{mTT}{lcmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{mTT}{lcmtt}{m}{n}{cmtt}{8,9,10,12}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{mTT}{lcmtt}{m}{it}{cmitt}{10}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{mTT}{lcmtt}{m}{sl}{cmsltt}{10}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\ttscale@TPSF]{mTT}{lcmtt}{m}{sc}{cmtcsc}{10}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{lcmtt}{m}{ui}
+ {<->sub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{lcmtt}{bx}{n}
+ {<->sub * lcmtt/m/n}{}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{lcmtt}{bx}{it}
+ {<->sub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{lcmtt}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->sub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
+
+ \DeclareFontFamily{mTT}{cmtl}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{cmtl}{m}{n}{%
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF cmtl10%
+ }{}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{cmtl}{m}{sl}{%
+ <->s*\ttscale@TPSF cmsltl10%
+ }{}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape{mTT}{cmtl}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmtl/m/sl}{}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Math fonts}
+%
+% computer modern math italic.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{cmm}{\skewchar\font127}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}{cmmi}{5,6,7,8,9,10,12}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OML}{cmm}{m}{Iit}{icmmi}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OML}{cmm}{b}{it}{cmmib}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmm}{bx}{it}%
+ {<->ssub*cmm/b/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{cmr}{\skewchar\font127 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{m}{n}
+ {<-> ssub * cmm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{m}{it}
+ {<-> ssub * cmm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{m}{sl}
+ {<-> ssub * cmm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{m}{sc}
+ {<-> ssub * cmm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{bx}{n}
+ {<-> ssub * cmm/b/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{bx}{it}
+ {<-> ssub * cmm/b/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{bx}{sl}
+ {<-> ssub * cmm/b/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{bx}{sc}
+ {<-> ssub * cmm/b/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmrm}{\hyphenchar\font=45}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmrm}{m}{n}{cmr}{5,6,7,8,9,10,12,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmrm}{m}{it}{cmti}{7,8,9,10,12}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmrm}{bx}{n}{cmbx}{5,6,7,8,9,10,12}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmrm}{bx}{it}{cmbxti}{10}
+
+{%
+\let\ecscale@TPSF\mathscale@TPSF
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmrm}{}
+
+\EC@family{T1}{cmrm}{m}{n}{ecrm}
+
+\EC@family{T1}{cmrm}{m}{it}{ecti}
+
+\EC@family{T1}{cmrm}{bx}{n}{ecbx}
+
+\EC@family{T1}{cmrm}{bx}{it}{ecbi}
+}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmsy}{\skewchar\font48}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}{cmsy}{5,6,7,8,9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OMS}{cmsy}{b}{n}{cmbsy}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{In}{icmsy}{8}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmr}{\skewchar\font48 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{m}{n}
+ {<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{m}{it}
+ {<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{m}{sl}
+ {<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{m}{sc}
+ {<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{bx}{n}
+ {<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{bx}{it}
+ {<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{bx}{sl}
+ {<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{bx}{sc}
+ {<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMX}{cmex}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}{cmex}{7,10}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Euler fonts (eulervm style).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{zeur}{\skewchar \font =127}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\eulerscale@TPSF]{U}{zeur}{m}{n}{zeurm}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\eulerscale@TPSF]{U}{zeur}{b}{n}{zeurb}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{zeur}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * zeur/b/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{zeus}{\skewchar \font =176}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\eulerscale@TPSF]{U}{zeus}{m}{n}{zeusm}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\eulerscale@TPSF]{U}{zeus}{b}{n}{zeusb}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{zeus}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * zeus/b/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{zeuex}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{zeuex}{m}{n}{
+ <->s* \eulerscale@TPSF zeuex10
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% computer modern bright math slanted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{cmbrm}{\skewchar\font 127}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{OML}{cmbrm}{m}{it}{cmbrmi}{8,9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{OML}{cmbrm}{b}{it}{cmbrmb}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{cmbr}{\skewchar\font 127}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmbr}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmbrm/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmbr}{sb}{it}{<->ssub*cmbrm/b/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmbr}{bx}{it}{<->ssub*cmbrm/b/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmbrmt}{\hyphenchar\font45}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmbrmt}{m}{n}{cmbr}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmbrmt}{m}{sl}{cmbrsl}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmbrmt}{m}{it}{%
+<->ssub*cmbrmt/m/sl%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{OT1}{cmbrmt}{bx}{n}{cmbrbx}{10}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmbrmt}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{T1}{cmbrmt}{m}{n}{ebmr}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{T1}{cmbrmt}{m}{sl}{ebmo}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmbrmt}{m}{it}{%
+<->ssub*cmbrmt/m/sl%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{T1}{cmbrmt}{sb}{n}{ebsr}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{T1}{cmbrmt}{sb}{sl}{ebso}{8,9,10,17}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmbrmt}{sb}{it}{%
+<->ssub*cmbrmt/sb/sl%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmbrmt}{bx}{n}{%
+<->sub*cmbrmt/sb/n%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmbrmt}{bx}{it}{%
+<->sub*cmbrmt/sb/it%
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmbrs}{\skewchar\font 48}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{OMS}{cmbrs}{m}{n}{cmbrsy}{8,9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmbrs}{m}{b}{<->ssub*cmbrs/m/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmbr}{\skewchar\font 48}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmbr}{m}{n}{<->ssub*cmbrs/m/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmbr}{m}{b}{<->ssub*cmbrs/m/n}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Concrete Math Italic
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{ccm}{\skewchar\font127 }
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OML}{ccm}{m}{it}{xccmi}{5,6,7,8,9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ccm}{b}{it}{<-> ssub * cmm/b/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ccm}{c}{it}{<9>\mathscale@TPSF ccmic9}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{ccr}{\skewchar\font127 }
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ccr}{m}{it} {<->ssub * ccm/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ccr}{bx}{it} {<->ssub * ccm/b/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ccr}{sbc}{it}{<->ssub * ccm/m/it}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{ccsy}{\skewchar\font48 }
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{OMS}{ccsy}{m}{n}{xccsy}{5,6,7,8,9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{ccsy}{b}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{ccr}{\skewchar\font48 }
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{ccr}{m}{n} {<->ssub * ccsy/m/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{ccr}{bx}{n} {<->ssub * ccsy/b/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{ccr}{sbc}{n}{<->ssub * ccsy/m/n}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMX}{ccex}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{ccex}{m}{n}{<->s*\mathscale@TPSF xccex10}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% LaTeX symbols
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{lasy}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{U}{lasy}{m}{n}{lasy}{5,6,7,8,9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{lasy}{b}{n}{
+ <->s* \mathscale@TPSF lasyb10
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% AMS fonts
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{msa}{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{msb}{}
+
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{cmbrm}}
+{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% AMS fonts should be available immediately, so they can be used in say panels.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{U}{msa}{m}{n}{cmbras}{8,9,10}%
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{U}{msb}{m}{n}{cmbrbs}{8,9,10}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% On the other hand, the cmbright package redeclares them |\AtBeginDocument|, so
+% we need to overwrite that change as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument
+ {%
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{U}{msa}{m}{n}{cmbras}{8,9,10}%
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\cmbrscale@TPSF]{U}{msb}{m}{n}{cmbrbs}{8,9,10}%
+ }%
+}
+{%
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{U}{msa}{m}{n}{msam}{5,7,10}
+
+ \DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{U}{msb}{m}{n}{msbm}{5,7,10}
+}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{euex}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{euex}{m}{n}{
+ <->s* \eulerscale@TPSF euex10
+ }{}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{euf}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\eulerscale@TPSF]{U}{euf}{m}{n}{eufm}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\eulerscale@TPSF]{U}{euf}{b}{n}{eufb}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{eur}{\skewchar\font'177}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\eulerscale@TPSF]{U}{eur}{m}{n}{eurm}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\eulerscale@TPSF]{U}{eur}{b}{n}{eurb}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{eus}{\skewchar\font'60}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\eulerscale@TPSF]{U}{eus}{m}{n}{eusm}{5,7,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\eulerscale@TPSF]{U}{eus}{b}{n}{eusb}{5,7,10}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% St Mary's Road symbol font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{stmry}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{U}{stmry}{m}{n}{stmary}{5,6,7,8,9,10}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Wasy symbol font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{wasy}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{U}{wasy}{m}{n}{wasy}{5,6,7,8,9,10}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{wasy}{b}{n}
+{ <->s*\mathscale@TPSF wasyb10
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% formal script math symbols
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{rsfs}{\skewchar\font127 }
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{U}{rsfs}{m}{n}{rsfs}{5,7,10}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% double stroke computer modern
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{dsrom}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{U}{dsrom}{m}{n}{dsrom}{8,10,12}
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{dsss}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape@TPSF[\mathscale@TPSF]{U}{dsss}{m}{n}{dsss}{8,10,12}
+
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+% Just to make sure in case these have been defined before...
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\let\csname OT1/cmr/m/n/10\endcsname\relax
+\expandafter\let\csname OT1/cmr/m/n/10.95\endcsname\relax
+\expandafter\let\csname OT1/cmr/m/n/12\endcsname\relax
+\expandafter\let\csname T1/cmr/m/n/10\endcsname\relax
+\expandafter\let\csname T1/cmr/m/n/10.95\endcsname\relax
+\expandafter\let\csname T1/cmr/m/n/12\endcsname\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Font shape selection}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Set text fonts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setlcmssTextFonts@TPSF}
+{%
+ \renewcommand{\familydefault}{\sfdefault}% Main text font is sans serif.
+ \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{lcmss}% Choose lcmss as sans serif font.
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{lcmtt}% Typewriter font lcmtt.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\setcmrTextFonts@TPSF}
+{%
+ \renewcommand{\familydefault}{\rmdefault}% Main text font is roman.
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{cmr}% Choose cmr as roman font.
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{cmtt}% Typewriter font.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\setcmfibTextFonts@TPSF}
+{%
+ \renewcommand{\familydefault}{\rmdefault}% Main text font is roman.
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{cmfib}% Choose cmfib as roman font.
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{cmtt}% Typewriter font.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\setcmssTextFonts@TPSF}
+{%
+ \renewcommand{\familydefault}{\sfdefault}% Main text font is sans serif.
+ \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{cmss}% Choose cmss as sans serif font.
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{cmtt}% Typewriter font.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\setcmbrTextFonts@TPSF}
+{%
+ \renewcommand{\familydefault}{\sfdefault}% Main text font is sans serif.
+ \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{cmbr}% Choose cmss as sans serif font.
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{cmtl}% Light Typewriter font.
+}
+
+\newcommand{\setccrTextFonts@TPSF}
+{%
+ \renewcommand{\familydefault}{\rmdefault}% Main text font is roman.
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ccr}% Choose ccr as roman font.
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{cmtt}% Typewriter font.
+}
+
+\csname set\TPSFTextfont TextFonts@TPSF\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Configure Math fonts}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\setcmmMathFonts@TPSF}
+{%
+ \SetSymbolFont{letters} {normal}{OML}{cmm} {m}{it}
+ \SetSymbolFont{symbols} {normal}{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}
+ \SetSymbolFont{largesymbols}{normal}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}
+ \SetSymbolFont{letters} {bold} {OML}{cmm} {b}{it}
+ \SetSymbolFont{symbols} {bold} {OMS}{cmsy}{b}{n}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\setccmMathFonts@TPSF}
+{%
+ \SetSymbolFont{letters} {normal}{OML}{ccm} {m}{it}
+ \SetSymbolFont{symbols} {normal}{OMS}{ccsy}{m}{n}
+ \SetSymbolFont{largesymbols}{normal}{OMX}{ccex}{m}{n}
+ \SetSymbolFont{letters} {bold} {OML}{ccm} {b}{it}
+ \SetSymbolFont{symbols} {bold} {OMS}{ccsy}{b}{n}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\seteulerMathFonts@TPSF}
+{%
+ \RequirePackage{eulervm}
+ \def\tpc@ncel##1##2{\m@th\ooalign{$\hfil##1/\hfil$\crcr$##1##2$}}
+ \def\neq{\mathrel{\m@th\mathpalette\tpc@ncel=}}
+ \DeclareSymbolFont{auxletters}{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}
+ \SetSymbolFont{auxletters}{bold}{OML}{cmm}{b}{it}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{<}{\mathrel}{auxletters}{"3C}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{>}{\mathrel}{auxletters}{"3E}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\setcmbrmMathFonts@TPSF}
+{%
+ \SetSymbolFont{letters} {normal}{OML}{cmbrm} {m}{it}
+ \SetSymbolFont{symbols} {normal}{OMS}{cmbrs}{m}{n}
+ \SetSymbolFont{largesymbols}{normal}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}
+ \SetSymbolFont{letters} {bold} {OML}{cmbrm} {b}{it}
+ \SetSymbolFont{symbols} {bold}{OMS}{cmbrs}{b}{n}
+}
+
+\csname set\TPSFMathfont MathFonts@TPSF\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Configure Operator fonts}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFMathfont}{euler}}
+{%
+ \SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}{\encodingdefault}{\TPSFOperatorfont}{m}{n}%
+ \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{\encodingdefault}{\TPSFOperatorfont}{bx}{n}%
+}
+{%
+ \SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}{OT1}{\TPSFOperatorfont}{m}{n}%
+ \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{OT1}{\TPSFOperatorfont}{bx}{n}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Alphabets for ``text inside math''}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet {\mathbf}{\encodingdefault}{\TPSFOperatorfont}{bx}{n}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet {\mathsf}{\encodingdefault}{\sfdefault}{m}{n}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet {\mathit}{\encodingdefault}{\TPSFOperatorfont}{m}{it}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet {\mathtt}{\encodingdefault}{\ttdefault}{m}{n}
+\SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{bold}{\encodingdefault}{\sfdefault}{bx}{n}
+\SetMathAlphabet\mathit{bold}{\encodingdefault}{\TPSFOperatorfont}{bx}{it}
+\SetMathAlphabet{\mathtt}{bold}{\encodingdefault}{\ttdefault}{bx}{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% |\oldstylenums| follow in style the math font setting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oldstylenums#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \spaceskip\fontdimen\tw@\font
+ \usefont{OML}{\TPSFMathfont}{\f@series}{it}%
+ \mathgroup\symletters #1%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Configure doublestroke fonts}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{dsfont}
+{%
+ \ifthenelse{\equal{\TPSFOperatorfont}{cmr}\or\equal{\TPSFOperatorfont}{cmrm}}
+ {%
+ \DeclareMathAlphabet{\mathds}{U}{dsrom}{m}{n}
+ }
+ {%
+ \DeclareMathAlphabet{\mathds}{U}{dsss}{m}{n}
+ }
+}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8d73c1c2cfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+%%
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% Package tpslifonts - part of TeXPower bundle - configure
+%% presentation fonts. Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+%%
+%% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+%% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+%% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+%% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%%
+%% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+%% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% tpslifonts.ins,v 1.2 2004/07/27 11:33:07 hansfn Exp
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+Package tpslifonts - part of TeXPower bundle - configure
+presentation fonts. Copyright (C) 1999-2004 Stephan Lehmke
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/texpower/tpslifonts}
+\askonceonly
+
+\generate{%
+ \file{tpslifonts.sty}{\from{tpslifonts.dtx}{tpslifonts}}
+}
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space tpslifonts.sty}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c69df6d3578
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/texpower/tpslifonts/tpslifonts.pdf
Binary files differ